B?0 
G-8M- 

1855 

UC-NRLF 


$c  m  101 


Jo 


J 


■ll 


■1*  —. 


§  i 


/ 


f 


THE 


LABOR-SAVING  GRAMMAR: 


DESIGNED  FOE 


SCHOOLS,    FAMILIES    AND    PRIVATE   LEARNERS. 


BY    THE    AUTHOR    OF    "GRAMMAR    SIMPLIFIED." 


Fourth  Edition—Enlarged  and  Improved. 


NEW   YORK: 

SOLD  BY  ALL  THE  PRINCIPAL  BOOKSELLERS  IN  NEW  YORK  AND  BOSTON;  AND  AT  WHOLESALE 

BY  J.  STEEN  &  .SON,  BRATTLEBORO,  VT. 


O.     H.     PLATT,     PRINTER,    BRATTLEBORO: 
1855. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1855,  by 
JEREMIAH    GREENLEAF, 
in  the  Clerk's  Office,  of  the  District  Court  of  the  District  of  Vermont. 


RECOMMENDATIONS  OF  "GRAMMAR  SIMPLIFIED.'' 


FROM  REV.  W.  ALLEN,  PRESIDENT  OF  ROWDOIN  COLLEGE. 

I  have  examined  Mr.  Greenleafs  "Grammar  Simplified,"  and  have  received 
from  him  some  explanations  of  his  mode  of  instruction,  and  am  fully  satisfied  that 
his  system  is  more  simple,  and  is  calculated  to  impart  a  knowledge  of  Grammar 
with  "»»ore  facility,  and  m  a  much  shorter  time,  than  any  now'in  use. 

™  J         3'  W.  ALLEN. 


FROM  REV.  F.  BEASLEY,  PRESIDENT  OF  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  PENN- 
SYLVANIA, PHILADELPHIA. 

I  have  examined  the  plan  of  teaching  Grammar  drawn  up  by  Mr.  Greenleaf,  and 
agree  with  those  who  have  given  their  testimony  in  its.favor.  It  is  the  best  sys- 
tem I  have  seen,  for  the  use  of  elementary  schools.  It  is  not  intended  to  supersede 
the  study  of  Murray,  or  any  other  larger  Grammar  whiclr  may  be  preferred  in  col- 
leges or  higher  schools ;  but  only  to  become  preparatory  to  them  with  young  per- 
sons, or  those  who  do  not  expect  to  obtain  a  liberal  education.  Under  this  view 
of  the  subject,  I  can  decidedly  recommend  the  Grammar  of  Mr.  Greenleaf  as  the 
best  I  have  ever  seen.  FREDERICK  BEASLEY. 

FROM  REV.  W.  HARRIS,  PRESIDENT  COLUMBIA  COLLEGE,  N.  Y.  CITY. 

Having  examined  Mr.  Greenleafs  new  system  of  English  Grammar,  I  cheerfully 
concur  in  recommending  it  as  a  system  well  calculated  to  communicate  a  compe- 
tent knowledge  of  the  subject,  as  to  all  practical  purposes,  and  in  a  much  shorter 
time  than  any  now  in  use.  WM.  HARRIS. 

FROM  REV.  J.  M.  MASON,  D.  D.,  PRESIDENT  OF  CARLISLE  COLLEGE. 

I  have  recently  looked  over,  with  some  curiosity  and  attention,  a  little  work  by 
Mr.  J.  Greenleaf,  entitled  "Grammar  Simplified."  It  is  exceedingly  brief," and 
proposes  to  teach  the  rudiments  of  that  art  in  an  almost  incredibly  short  time. 
Considering  the  voluminous  treatises  on  this  subject,  and  the  time  usually  spent  in 
acquiring  a  tolerable  knowledge  of  it,  the  author  must  necessarily  encounter  much 
public  prejudice. 

It  has  unfortunately  happened,  that  almost  every  man  of  obtuse  intellect  and 
strong  powers  of  drudgery,  thinks  himself  qualified  to  write  a  grammar,  which,  of 
course,  he  contrives  to  make  as  unintelligible  as  possible;  and  hence  grammar,  in- 
stead of  being  an  inviting,  becomes  an  intolerably  irksome  task. 

Children  have  to  labor  year  after  year,  without  much  progress,  through  a  litera- 
ry swamp,  and  when  they  grow  weary,  their  steps  are  often  quickened  by  the  birch ; 
while  the  blame  is  wholly  and  solely  to  be  attributed  to  the  stupid  method  of  in- 
struction. 

This  little  treatise  proffers  a  relief.  It  does  not  pretend  to  conduct  the  pupil 
through  the  depths  of  grammatical  science — not  to  make  him  a  master  of  its  philo- 
sophical principles,  but  to  give  him  a  competent  knowledge  of  it  Hot  practical  pur- 


poses— to  familiarize  the  matter  of  it  to  his-  mind — to  put  him  in  possession  of  those 
elements,  without  an  accurate  acquaintance  with  which,  ulterior  advances  are  im- 
practicable. 

The  whole  secret  lies  in  stripping  it  of  every  thing  but  the  very  essentials — in 
placing  these  before  the  eye  of  the  learner,  and  in  accustoming  him  to  the  applica- 
tion of  every  thing  as  he  goes  along. 

The  public  may  be  assured  that  Mr.  Greenleaf  is  no  quack ;  bat  that  he  per- 
forms much  more  "than  the  modesty  of  his  title  would  lead  his  reader  to  expect. 

J.  M.  MASON. 


FROM  REV.  E.  D.  GRIFFIN,  PRESIDENT  OF  WILLIAMS  COLLEGE. 

I  have  read,  with  some  care,  the  second  edition  of  Mr.  Greenleafs  Grammar 
Simplified.  There  is  nothing  miraculous  or  mysterious  in  it,  nor  in  the  effects 
which  it  is  said  to  produce.  The  whole  is  comprehended  in  the  following  facts : 
Mr.  Greenleif  has  attentively  studied  the  principles  of  English  Grammar;  and, 
with  the  exception  perhaps  of  a  few  minor  details,  has  exhibited  them  with  entire 
correctness.  His  manner  of  expressing  them  is  short,  lucid,  and  striking.  He  has 
brought  together  a  greater  number  of  principles  than  is  found  in  almost  any  other 
grammar,  and  those  happily  selected  ;  and  has  presented  them  in  a  naked  form, 
disencumbered  of  all  unnecessary  matter.  There  is  nothing  heavy,  nothing  per- 
plexed. The  arrangement  is  new,  and  strikes  me  favorably.  How  "much  is  gained 
by  this  means,  and  particularly  by  speaking  so  much  to  the  eye,  I  could  better 
judge  were  I  to  see  the  effects  exemplified  in  a  school.  Much  will  depend  on  the 
skill  and  adroitness  of  the  teacher;  but  I  am  prepared  to  say,  let  him  have  the 
lively  conception  and  aptness  to  teach,  which  are  manifested  in  the  compilation  of 
this  Grammar;  let  him,  in  short,  be  Mr.  Greenleaf  himself,  and  children  will  be 
likely  to  become  initiated  sooner  and  more  thoroughly  upon  this  plan  than  upon 
any  other  which  I  have  seen.  E.  D.  GRIFFIN. 


FROM  REV.  \V.  STAUGHTONj  PRESIDENT  OF   COLUMBIAN  COLLEGE. 

I  have  perused  the  work,  entitled  "  Grammar  Simplified,"  bv  Mr.  Greenleaf.  It 
is  precisely  what  it  declares  itself,  "An  Ocular  Analysis  of  the  English  Language." 
It  is  scarcely  possible  to  enter  the  temple  of  grammatical  knowledge  by  a  more 
casv,  or  a  more  beautiful  inlet.  In  my  judgment,  the  interna!  merit  of  the  work 
must  insure  its  circulation.  WILLIAM  STAUGHTON. 


FROM  REV.  C.  A.  GOODRICH,  PROFESSOR  IN  YALE  COLLEGE. 

From  a  cursory  examination  of  Mr.  Greenleafs  method  of  instructing  in  Eng- 
lish Grammar,  I  am  satisfied  that  it  combines  the  advantages  of  greater  simplicity, 
precision  and  correctness;  and  that,  if  successfully  applied,  it  will  advance  the 
young  student  in  the  technical  business  of  parsing,  with  more  rapidity  than  any 
system  within  my  knowledge.  CHAUNCEY  A.  GOODRICH. 


RmWI  feOWMte&wtt*     --  -:'-' 


RECOMMENDATIONS  OF  THE   "IMPROVED  GRAMMAR." 


For  the  lat  Edition. 

FROM  WESLEYAN  UNIVERSITY. 

Having  examined  "Greenleafs  Improved  Grammar,"  I  think  it  calculated  to  impart  a 
knowledge  of  the  subject  much  quicker  and  much  easier  than  any  other  system  ever  published. 
As  an  elementary  work,  I  consider  it  by  far  the  best  Grammar  extant ;  and  a  great  improve- 
ment upon  "  Grammar  Simplified."  WILBUR  FISK,  D.  D.,  President. 

FROM  CAMBRIDGE  COLLEGE. 

When  connected  with  Harvard  College,  President  Kirkland  and  myself  examined,  and 
recommended  Greenleafs  new  system  of  English  Grammar,  and  thought  it  the  best  book  of 
the  kind,  for  beginners,  we  had  ever  seen  :  but  having  recently  read  his  "  Improved  Gram- 
mar," so  far  as  to  understand  the  author's  system  and  arrangement,  I  am  well  satisfied,  that 
it  offers  considerable  advantages  over  "  Grammar  Simplified." 

SIDNEY  WILLARD,  late  Professor  of  the  Learned  Languages. 


FROM  BROWN  UNIVERSITY,  PROVIDENCE. 

We  have  given  Rome  attention  to  Mr.  Greenleafs  system  of  teaching  English  Grammar, 
and  are  of  the  opinion,  thatlt  possesses  peculiar  advantages,  and  is  worthy  of  public  patron- 
age. H.  B.  HACKETT,  Professor  of  the  Learned  Languages. 
WM.  GAMMELL,  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Oratory. 


For  the  2d  Edition. 

FROM  BALTIMORE  COLLEGE. 
Having  examined  "  Greenleafs  Improved  Grammar,"  I  think  it  is  calculated  to  impart  a 
knowledge  of  the  subject  in  a  much  shorter  time  than  any  other  system  ever  published. 
B.vltimoiie,  Feb.  10,  1844.  HORACE  MORRISON,  TtmUtmt. 

FROM  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  PENNSYLVANIA. 
I  h:ive  carefully  perused  Mr,  Greenleafs  "Improved  Grammar,"  and  have  no  hesitation 

to  say,  that,  in  my  opinion,  it  incomparably  excels  all  the  Grammars  of  the  English  language 
that  have  ever  come  under  my  observation.  Mr.  Greenleafs  efforts,  on  this  very  important 
subject,  have  been  indefatigable,  and  cannot  fail  to  be  successful. 

S.  B.  WYLIE,  Professor  of  the  Learned  Languages. 
Philadelphia, »March  14, 1844. 


FROM  UNION  COLLEGE. 

Schenectady,  May  11,  1843. 

Having  examined  "  Greenleafs  Improved  Grammar,"  it  gives  me  pleasure  to  say.  that,  as 
an  elementary  work,  I  consider  it  admirably  calculated,  on  account  oi'its  comprehensiveness, 
perspicuity  and  brevity,  for  the  use  of  schools,  and  every  way  deserving  of  the  public  patronage. 

N.  B.  Absence  at  the  South  has  prevented  my  having  an  opportunity  to  give  your  Gram- 
mar an  earlier  examination.  Yours, very  respectfully, 

J.  Gbeenleaf,  Esu-  E.  NOTT,  President. 


PREFACE.  -f£s 


Several  years  since,  I  published  a  work  entitled  "  Grammar  Simplified,"*  which  claimed  the  merit  of  being  calculated 
to  impart  a  knowledge  of  Grammar  with  more  facility,  and  in  a  much  shorter  time,  than  any  other  system  ever  before  published. 
Many  of  the  first  literary  men  of  the  day,  (among  whom  were  the  Presidents  and  Professors  of  twenty  of  our  principal  Colleges,) 
thought  its  claims  were  well  founded,  and  recommended  the  work  in  a  most  flattering  manner.  It  was  drawn  up  on  a  plan  entirely 
original,  and  so  great  were  the  advantages  which  it  offered  to  beginners,  that  a  competent  knowledge  of  this  important  branch  of  edu- 
cation f  could  be  acquired  from  it  in  three  weeks.  It  was  then  supposed  impossible  "  to  enter  the  temple  of  grammatical  knowl- 
edge by  a  shorter,  more  easy,  or  a  more  beautiful  inlet."  But  Experience ■,  that  best  of  schoolmasters,  has  enabled  me  to  present  to  the 
public  a  new  and  much  better  system,  which  imparts  as  much  knowledge  in  one  week,  -as  "  Grammar  Simplified  "  does  in  three. 
Hence  its  vast  pre-eminence  over  all  other  works  of  the  kind.  For  beginners,  it  is  to  all  other  grammars,!  what  a  Railroad  Gar  is, 
in  point  of  speed,  to  an  Ox  Cart !  It  is  constructed  upon  a  plan  entirely  different,  in  many  respects,  from  its  predecessor,  and  its 
method  of  instruction  is  much  easier  and  more  pleasing,  both  to  teacher  and  learner.  The  rapidity  and  ease  with  which  novices  progress 
from  it  is  so  truly  astonishing,  that  it  appears  almost  miraculous.  In  fact,  this  hitherto  intolerably  long  and  irksome  study,  is  now  ren- 
dered so  very  short,  interesting  and  agreeable,  that  it  becomes  a  mere  matter  of  pleasure  and  amusement,  rather  than  labor.  However 
incredible  it  may  seem,  actual  and  well-tried  experiments  have  demonstrated  that  a  respectable  knowledge  of  Etymology  and  Syntax 
can  be  acquired  from  this  treatise,  with  the  greatest  facility,  in  the  short  period  of  six  days  :a  to  which  fact  many  literary  gentlemen 
can  testify.  It  has  also  been  ascertained,  that  a  hundred  can  be  taught  from  it,  in  a  class,  as  easily  as  a  dozen  ;  although  ten  or  fifteen 
are  as  many  as  can  profitably  be  taught  at  a  time,  from  any  other  book  of  the  kind — not  even  excepting  u  Grammar  Simplified." 
Besides,  should  any  one  prefer  teaching  in  the  "  good  old  way,"  it  is  so  arranged  that  he  can  be  accommodated  ;  while  at  the  same 
time  the  drudgery  of  his  pupils  will  be  greatly  abridged.  It  is  likewise  calculated  to  be  mueh  more  useful  in  families  and  to  private 
learners,  than  other  Grammars.  Having  a  Key,  by  which  specimens  of  all  the  common  and  critical  errors  in  syntax  can  be  corrected 
at  a  glance,  it  will  go  very  far,  even  without  the  aid  of  a  teacher,  towards  purifying  our  language  from  those  corruptions  and  provin- 
cialisms, to  which  all  living  languages  are  liable. 

The  "Labor-Saving  Grammar"  has  been  submitted  to  six  of  our  principal  Colleges,  and  all  agree  in  the  opinion  that  it  is  a  great 
improvement  upon  "Grammar  Simplified,"  and  that  it  incomparably  excels  all  other  systems  extant. 

But  notwithstanding  the  usual  method  of  instruction  is  exceedingly  stupid,  and  notwithstanding  the  labor  of  months,  and  even 
years,  is  now  reduced  to  a  delightful  study  of  a  few  days,  yet  far  be  it  from  me,  to  detract  from  the  merits  of  others.  I  have  not 
labored  to  subvert  systems  (many  of  which  are  written  with  great  ability,)  but  merely  to  simplify  the  subject,  and  to  substitute  a  new 
and  more  expeditious  mode  of  teaching.  Not  to  introduce  novelties  and  innovations,  but  merely  to  remove  the  impediments,  and  clear 
away  the  stumbling-blocks  from  the  paths  of  Grammatical  knowledge.  Thus,  to  abridge  toil  and  save  cost,  in  acquiring  the  rudiments 
of  English  Grammar,  was  the  sole  object  of  this  publication.  In  its  construction,  therefore,  I  have  not  found  it  necessary  to  indulge 
in  idle  theories  or  visionary  speculations,  but  have  adopted  the  general  principles  of  our  most  approved  authors.  In  other  words,  I 
have  condemned  the  old  and  awkwardly  constructed  building,  on  account  of  its  inconvenience,  but  have  found  sufficient  good  and 
sound  materials  therein,  to  build  a  new,  splendid,  and  commodious  one. 

As  the  preceding  editions  of  the  "Labor-Saving  Grammar"  contain  but  two  parts,  [Etymology  and  Syntax,6]  and  as  these  are 
disencumbered  of  all  non-essentials,  the  book  is  consequently  exceedingly  brief; — yet  long  experience  has  proved  it  to  be  sufficiently 
copious  for  all  practical  purposes.  Many  objections,  however,  have  been  raised  against  it,  by  those  of  "  strong  powers  of  drudgery." 
on  account  of  its  brevity  and  the  omission  of  Orthography  and  Prosody.  To  obviate  these  cavilings,  and  at  the  same  time  to  render 
it  suitable  also  for  High  Schools,  Academies,  &c,  the  present  edition  is  not  only  considerably  enlarged,  but  the  other  parts  are  added. 

Some,  perhaps,  may  think  that  those  who  learn  in  so  quick  a  way,  will  be  more  apt  to  forget,  than  those  who  study  in  the  old 
way.  But  this  for  reasons  the  most  self-evident,  is  also  a  mistaken  notion  ;  as  the  former  have  more  of  the  practical  part  in  one  week, 
than  the  latter  have  in  one  year. 

In  short,  the  improved  system  should  not  only  be  used  in  every  school  in  which  English  Grammar  is  taught,  but  should  be  in  the 
possession  of  every  family  and  private  learner. 

H§^  See  Directions  on  the  next  page.  THE  AUTHOR. 

*  This  book  is  probably  better  recommended,  and  has  had  a  more  rapid  sale,  than  any  -work  of  the  kind,  ever  before  published.        t  Etymology  and  Syntax. 
t  Except  "  Grammar  Simplified."  a  Provided  scholars  possess  common  capacity  to  learn,  be  suitable  readers,  pay'  strict  attention,  and  have  a  competent 

teacher.        b  Because  these  are  the  only  parts  that  are  generally  studied  from  grammar*? 


021 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


The  studv  of  English  grammar,  in  the  usual  way,  is  a  long,  dry,  and  irksome 
task.  "  Children  have  to  labor  year  after  year,"  says  Dr.  Mason,  "  without  much 
progress,  through  a  literary  swamp,  and  when  they  grow  weary,  their  steps  are 
often  quickened  by  the  birch,  while  the  blame  is  wholly  and  solely  to  be  attribu- 
ted to  the  stupid  method  of  msiruetion."  Many  attempts  have  been  m«de  of  late, 
to  simplify  the  subject-  But  all  appear  tehave  failed.  In  fact,,  some  of  oar  mod- 
ern authors  have  absolutely  rendered  the  sciencemore  abstruse  than  ever.  Instead 
of  simplifying  the  subject,  they  have  mystified  it.  Instead  of  clearing  away  the 
stumbling  blocks  from  the  crooked  paths  of  grammatical  knowledge,  they  have 
seemingly  labored,  with  all  their  might  to  throw  more  obstacles  in  the  way.  It 
was  very  desirable,  tlierefore,  that  a  much  shorter  and  easier  method  should  be  in- 
troduced. Mr.  Greenleaf,  alone,  seems  to  have  hit  upon  this  desideratum.  He 
has  not  only  struck  out  a  new  and  a  straight  path,  but  has  completely  removed  all 
impediments  therefrom.  His  "  Grammar  Simplified,"  published  several  years 
since,  proffered  a  partial  relief,  but  his  "  Labor-saving  system,"  which  is  now  pre 
sented  to  the  public,  offers  relief  in  full.  So  great  indeed,  is  the  "  railroad  speed  " 
with  which  beginners  progress  from  it,  that  one  week's  agreeable  study  thene>- 
from,  is  fully  equal  to  one  year  of  irksome  drudgery  in  the  usual  way.  A  great 
saving,  forsooth,  of  time,  labor,  and  expense ;  and,  "  time,"  says  Dr.  Franklin,  •'  is 
money." 

But,  notwithstanding  the  great  advantages  which  this  book  offers,  both  in  fami- 
lies and  school  rooms-,,  over  all  other  works  of  the  kind,  yet  it  will  undoubtedly 
have  to  encounter  much  public  prejudice;  as  many  people  (like  the  Dutchman 
who  always  went  to  mill  with  a  great  stone  in  one  end  of  his  bag.)  are  exceedingly 
prone  to  esteem  the  "good  old  way"  the  best,  let  it  be  ever- so  stupid,  foolish  or  ab- 
surd. Hence,  it  will  probably  be  opposed,./?™**,  by  all  teachers,  and  others,  of  ob- 
tuse intellects  and  strong  powers  of  drudgery;  secondly,  by  all  those  teachers  whose 
interest  it  may  be  to  keep  their  pupils  drilling,  as  long  as  possible  in  grammar  ; 
thirdly,  by  all  superficial  and  quack  teachers,,  who  (although  they  may  find  it  no 
very  difficult  matter  to  teach  from  other  grammars,,  audi  to  keep  up,  perhaps,,  with 


their  pupils,)  cannot  even  begin  to  teach  from  this  system*  without  exposing  their 
ignorance ;  fourthly,  by  all  the  host  of  pretended  simplifyers,  from  the  days  of  Mur- 
ray to  the  present  time.  Thus  it  is  to  be  expected,  that  many  instructors  will  en- 
deavor to  keep  the  "  Labor-saving  Grammar  "out  of  their  schools  as  long  as  possi- 
ble—some through  stupidity,  some  through  sinister  motives-,  some  through  ignorance, 
and*  some- through  envy.  It  is  confidently  believed,  however,- that  all  teachers,  ex- 
cept the  above  mentioned  classes,  as  well  as  all  other  real  friends  of  improvement, 
of  whatever  profession,  will  give  it  their  most  cordial  approbation.  "0,  but," 
says  teacher  Snooks!  **  I  dislike  this  quick  way  of  learning.  grammar-^-becaHse, 
quickly  learned,  quickly  forgotten — besides  it  strengthens- themeinory  of  pupils- to 
be  a  long  time  in  acquiring  a  knowledge  of  the  subject.'1'  Sheer  nonsense.  It 
strengthens  his  purse  more  like!  With  eqaal  propriety  he  might  say,,  it  would 
be  better  for  a  person  wishing  to  go  from  Boston  to  Cape  Cod,  to  take*  the  "round 
about"  land  way,  on  foot.,and  be'*  six  or  eight  days  on  the  journey — rather  than 
take  the  "straight  way,"  by  steamboat, requiring  but  two  or  three  hours  on  the  trip, 
and  at  a>  mfltctk1  less  expense.  Perhaps  the  long  route  might  strengthen  his  limb*, 
and-  doubtless  it  would  strengthen  his  memory, — inasmuch  as  he  would  probably 
never  forget  what  a  fool  he  had  been ! 

But  let  the  worth  of  theories  and  systems  be*tested  by  their  practical  usefulness, 
and  let  them  be  appreciated  accordingly-  This  done,  and  I  am  bold  to  declare, 
that  Greenleaf's  Improved  Grammar  will  be  immediately  introduced  into  every 
school  in-  the*  United  States.  Even  by  the  usual  process  of  teaching,  it  will  be 
found  to  be  far  preferable  to  other  grammars. 

Mr.  G.  has  taught  in  all  the  principal  cities  in  the  "Union,  and  is  probably  better 
qualified  for  an  undertaking  of  this  kind,  than  any  person  living.  We  sincerely 
think,  that  his  book  is  cheaper  at  one  dollar,  tnan  any  other  grammar  at  one 
cent.  The  public  may  rest  assured,  it  is  absolutely  what  it  professes  to  be — 
mullum  inparvo,  utile  cum  dulci.     "A  word  to  the  wise  is  sufficient." 

PUBLISHER. 

New  York,  1855.. 


EXPLANATIONS  AND  METHOD  OF  INSTRUCTION. 


Boor  First  is  designed  exclusively  for  beginners,  and  contains  barely  a  suffi- 
cient quantity  of  Etymology  and  Syntax  to  enable  them  (with  the  aid  of  a  compe- 
tent teacher,)  to  commence  syntactical  parsing.  The  unmavked  Parsing;  Lessons, 
however,  [part  or  all,]  are  appropriate  for  more  advanced  scholars,  and  are  more 
convenient  for  them,  than  to  parse  from  other  books. 

Book  Second  contains  all  the  parts  of  grammar  hi  full,  methodically  arrang«d, 
without  the  least  regard  to  Book  i  irst,  or  the  least  dependence  upon  it  ;*  being  com- 
plete in  itself, — designed  to  be  studied  during  intermediate  school  hours,  and  occa- 
sionally to  be  referred  to,  while  parsing. 

DIRECTIONS. 

After  organizing  a  class,  eominence  by  hearing  your  pupils  read  slowly,  and* 
simultaneously,  the  definitions  of  all  the  parts  of  speech,  bee  p.  5  &  6.  This  should 
be  repeated  twice,  and  while  going  through,  in  this  manner,  the  second  time,  the 
readings  should  be  accompanied  by  such  explanations  and  illustrations*  from  the 
teacher,  as  will  enable  them,  with  suitable  promptings,  (the  parts  of  speech  being 
designated,)  to  commence  parsing.  Then  turn  to  page  7,  and  let  them  recite  sev- 
eral times  in  concert,  the  initials  of  all  the  parts  of  speech  ;  thus — What  does  ar 
stand  for?  Answer,  article — nt  noun-—/??  pronoun, &c.  In  the  next  place,  recite 
several  times,  in  the  same  manner,  the  definition  of  the  indicative  mood,  at  the 
head  of  lesson  1st.    Then  commence  syntactical  parsing,  in  concert  ;  at  parsing 

ar    n  v 

lesson  1st,— (A  boy  whispers.)  What  part  of  speech,  says  the  teacher,  is  a  I  An- 
swer, an  article.  What  kind,  definite  or  indefinite  ?  Ans.  indefimte.  What  noun 
does  it  belong  to V  Ans.  to.  boy.  What  is  boy?  Ans.  a  noun.  What  kind,  com- 
mon or  proper  ?  Ans.  common.  What  gender*  masculine  or  feminine  *  Ans.  mas- 
culine. What  person,  the  second  or  third  t  Ans.  third  person.  What  number, 
singular  or  plural?  Ans.  singular.  What  case,  nominative  or  objective?  Ans. 
nominative.  Nominative  to  what  verb?  Ans.  to  whispers.  According  to  Rule  1st, 
says  the  teacher;  [repeat  it.]  What  is  whispers  ?  Ans.— What  kind,  transitive  or  in- 
transitive? Ans.— Regular  or  irregular?  Ans.— What  mood,  indicative  or  *m6- 
junctive  ?  Ans.— What  tense,  present  or  imperfect  ?  Ans.— What  person  and  num- 
ber ?  Ans.— What  does  it  agree  with ?  Ans.— According  to  Rule  2d— [repeat  the 
rule.]    As  soon  as  the  teacher  may  think  it  will  answer,  he  should  prompt  in  the 


*  The  teacher  should  never  attempt  to  illustrate  any  thing  to  his  pupils  which  he  cannot 
make  them  understand.  Hence  the  easy  parts  of  grammar,  only,  should  be  explained  in 
the  first  place,  (barely  enough  to  enable  them,  with  suitable  promptings,  to  commence  syn- 
tactical parsing)  and  the  more  intricate  parts  should  be  explained  progressively.  He  should 
always  endeavor  to  keep  their  minds  as  unembarrassed  as  possible,  and  should  often  caution 
them  against  "getting  puzzled  :"  and  as  a  preventive,  should  frequently  change  from  parsing 
to  recitations.  Tell  them  also  that  they  must  not  try  to  understand  any  faster  than  they 
can  do  so,  without  the  least  perplexity  of  mind  ;  and  that  "  practice  makes  perfect."  Thus 
it  appears,  much  depends  on  the  skill  and  judgment  of  the  teacher. 


following  rnnnner.  (Mary  has  written  a  letter  )'  What  is  Mary?  Ans-. — What 
kind?  Ans. — What  gender, person,  and  number?  Ans. — What  case?  <$»c.  And 
as  soon  as  sufficiently  initiated,  he  should  let  them  go- on  without  any,. or  wifh  but 

ar  n  v    pr         n 

very  little  prompting — thus,  (The  gentlemen  live  in  Boston.)  The  is  the- definite 
article-,  and  belongs  to  gentlemen — gentlemen  is  a  common  nonn,  masculine  ren- 
der, third  person,  plural  number,  and  nominative  ease  to  live?  according  to  Rule 
1st;  [repeat  the  rule.}  Live  is  an  intrausitive  regular  verb,  indicative  mood,  pres- 
ent tense,  third  person,  plural  nui»ber,and  agrees  with  gentlemen;  according  to 
Rule  2d  ;  [repeat  the  rule.]  It  will  not  be  advisable  for  the  teacher,  in  the  first 
place,  to  explain  to  his  pupils  any  of  the  moods  except  the  indicative  and  subjunc- 
tive, or  any  of  the  tenses  except  the  present  and  imperfect.  They  should  be  in- 
fcrmed  at  the  commencement,  that  every  verb  in  Lesson  1st,  is  in  the  Ind.  mood; 
and  when  they  come  to  the  first  verb  iir  tlie  perfect  tense,  they  should  all  stop  and 
commit  to  memory,  and  recite  in  concert,  the  signs  of  the  different  tenses  near  the 
bottom*  of  page  0. 

After  going  through  with  lesson' 1st,  commence  at  lesson  2d,  (committing  and 
reciting  in  the  first  place,  in  concert,  all  that  stands  at  the  head  of  the  same,)  and 
so  on,  with  toll  the  marked  les*©fis.  As  a  relaxation  from  parsing,  the  class  should 
occasionally  be  exercised  in  a  simultaneous  recitation  of  the  List  of  Prepositions, 
Conjunctions  and  Pronominal  Adjectives,  &c,  on  page  6;  and  when  all  these 
be  thoroughly  committed,  turn  occasionajly  to  Conjugation  of  verbs,  Catalogue 
of  irregular  verbs,  or  to  any  thing  the  teacher  may  think  best,  and  recite  as 
above.  By  this  meswis,  and  by  giving  short  lessons  to  he  learned  during  interme- 
diate school  hours,  all  that  is  necessary  can  easily  be  committed  to  memory.  The 
first  nine  Rules*  should  be  committed,  before  leaving  the  marked  lessons.  Alter 
going  through  with  all  the  marked  lessons,  as  above,  commence  at  the  unmarked 
lessons,  and  continue  to  the  cud  of  the  same.  In  large  classes,  it  has  been  ascer- 
tained, that  beginners  will  learn  much  faster  to  parse,  generally  in  concert.  Even 
in  small  classes,  it  has  been  found,  ther  will  learn  faster  to  parse  most  of  thelime 
in  this  way,  especially  during  two  or  thres  of  the  first  days.  But  all  classes,  large 
or  small,  should  always  recite  in  concert,  while  practising  as  above.  In  common 
schools,  the  teacher  can  attend  to  his  grammar  p«pils  once  or  twice  a  day,  for  ten 
or  fifteen  minutes  at  a  time,  and  then  let  them  go- to  their  other  studies.  If  they 
be  considerably  advanced,  perhaps  the  teacher  may  think  it  advisable  not  to  have 
them  go  through  with  the  "Marked  Lessons:" — in  which  case  they  can  commence 
parsing  at  any  of  the  "  Unmarked  Lessons,"  and  afterwards  (if  deemed  necessary.) 
they  can  bring  other  books  to  parse  from.  Should  he  think  that  parsing,  &c  in 
concert  disturbs  the  school  too  much;  he  can  hear  them  *•*<  <  ite  and  parse 
separately.  Should  any  one  prefer  teaching  the  usual  way,  he  can  let  his  pupils 
commit  as  much  as  he  may  think  necessary,  and  then  commence  liaising  at  le>- 
son  1st. i 

♦Sufficient  to  apply  in  Parsing. 


OOBL      IF'IIFLST 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


Question.     What  is  Grammar  ? 

Answer.  Grammar  is  the  art  of  speaking  and  writing  correctly, 
or  the  proper  use  of  words. 

Ques.     How  many  words  are  there  in  the  English  language? 

Ans.     About  forty  thousand.  « 

Ques.     How  are  words  divided  ? 

Ans.  They  are  divided  into  ten  parts  or  sorts,  commonly  called 
Parts  of  Speech ;  viz. — the  Article,  Noun,  Pronoun,  Adjective, 
Verb,  Participle,  Adverb,  Preposition,  Conjunction,  and  Interjec- 
tion.    Of  these,  the  Noun  and  Verb  are  the  most  important. 

NOUN. 

Ques.     "What  is  a  Noun  ? 

Ans.  A  noun  is  a  word  which  is  the  name  of  any  person,  place, 
or  thing ;  as,  John,  London,  house,  virtue. 

VERB. 

Ques.     What  is  a  Verb  ? 

Ans.  A  Verb  is  a  word  which  expresses  action  or  being ;  as, 
birds  fly,  borses  run,  Peter  lives. 

PRONOUN. 

Ques.     What  is  a  Pronoun  ? 

Ans.  A  Pronoun  is  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun,  to  avoid 
the  too  frequent  repetition  of  the  same  word ;  as,  Dick  is  idle,  and 
he  must  be  punished. 

Ques.     What  are  Common  nouns  ? 

Ans.  Common  nouns  are  the  names  of  whole  sorts,  or  species ; 
as,  man,  horse,  dog,  tree. 

Ques.     What  are  Proper  nouns  ? 

Ans.  Proper  nouns  are  the  names  of  individuals  ;  as,  Thomas, 
Jane,  Boston. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Masculine  gender  ? 

Ans.     The  masculine  gender  denotes  males  ;  as,  man,  boy,  lion. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Feminine  gender  ? 

Ans.  The  feminine  gender  denotes  females;  &s,woman, girl,lioness. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Neuter  gender  ? 

Ans.  The  neuter  gender  denotes  things  without  sex ;  as,  chair, 
peach,  table. 

Ques.     What  is  the  First  person  ? 

Ans.     The  first  person  denotes  the  person  speaking  ;  as,  /learn. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Second  person  ? 

Ans.  The  second  person  denotes  the  person  spoken  to  ;  as,  you 
learn. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Third  person  ? 

Ans.  The  third  person  denotes  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of; 
as,  he  learns,  the  tree  grows. 

[Nouns  have  but  two  persons,  the  second  and  third,  but  pronouns 
have  three.] 

Ques.     What  is  the  Singular  number  ? 

Ans.    The  singular  number  denotes  but  one  object ;  as,  pen,  book. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Plural  number  ? 

Ans.  The  plural  number  denotes  more  objects  than  one;  as, 
pens,  books. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Nominative  case  ? 

Ans.  The  nominative  case  is  the  actor,  or  subject  of  the  verb ; 
as,  the  boy  runs  ; — it  generally  comes  before  the  verb. 


Ques.     What  is  the  Possessive  case  ? 

Ans.  The  possessive  case  denotes  property  or  possession ;  as, 
John's  book,  his  cane. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Objective  case  ? 

Ans.  The  objective  case  is  the  object  on  which  the  action  of  a 
verb  terminates ;  as,  Moses  smote  the  rock.  It  generally  comes 
after  the  verb. 

Ques.  How  are  Personal  pronouns  distinguished  from  Relative 
pronouns  ? 

Ans.  Who,  whose,  whom,  which,  what,  and  that,  are  relatives, 
and  all  others  are  personals. 

Ques.     What  is  a  transitive  verb  ? 

Ans.  A  transitive  verb  denotes  action  or  energy  which  termi- 
nates on  some  object ;  as  Peter  struck  Joseph. 

Ques.     What  is  an  Intransitive  verb  ? 

Ans.  An  intransitive  verb  denotes  simple  being  or  existence, 
or  it  denotes  action  which  is  limited  to  the  nominative  ;  as,  I  am, 
he  stands,  the  fish  swims. 

Ques.     What  are  Regular  verbs  ? 

Ans.  Regular  verbs  are  those  which  end  in  ed,  when  used  in 
the  past  time  ;  as,  I  preached  yesterday. 

Ques.     What  are  Irregular  verbs  ? 

Ans.  Irregular  verbs  are  those  which  do  not  end  in  ed  in  the 
past  time  ;  as,  I  torote  yesterday. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Indicative  Mood? 

Ans.  The  indicative  mood  simply  indicates  or  declares  a  thing; 
as,  I  learn. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Subjunctive  Mood? 

Ans.  The  subjunctive  mood  expresses  action  or  being  in  a 
doubtful  or  conditional  manner ;  as,  if  I  learn. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Present  Tense? 

Ans.     The  present  tense  denotes  present  time ;  as,  I  am  writing. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Past  or  Imperfect  Tense  ? 

Ans.     The  past  tense  denotes  past  time  ;  as,  I  wrote  yesterday. 

Ques.     What  is  the  Future  Tense  ? 

Ans.  The  future  tense  denotes  future  time  ;  as,  I  shall  write  to- 
morrow. 

ARTICLE. 

Ques.     What  is  an  Article  ? 

Ans.  An  article  is  a  word  placed  before  nouns  to  limit  their 
signification ;  as,  a  garden,  an  eagle,  the  woman. 

Ques.     How  many  articles  are  there  ? 

Ans.  Only  three,  viz. — a,  an,  and  the  [in  reality  but  two,  as  a 
and  an  mean  the  same.] 

Ques.     How  are  articles  distinguished  ? 

Ans.  A  or  an  is  called  the  Indefinite  article,  and  the  is  called 
the  Definite. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Ques.     What  is  a  Participle  ? 

Ans.  A  participle  is  a  word  derived  from  a  verb,  and  partakes 
much  of  the  nature  of  a  verb ;  as,  I  heard  a  child  crying ;  I  saw 
the  letter  written. 

Ques.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  present  participle,  and 
a  past  or  perfect  one  ? 


BOOK    FIRST. 


Ans.  The  present  participle  denotes  present  time,  and  ends  in 
ing  ;  as  speaking.  The  Past  participle  denotes  past  time,  and  does 
not  end  in  ing  ;  as,  spoken. 

ADJECTIVE. 

Ques.     What  is  an  Adjective  ? 

Ans.  An  adjective  is  a  word  which  expresses  some  quality  or 
property  of  a  noun  ;  as,  a  good  boy,  a  bad  girl,  a  sweet  apple. 

ADVERB. 

Ques.     What  is  an  Adverb  ? 

Ans.  An  adverb  is  a  word  used  to  qualify  or  modify  the  sense 
of  verbs ;  as,  the  man  fought  bravely  ;  the  birds  fly  swiftly. 

PREPOSITION. 

Ques.    What  is  a  Preposition  ? 


Ans.  A  preposition  is  a  word  which  serves  to  connect  words, 
and  show  the  relation  between  them  ;  as,  a  bird  on  the  tree ;  a 
squirrel  in  the  cage. 

CONJUNCTION. 

Ques.    What  is  a  Conjunction  ? 

Ans.  A  conjuuction  is  a  word  chiefly  used  to  connect  senten- 
ces, joining  two  or  more  simple  sentences  into  one  compound  one  ; 
as,  Henry  works  and  George  plays ;  Jack  will  study,  or  go  to  sea. 

INTERJECTION. 

Ques.     What  is  an  Interjection  ? 

Ans.  An  interjection  is  a  word  used  to  express  passion  or  emo- 
tion; as,  oh!  alas! 


-     A  LIST   OF   THE    PRONOMINAL   ADJECTIVES. 
One,  other,  another,  each,  every,  either,  neither,  this,  that,  these,  those,  all,  any,  both,  same,  such,  some,  former,  latter,  none. 

A  LIST  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  PREPOSITIONS. 

Of,  to,  for,  by,  with,  in, — into,  within,  without,  over,  under,  through, — above,  below,  between,  beneath,  from,  beyond, — at,  up,  down,  before,  behind, — 

on,  or  upon,  among,  after,  about,  against. 

A  LIST  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  CONJUNCTIONS. 

And,  if,  that,  both,  then,  since,  for,  because,  therefore,  wherefore, — But,  or,  nor,  as,  than,  lest,  though, 

unless,  either,  neither,  yet,  notwithstanding. 


DECLENSION  OF  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


FIRST  PERSON. 

Sing. 
Norn.  I, 

Pass,  my  or  mine, 
Obj.  me. 

Plu. 
Nom.  we, 
Poss.  our  or  ours, 
Obj.  us. 


SECOND   PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  thou, 
Poss.  thy  or  thine, 
Obj.  thee. 

Plu. 
Nom.  ye  or  you, 
Poss.  your  or  yours, 
Obj.  you. 


THIRD  PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  he, 
Poss.  his, 
Obj.  him. 

Plu. 
Nom.  they, 
Poss.  their  or  theirs, 
Obj.  them. 


TniRD  PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  she, 
Poss.  her  or  hers, 
Obj.  her. 

Plu. 
Nom.  they, 
Poss.  their  or  theirs, 
Obj.  them. 


THIRD   PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom   it, 
Poss.  its, 
Obj.  it. 

Plu. 
Nom.  they, 
Poss.  their  or  theirs, 
Obj.  them. 


DECLENSION  OF  THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 
Simgular  and  Plural. 


Nom. 

who, 

Poss. 

whose,                            Obj.  whom. 

Nom. 

whoever, 

Poss. 

whosever,                      Obj.  whomever, 
whosesoever,                 Obj.  whomsoever. 

Nom. 

whosever, 

Poss. 

' 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

wise, 

wiser, 

wisest. 

little, 

less  or  lesser, 

least. 

great, 

greater. 

greatest. 

much  or  many, 

more, 

most. 

virtuous, 

more  virtuous, 

most  virtuous 

near, 

nearer,              ' 

nearest  or  next. 

amiable, 

less  amiable, 

least  amiable 

late, 

later, 

latest  or  last. 

good, 

better, 

best. 

far, 

farther, 

farthest. 

bad, 

wor=e, 

worst. 

SIGNS  OF  THE  DIFFERENT  TENSES. 

Have,  hast  and  has,  are  signs  of  the  perfect  tense  ;  had  and  hadst,  of  the  pluperfect ;  shall  and  will,  of  the  first  future  ;  shall  have  and 
will  have,  of  the  second  future  ;  [that  is,  when  joined  to  other  verbs,  in  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods.] 

A  LIST  OF  THE  AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

May,  can,  must,  might,  coidd,  would,  shoidd,  shall,  do,  be,  have,  will.     [The  last  four  are  sometimes  principal  verbs.] 

DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


Sing. 

Plu. 

Nom.  king 

Nom.  kings 

Poss.  king's 

Poss.  kings' 

Obj.  king. 

Obj.  kings. 

Sin/). 

Plu. 

Nom.  man 

Nom.  men. 

Poss.  man's 

Poss.  men's 

Obj.  man. 

Obj.  men. 

Errata.    In  the  "Declension  or  the  Bhahyi  Pronouns,"  Nom.  case,  [  page  6  and 8,} 
for  iviioseverT  read  whosoever. 


EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 


RULE  1. 

The  subject  of  the 
verb  must  always 
be  in  the  nomina- 
tive casev 

RULE  2. 
The    verb    must 
agree  with  its  nom- 
inative in   number 
and  person. 

RULE  3. 

Pronouns  must 
agree  with  their  an- 
tecedents, or  the 
nouns  they  repre- 
sent, in  gender  and 
number. 

RULE  4. 
Transitive  verbs, 
transitive  partici- 
ples, and  preposi- 
tions, govern  the 
objective  case. 

RULE  5. 
Two  or  more 
nouns,  signifying 
the  same  thing,  are 
put,  by  apposition, 
in  the  same  case. 

RULE  6. 
When  an  address 
is  made  to  a  person, 
the  noun  or  pro- 
noun is  put  in  the 
nominative  case  in- 
dependent. 

RULE  7. 
A  noun  or  pro- 
noun, joined  with  a 
participle,  and 
standing  indepen- 
dent of  the  rest  of 
the  sentence,  is  in 
the  nominative  case 
independent. 

RULE  8. 
A  noun  or  pro- 
noun,  signifying 
possession,  must  be 
put  in  the  possess- 
ive case. 

RULE  9. 
The  verbs  which 
follow,  bid,  dare, 
feel,  hear,  let,  make, 
need,  see,  &c,  are 
used  in  the  infini- 
tive mood,  without 
having  the  sign  to 
prefixed  to  them. 


ar  n  p  a  v  pfc  ad  pp  c  i 

Article,  Noun,  Pronoun,  Adjective,  Verb,  Participle,  Adverb,  Preposition,  Conjunction,  Interjection. 

LESSON  1.     FOR  THE  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

The  indicative  mood  simply  indicates  or  declares  a  thing ;  as,  I  learn. 

ar     n  v  ar       n         v  ar         n  v  ar       a  n  v  ar        a  b  v        pp        n  n 

1.  A  boy  whispers.    A  man  loves.     The  men  walk.    A  good  girl  learns.    The  bad  boys  play  in  school.  Harriet 

v  n  arnv  n  varan  n  v         ar        n  ar        a      n  v  ar         a 

2.  loves  Eliza.    The  girls  sing.    Samson  killed  a  young  lion.    Noah  built  the  ark.     An  old  ox  hooked  the  white 

n  ara  n  v  n  nvarn  arn  v  a  n  earn 

3.  heifer.    The  black  mare  kicked  Peter.    Ned  shot  an  Indian.     The  men  are  eating  sour  apples,  and  the  women 

v  a  n  ar  n  v       pp         n  c    pp  n  cpvppnn 

4.  are  eating  sweet  oranges.    The  gentlemen  live  in  Boston  or  in  Charlestown,  but  they  came  from  Troy.  Ann's 

a  nv  ad  pp     p  n  nvadpa  n  p  y  u        pp     ar         ii        pp 

5.  pretty  bird  sings  delightfully  in  his  cage.     Esther  put  on  her  royal  apparel — she  obtained  favor  in  the  sight  of 

ar         n  pp      a         n  n  v  ar  n  n  v        '  ar       a  nop  T       p    pp     ar 

6.  the  King.     In  six  days,  God  created  the  world.     Mary  has  written  a  long  letter,  and  she  will  send  it  to  the 

n  n  var  n  ad        ar         n  v  n         v    pp         n  c        p 

7.  post-office.     Henry  had  received  the  intelligence  before  the  mail  arrived.     Thomas  is  at  school,  but  he  will 

adv  en  v         a  n        pp       p  aranvaraanvp  n 

8.  soon  return,  and  Lucy  will  give  this  book  to  him.     The  little  girls  cried,  an  old  cross  hen  pecked  us.     Maria 

v     ar         n  pt  ar      a  a  n       pp    p         n  pp  ar      a  n        c        pp     ar        a  n  n  n 

9.  saw  a  woman  whipping  an  idle,  saucy  boy,  on  his  back,  with  a  large  stick,  or  with  a  small  cane.   Cassar's  troops 

vad  nar  n  rppn  araan  vpn 

10.  fought  bravely.     Newton,  the  philosopher,  lived  in  London.     The  strong,  fat  oxen,  have  broken  their  yoke. 

nvadara  n  p  Tppn  b  PPP  n  c  v  p'ppn 

11.  John  cut  down  the  high  trees  which  grew  in  Sarah's  garden,  with  his  hatchet,  and  sawed  them  into  wood 

ppp  nvarn  n  varn  n  varn  n  v 

12.  for  her.    Charles  writes  a  letter.    Charles  wrote  a  letter.     Charles  has  written  a  letter.    Charles  had  written 

ar        n  n  v       ar        n  n  v  ar        n  n  ad  pt  v        a         pp 

13.  a  letter.     Charles  will  write  a  letter.     Charles  will  have  written  a  letter.     Words  fitly-  spoken  are  like  unto 

n  pp        n      pp  n        pp  n  ar  n  v  ar  a  n        p  v        ar         n  pp  n 

14.  apples  of  gold  in  pictures  of  silver.     The  master  ferruled  the  naughty  boy  who  stole  an  apple  from  Abby's 

n  ar  n  v  ar         n  pp  p  p  v  v  ad  n  v 

15.  pocket.     The  gentleman  replied,  "  the  ladies  with  whom  we  conversed,  behaved  genteelly."     Frank  broke 

n  ncadpvpppp  np  v  ad  arn  v  p 

16.  Susan's  watch,  and  then  he  bought  it  of  her.     Boys,  you  have  learned  rapidly.     The  girls  replied,  "we  had 

v  p  n  pt      pp    p         ad        ar  n  v  n  v         ar  a  n  v  ad  pp 

17.  committed  our  lessons,  given  to  us,  before  the  master  returned."  Samuel  heard  an  orphan  boy  crying  piteously,  in 

arn  npvadc  ncn  v  n  vpppaa  aan 

18.  the  street.    Jane,  you  learn  faster  than  Jack  or  Clara  learns.     Johnny  said,  •*  I  am  afraid  that  great  ugly  dog 

vp  narn  vppnarn  pvarn  n  v  p 

19.  will  bite  me."     Nathan,  the  prophet,  said  unto  David,  the  King,  "  thou  art  the  man."     Edwin  replied,  "  my 

ac  a  n  vpppancp  ad  v  ippn 

20.  kind  and  affectionate  mother  gave  to  me  good  advice,  but  I  have  often  been  occupied,  alas  !  with  trifles." 

n  ptpn  ad  vpppn  npveaca 

21.  Ellen,  having  finished  her  studies,  will  immediately  return  to  her  father'^  house.     It  is  neither  hot  nor  cold. 

P  vcvpppn  c  vppp  np  v  pp  n  cpp.p 

22.  I  will  arise  and  go  to  my  father,  and  will  say  unto  him,  father,  I  have  sinned  against  heaven,  and  before  thee. 

n  v  p      v        ar         a         ,a  n  p  n  v       ad        ad  c     p  v        pp      p      ar  n 

23.  Caroline  said,  "  I  pity  the  poor  little  boy,  whose  book  is  torn  so  badly,  and  I  have  given  to  him  an  orange." 

an  vpppn  nvaraa  a  n  nvara 

24.  Every  tree  is  known  by  its  fruit.     James  found  a  new,  sharp,  handsome  penknife.     Dick  struck  the  wicked 

npv  n  n  an  p  nar  nva  arnva  cpn 

25.  fellow  that  tore  Kitty's  book.     Dear  sister,  your  uncle,  the  General,  is  sick.    The  book  is  useful,  but  its  binding 

va  ncn  v  pn  ptpppec  nncn 

26.  is  cheap.     Kate  and  Julia  have  committed  their  lessons  given  to  them  ;  but  neither  Dick,  Tom,  nor  Harry,  has 

v  pn*p  vppppparn  adnc  n  ▼  P  n 

27.  committed  his  lesson  which  was  given  to  him  by  the  master.     Then  Paul  and  Barnabas  rent  their  clothes, 

pt  ad       c  pt  n  ad        v       p  a  n  p        ad        v         n     pp       a  n  PP         P  ar 

28.  crying  out  and  saying,  "  Sirs,  why  do  ye  these  things  ?  we  also  are  men  of  like  passions  with  you."     The 

n  pt         ar  n  p  v  pp  p  v  n  n  v  ad        pp     p  n 

29.  Colonel  being  slain,  the  soldiers  who  fought  under  him,  were  routed.     Asa's  dove  flies  swiftly  to  her  nest. 

arnvpnadcarn  v  p  ad  inp  vp 

30.  The  boys  soiled  their  books  badly,  and  the  mistress  whipped  them  severely.     O,  Lord!  thou  scatterest  thy 

n  ppar  a  ca  n  pva'cpn  v  ad 

31.  blessings  with  an  impartial  and  liberal  hand — thou  art  just,  and  thy  mercy  endureth  forever. 


BOOK    FIRST. 


RULE  l. 
The  subject  of  the 
verb    must   always 
be  in  the  nomina- 
tive case. 

RULE  2. 
The    verb   must 
agree  with  its  nom- 
inative   in  number 
and  person. 

RULE  3. 

Pronouns  must 
agree  with  their  an- 
tecedents, or  the 
nouns  they  repre- 
sent, in  gender  and 
number. 

RULE  4. 
Transitive  verbs, 
transiti/e  partici- 
ples, and  preposi- 
tions, govern  the 
objective  case. 

RULE  5. 

Two  or  more 
nouns,  signifying 
the  same  thing,  are 
put,  by  apposition, 
in  the  same  case. 

RULE  6. 
When  an  address 
is  made  to  a  person, 
the  noun  or  pronoun 
is  put  in  the  nomi- 
native case  inde- 
pendent. 

RULE  7. 
A  noun  or  pro- 
noun, joined  with 
a  participle,  and 
standing  indepen- 
dent of  the  rest  of 
the  sentence,  is  in 
the  nominative  case 
independent. 

RULE  8. 
A  noun  or  pro- 
noun,  signifying 
possession,  must  be 
put  in  the  possessive 
case. 

RULE  9. 
The  verbs  which 
follow  bid,  dare, 
feel,  hear,  let,  make, 
need,  see,  &c,  are 
used  in  the  infini- 
tive mood,  without 
having  the  sign  to 
prefixed  to  them. 


LESSON  2.— FOR  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD, 
The  subjunctive  mood  expresses  action  or  being,  in  a  doubtful  or  conditional  manner ;  as,  if  I  learn. 
,       If,  unless,  except,  &c,  are  signs  of  the  subjunctive  mood. 

c       p  n  v  a  pn  va  cp  vpen  v        pp     p 

1.  If  our  desires  be  moderate,  our  wants  will  be  few.     Unless  thou  hast  loved  her.     If  John  had  spoken  to  me. 

c  p  v      ar         n      pp  ar         a  n  c     ar        n  v  p         n      pp  n 

2.  Unless  he  will  do  the  work  in  a  genteel  manner.     If  the  man  shall  have  accomplished  his  work  by  midsummer. 

enen  vp  n  ncn  vpcpvpppn  n 

3.  If  James  and  Ned  have  lost  their  money,  Jack  or  Robert  will  recover  it,  if  it  be  in  his  power.     Henry  having 

pt  pp         n  v  pp        ar  n      pp  n  c     p  n  y  c      p  v  pp  n  c 

4.  graduated  at  college,  will  enter  upon  the  study  of  divinity,  if  his  health  admit.     If  we  contend  about  trifles,  and 

ad  ypnp  y       ad        a  n  en  ypnpn  p 

5.  violently  maintain  our  opinion,  we  shall  gain  but  few  friends.     If  greatness  flatter  our  vanity,  it  multiplies  our 

n  cpvpppp  v  cara  n  t      a      pp        a  n  n 

6.  dangers.    If  we  look  around  us,  we  shall  perceive  that  the  whole  universe  is  full  of  active  powers.     Gentlemen, 

pv  a  cpvarnpppp  v  cpvadarnpp  n  p 

7.  you  are  mistaken,  if  I  be  the  person  to  whom  you  alluded.    If  we  possess  not  the  power  of  self-government,  we 

varnppaa  n  ptpnpyppancn 

8.  shall  be  the  prey  of  every  evil  propensity.     Having  resigned  his  office,  he  retired  to  pi-ivate  life,  if  history 

v  n  c         n  vadn  v  a  can  a  cp 

9.  speak  truth.     If  youth  be  trifled  away,  manhood  will  be  contemptible,  and  old  age,  miserable.     Except  he  re- 

vp  ad  t  eppa  a  narn  nppnv  y  adpv 

10.  pent,  he  will  not  be  saved.     If,  from  any  internal  cause,  a  man's  peace  of  mind  be  disturbed,  in  vain  we  load 

p        pp  n         c  n  p  pt  p  n  ar  n  v  c     ar         n  ad  v 

11.  him  with  riches  or  honor.    He  having  ended  his  discourse,  the  ladies  dispersed.    If  the  mind  be  well  cultivated, 

p  v  ar      n       pp        n  c      ad      p  v  pp  n 

12.  it  produces  a  store  of  fruit :  if  not,  it  is  overrun  with  weeds. 

.  LESSON  3.— FOR  THE  POTENTIAL  MOOD. 
The  potential  mood  declares  the  power,  liberty,  possibility  or  necessity  of  action  or  being;  as,  I  may,  can  or  must  learn. 
May,  can,  must,  might,  could,  would,  should,  are  signs  of  the  potential  mood. 

nvada  c  adp  vpp  Tadnp  v  adn 

1.  Charles  is  not  insincere,  and  therefore,  we  may  trust  him.     It  must  be  so  ;  Plato,  thou  reasonest  well.    Tim 

en  adv  p  nppnpvp  np  v  nva 

2.  and  Jo  could  not  accomplish  their  business  in  time.     It  was  my  direction  he  should  submit.     Amanda  was  ill, 

cpvp  vp  varnppnp  v  par 

3.  but  I  thought  she  might  live.     We  can  resist  the  allurements  of  vice.     I  may  have  misunderstood  him.     The 

n  v.  ar  n  ad  c        p  ad  vpadpypanc 

4.  man  might  have  finished  the  work  sooner,  but  he  could  not  have  done  it  better.     I  gave  him  good  advice,  but 

p  advpppp  v  arnp  ad  Tppn 

5.  he  would  not  hearken  to  it.    They  might  have  been  honored.     The  man  who  is  faithfully  attached  to  religion, 

v         ad      pp  a  n  an  n  vpppnp 

6.  may  be  relied  on  with  humble  confidence.    This  author's  sentiments  must  be  mistaken  by  his  critic.    We  may 

v  pt  c       pp     ar  a  n        pp  n         p  v  c  t        p  ar  n  v 

7.  rest  assured,  that  by  the  steady  pursuit  of  virtue,  we  shall  obtain  and  enjoy  it.     The  physician  may  administer 

arno  nad  v        p  n  pt  p  pp  a  np 

8.  the  medicine,  but  Providence  alone  can  bless  its  effects.     Having  exposed  himself  in  different  climes,  he  may 

vpnarn  n  v  ar  n  n  p  pt         ar         n 

9.  have  lost  his  health.    The  scholar's  diligence  must  secure  the  tutor's  approbation.    She  being  absent,  the  busi- 

v         ad   pp         a 

10.  ness  was  attended  to  by  others. 

LESSON  4.— FOR  THE  INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

The  infinitive  mood  expresses  a  thing  in  a  general  and  unlimited  manner,  having  no  nominative,  consequently  nei- 
ther number  nor  person ;  as,  I  should  like  to  learn. 


To  is  the  sign  of  the  infinitive  mood.  .     . 

pppnpvn  v  en  v  pva  v  ar  n         pp 

1.  In  our  travels  we  saw  much  to  approve,  and  much  to  condemn.    It  is  delightful  to  contemplate  the  goodness  of 

n  p  v  vpara  nenva^  vnppn 

2.  Providence.     He  was  known  to  have  loved  her.    A  merciful  man  or  woman  is  unwilling  to  give  pain  to  man 

en  ara  n  a  nv  vp  n  ac  a  pvadvp  n^pp  n   ^ 

3    or  beast.    The  good  parent's  greatest  joy  is  to  see  his  children  wise  and  virtuous.    We  dare  not  leave  our  studies  without  permis- 

pvadv  n  vhpv  vpppt  a  v  ara  v  *  -ii 

4.  sion.    We  need  not  urge  Charles  to  do  good;  he  loves  to  do  it.    They  being  willing  to  improve,  the  study  was  rendered  agreeable. 

n  v  p  v  n  n  ar      v  a  n        ad         a      ...    c  a  v  _  yarad  a  n 

5.  Compassion  prompted  us  to  relieve  Norman's  wants.    A  young  man,  so  learned  and  virtuous,  promises  to  be  a  very  useful  member 

ppn  e  ncan  ypyarnn  v  ar 

6.  of  society.     Neither  threatenings  nor  any  promises  could  make  him  violate  the  truth.     Darwin  is  supposed  to  have  written  the 

n  ad        p        y     pp  n 

7.  letter,  when  he  was  at  college. 


BOOK    FIRST. 


LESSON  5.— FOR  THE  IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

The  imperative  mood  commands,  exhorts,  or  entreats  ;  as,  learn,  learn  thou,  or  do  thou  learn.     A  verb  in  the  imperative  mood 
always  agrees  with  tkon,  ye,  or  goti,  for  its  nominative,  [generally  understood.] 

p  Si  V  a  v        ar  n         pp     p  n  cv  ad     ar       a     pp       p  a  ccn  v  p  r 

1.  "My  son,"  says  Solomon,  "  hear  the  counsel  of  thy  father,  and  forsake  not  the  law  of  thy  mother ;  and  if  sinners  entice  thee  to  sin, 

v  p        ad  c       v        ar         a         c  v       p  a  vac  n  cv  pad  n 

2.  consent  thou  not,— but  fear  the  Lord  and  keep  his  commandments :  get  wisdom  and  understanding,  and  forsake  them  not"    Martha 

v      pp    ,p  a  p  v      pp  ar  !i  p  v  a  ad  vpppaaaavpp 

&  said  to  her  daughters,  who  went  to  a  boarding-school,  "  You  must  be  diligent ;  also,  engrave  on  your  minds  this  sacred  rule,  <do  unto 

ad         c      p  v  c  p  V        pp        p  »r  ii  v      pp  q  n  v  p  npp  n  c.p 

4.  others  as  ye  wish  that  they  should  do  unto  you*' "     The  master  said  to  Jane's  brother,  "  Study  your  lesson  in  grammar,  and  I  will 

v         p  v         p  nvarn  p  *•         V  ad  app  a  a        pp        a  ar  n  vppar 

5.  hear  you  recite  it."     Oscar  saw  a  maYt  whose  hair  was  extremely  gray,  at  eighteen  years  of  age.     The  preceptress  said  to  the 

a  a  v  p  app  u'cp  v  p       pp     p      pp   as       a  a  vara  a 

£.  diligent  boys,  "Commit  your  lessons  in  geography,  and  you  may  recite  them  to  me  in  an  hour."     Abby,  light  the  candle.     Pizarro 

v  j»  ra  jpt  v  a.  a  a  v        p  v  a  v      pp    ar  n  VP 

7,  commanded  his  soldiers,  saying,  "Unbind  that  trembling  wretch !  let  him  depart!"  Alexander  said  to  the  robber,  "  Leave  me," — 

c        ad  pt        pp    p  ii  p        v  r         ad      p  a  c         v         p  ad  cara  v  a  nc 

&  and  then  turning  to  his  soldiers,  he  said,  ■"Take  <yff  his  chains,  and  use  him  well."     And  the  Lord  commanded  Eliphaz,  Bildad  and 

»  pt  vppp  a  acvpp  v  ar       a  a  cp  v        pp        p  avtad 

9,  ZapUer,  saying,  "Go  to  my  servant,  Job,  and  offer  for  yourselves  a  burnt  offering,  and  he  shall  pray  for  you."  Time  flies,  oh  I  how 

ad  a  v  ad  a  nara  n  c      ar  a  ia  v        p      ad      pp  a  cv 

10.  swiftly.    Edward,  bring  hither  George's  slate,  the  girl's  books,  and  an  inkstand.     O,  Lord  !  lead  us  not  into  temptation,  but  deliver 

pppavpars  <p  p  a  a  v  ad  vac  v  ad  pp      ar  a         p         a 

1 1.  us  from  evil.   Art  thou  a  parent,  teach  thy  children  obedience.   "Deal  justly,  love  mercy,  and  walk  humbly  with  the  Lord,  thy  God." 


A   LIST   OF   THE    PRONOMINAL   ADJECTIVES. 
One,  other,  another,  each,  every,  either,  neither,  this,  that,  these,  those,  all,  any,  both,  same,  such,  some,  former,  latter,  none. 

A  LIST  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  PREPOSITIONS. 

Of,  to,  for,  by,  with,  ia, — into,  within,  without,  over,  under,  through, — above,  below,  between,  beneath,  from,  beyond, — at,  up,  down,  before,  behind, — 

on,  or  upon,  among,  after,  about,  against. 

A  LIST  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  CONJUNCTIONS, 

And,  if,  that,  both,  then,  since,  for,  because,  therefore,  wherefore, — But,  or,  nor,  as,  than,  lest,  though, 

unless,  either,  neither,  yet,  notwithstanding. 

DECLENSION  OF  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


FIRST  PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  I, 

Poss.  my  or  mine, 
Obi.  me. 

Plu. 
Nom.  we, 
Poss.  our  or  ours, 
Obj.  us. 


SECOND   PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  thou, 
Poss.  thy  or  thine, 
Obj.  thee. 

PU. 
Nom.  ye  or  you, 
Poss.  your  or  yours, 
Obj.  you. 


THIUD   PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nam.  he, 
Poss.  his, 
Obj.  him. 

Phu 
Nom.  they, 
Pass,  their  or  theirs, 
Obj.  them. 


THIRD  PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  she, 
Pass,  her  or  hers, 
Obj.  her. 

Plu. 
Nom.  they, 
Poss.  their  or  theirs, 
Obj.  them. 


THIRD   PERSOK. 

Sing. 
Nom    it, 
Poss.  its, 
Obj.  it. 

Plu. 
Nom.  they, 
Poss.  their  or  theirs, 
Obj.  them. 


DECLENSION  OF  THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


Positive. 

wise, 

great, 

virtuous, 

amiable, 

good, 

bad, 


Nom.  who, 
Nom.  whoever, 
Nom.  whomever, 


Singular  and  Plural. 

Poss.  whose, 
Poss.  whosever, 
Poss.  whosesoever, 


Obj.  whom. 
Obj.  whomever. 
Ooj.  whomsoever. 


Comparative. 
wiser, 
greater, 
more  virtuous, 
less  amiable, 
better, 
wor^e. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


Superlative. 
wisest. 

greatest 
most  virtuous. 
least  amiable, 
best, 
worst. 


Positive. 

little, 

much  or  many, 

near, 

late, 

far, 


Comparative. 
less  or  lesser, 
more, 
nearer, 
later, 
farther, 


Superlative. 
least, 
most. 

nearest  or  next, 
latest  or  last, 
farthest. 


Sing. 
Nom.  king 
Poss.  king's 
Obj.  king. 


DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


Plu. 
Nom.  kings 
Poss.  kings' 
Obj.  kings. 


Sing. 
Nom.  man 
Poss.  man' 
Obj.  man. 


Plu. 
Nom.  men. 
Poss.  men's 
Obj.  men. 


10 


BOOK    FIRST. 


LESSON  6. 

1.  Peter  struck  John  with  a  great  stick.  2.  Sanibo  whipped 
the  old  ox,  and  the  ox  kicked  Sambo.  3.  Susan  pinched  little 
Molly,  and  Molly  slapped  naughty  Susan  ^  and  the  master  ferruled 
both  girls,  for  disobedience  of  orders  in  school.  4.  The  blacksmith 
hammered  the  iron,  and  then  he  filed  it.  5.  The  shoemaker  pound- 
ed his  leather  with  a  hammer,  on  a  stone  in  his  lap.  6.  The  car- 
penter planes  his  boards,  and  he  drives  nails  into  them.  7.  The 
miller  is  grinding  corn.  8.  The  dog  severely  bit  his  master.  9. 
The  black,  fat  wether  bunted  Cuffee,  and  the  cross  Avhite  heifer 
hooked  lame,  blind  Cudjo.  10.  The  farmer  planted  his  corn,  mow- 
ed his  grass,  and  cut  his  stocks.  11.  Tommy  slapped  Dicky  in  the 
face.  12.  Nelson  Keith  is  drilling  rocks.  \$.  The  girls  are  par- 
ing apples  with  their  sharp  pen-knives,  and  the  boys  are  cracking 
nuts  with  their  new  hatchets.  14.  The  cows  have  eaten  their  hay, 
and  are  chewing  their  cuds.  15.  Eliza  washed  her  face,  combed 
her  hair,  and  went  to  school.  16.  Mary  tore  her  dress  badly. 
17.  Joseph  knocked  Lewis  down  with  his  fist.  18.  Achilles  slew 
Hector.  19.  Brutus  stabbed  Ca?sar.  20.  The  birds  fly  swiftly. 
21.  She  walks  gracefully.  22.  The  king  rent  his  robe.  23.  A 
knight  struck  Roderick  Dhu,  and  Roderick  daggered  the  knight. 
24.  David  Crockett  shot  an  old  fierce,  lean  bear.  25.  Julia  kissed 
her  poor,  unfortunate,  sick  brother.  26.  The  ball  hit  the  mark. 
27.  Homer,  the  poet,  wrote  the  Illiad.  28.  Nimrod,  the  hunter, 
speared  a  lioness.  29.  Milo  killed  an  ox  [a  four  year-old  bullock} 
with  one  blow  of  his  fist — carried  him  on  his  shoulders  through 
the  length  of  a  stadium,*  and  ate  his  carcass  in  one  day.f  30.  An 
old  crazy  man  pelted  a  rude  idle  boy  with  stones.  31.  Hannibal 
escaped  to  Bythinia.  32.  Ajax  fought  valiantly  with  Hector. 
33.  Cieero,  the  orator,  fled  rapidly  from  Rome.  34.  Aristotle 
studied  under  Plato.  35.  Augustus,  the  Emperor,  died  at  Nola. 
36.  Archimedes  was  stabbed  by  a  Roman  Soldier.  37.  Daniel  was 
cast  into  the  lions'  den.  38.  Carthage  was  founded  by  Dido,  Queen 
of  Tyre.  39.  Peter,  the  tailor,  was  kicked  by  a  horse.  40.  Thom- 
as was  struck  by  a  cane.  41.  Exercise  promotes  health.  42.  Al- 
exander conquered  the  Persians.  43.  Prudence  saves  us  from 
many  misfortunes.  44.  Crosses  in  trade  damp  the  spirit  of  enter- 
prise. 45.  Questions  of  moment  require  slow  answers.  46.  Da- 
vid killed  Goliah  with  a  stone  from  his  sling.  47.  Moses  smote 
the  rock  in  the  wilderness  with  his  rod.  48.  Girls  wear  large 
bonnets  in  winter.  49.  Stars  give  mild  light  in  autumn.  50.  A 
man's  manners  frequently  influence  his  fortune.  51.  Whose  knife 
is  this  ?  52.  Idleness  will  clothe  a  man  with  rags.  53.  Good 
looks  buy  nothing  in  market.  54.  Joab  took  Amasa  by  the  beard, 
and  smote  him  with  his  sword  under  the  fifth  rib.  55.  Great  fires 
may  be  kindled  with  small  coals.  56.  If  once  a  man  fall,  all  will 
tread  on  him.  57.  Elizabeth,  Queen  of  England,  beheaded  Mary, 
Queen  of  Scots.  58.  "  Fred,"  says  Jack,  "where  are  my  books?" 
59.  Change  and  alteration  form  the  very  essence  of  life.  60.  Em- 
ily writes  rapidly,  with  elegance  and  precision.  61.  George  sold 
his  cane,  which  he  bought  in  Paris,  with  its  golden  head,  for  six 
guineas.  62.  Death  is  the  doctor  that  cures  all  diseases.  63. 
Crosses  are  ladders  which  lead  to  heaven.  64.  A  bird  in  the  hand 
is  worth  two  in  the  bush.  65.  Kings  may  conquer  armies,  but 
not  death.  66.  There  are  more  ways  to  the  wood  than  one.  67, 
Boys,  study  your  lessons.  68.  Keep  no  company  with  bad  men, 
whose  steps  lead  to  death.  69.  Thousands,  whom  indolence  has 
sunk  into  contemptible  obscurity,  might  have  come  forward  to  use- 
fulness and  honor,  if  idleness  had  not  frustrated  the  effects  of  all 
their  powers.  70.  The  General  being  slain,  the  army  was  routed. 
Thomas,  where  is  Henry's  watch  ?  71.  Our  ignorance  of  what  is 
to  come,  and  of  what  is  really  good  or  evil,  should  correct  anxiety 
about  worldly  success.  72.  He  who  abounds  in  words,  generally 
wants  wit.  73.  Girls,  whom  do  you  see  ?  74.  They  4>ehaved  like 
cowards,  and  all  ran  home  but  me.     75.  Can  we,  untouched  by 

*One  fourth  of  a  Roman  mile.    ^Doubtful — though  in  accordance  with  History. 


gratitude,  view  the  profusion  of  good,  which  the  Almighty  hand 
bestows  around  us  ?  76.  This  is  the  boy  that  steals  apples*  77. 
If  he  and  she  were  at  home  yesterday,  he  or'  she  is  at  home  to-day, 
78.  Some  talk  of  subjects  they  do  not  understand,  others  praise 
virtue  who  do  not  practise  it.  79.  George,  let  the  lady  hear  you 
read,  and  then  we  will  go  home.  80.  "An  honest  man  is  the  no- 
blest work  of  God." 

"  Helen's  matchless  charms 
Made  nations  fly  to  amis.'* 


LESSON  7. 

Obidah,  the  son  of  Abensina,  left  the  caravansera  early  in  the 
morning,  and  pursued  his- journey  through  the  plains  of  Indostan. 
He  was  fresh  and  vigorous  with  rest ;  he  was  animated  with  hope ; 
he  was  incited  by  desire ;  he  walked  swiftly  forward  over  the  val- 
leys, and  saw  the  hills  gradually  rising  before  him.  As  he  passed 
along,  his  ears  were  delighted  with  the  morning  song  of  the  bird  of 
paradise ;  he  was  fanned  by  the  last  flutters  of  the  sinking  breeze, 
and  sprinkled  with  dew  from  groves  of  spiees.  He  sometimes  con- 
templated the  towering  height  of  the  oak,  monarch  of  the  hills ; 
and  sometimes  caught  the  gentle  fragrance  of  the  primrose,,  eldest 
daughter  of  the  spring ;  all  his  senses  were  gratified,  and  all  care 
was  banished  from  his  heart. — Extract. 


LESSON  8. 

Omar,  the  son  of  Hassan,  had  passed  seventy-five  years,  in  hon- 
or and  prosperity.  The  favor  of  three  successive  calif's  had  filled 
his  house  with  gold  and  silver ;  and  wherever  he  appeared,  the 
benedictions  of  the  people  proclaimed  his  passage. 

Terrestrial  happiness  is  of  short  continuance.  The  brightness 
of  the  flame  is  wasting  its  fuel  ;  the  fragrant  flower  is  passing 
away  in  its  own  odors.  The  vigor  of  Omar  began  to  fail ;  the  curls 
of  beauty  fell  from  his  head  ;  strength  departed  from  his  hands, 
and  agility  from  his  feet.  He  gave  back  to  the  calif  the  keys  of 
trust,  and  the  seals  of  secrecy ;  and  sought  no  other  pleasure  for 
the  remains  of  life,  than  the  converse  of  the  wise,  and  the  grati- 
tude of  the  good. 

The  powers  of  his  mind  were  yet  unimpaired.  His  chamber 
was  filled  with  visitants,  eager  to  catch  the  dictates  of  experience, 
and  officious  to  pay  the  tribute  of  admiration.  Caled,  the  son  of 
the  viceroy  of  Egypt,  entered  every  day  early,  and  retired  late. 
He  was  beautiful  and  eloquent.  Omar  admired  his  wit,  and  loved 
his  docility.  "  Tell  me,"  said  Caled,  "  thou  to  whose  voice  nations 
have  listened,  and  whose  wisdom  is  known  to  the  extremities  of 
Asia,  tell  me  how  1  may  resemble  Omar  the  prudent." — Extract. 


LESSON  9. 

The  midnight  moon  serenely  smiles 

O'er  Nature's  soft  repose  ; 
No  low'ring  cloud  obscures  the  sky, 

Nor  ruffling  tempest  blows. 
Now  every  passion  sinks  to  rest, 

The  throbbing  heart  lies  still ; 
And  varying  schemes  of  life  no  more 

Distract  the  lab'ring  will. — Extract. 

The  trembling  grove  confessed  its  fright, 
The  wood-nymphs  started  at  the  sight  ; 
The  muses  drop  the  learned  lyre, 
And  to  their  inmost  shades  retire. 
I  lowe'er,  the  youth  witli  forward  air, 
Bows  to  the  sage,  and  mounts  the  car. 
The  lash  resounds,  the  coursers  spring, 
The  chariot  marks  the  rolling  ring; 
And  gath'ring  crowds,  with  eager  eves 
And  shouts,  pursue  him  as  he  flies. 


Triumphant  to  the  goal  returned, 
With  nobler  thirst  his  bosom  burned, 
And  now  along  the  indented  plain, 
The  self-same  track  he  marks  again, 
Pursues  with  care  the  nice  design, 
Nor  ever  deviates  from  the  line. 
Amazement  seized  the  circling  crowd  ; 
The  youths  with  emulation  glowed ; 
Ev'n  bearded  sages  hailed  the  boy ; 
And  all  but  Plato  gazed  with  joy, — Extract. 


LESSON  10. 

Remote  from  cities  lived  a  swain, 
Unvexed  with  all  the  cares  of  gain ; 
His  head  was  silvered  o'er  with  age, 
And  long  experience  made  him  sage. 
In  summer's  heat  and  winter's  cold, 
He  fed  his  flock  and  penned  the  fold ; 
His  hours  in  cheerful  labor  flew, 
Nor  envy  nor  ambition  knew  ; 
His  wisdom  and  his  honest  fame 
Through  all  the  country  raised  his  name. 

A  deep  philosopher  (whose  rules 
Of  moral  life  were  drawn  from  schools) 
The  shepherd's  homely  cottage  sought, 
And  thus  explored  his  reach  of  thought : 
■"  "Whence  is  thy  learning  ?     Hath  thy  toil 
O'er  books  consumed  the  midnight  oil  ? 
Hast  thou  old  Greece  and  Rome  surveyed 
And  the  vast  sense  of  Plato  weighed  ? 
Hath  Socrates  thy  soul  refined  ? 
And  hast  thou  fathomed  Tully's  mind  ? 
Or,  like  the  wise  Ulysses,  thrown, 
By  various  fates,  on  realms  unknown, 
Hast  thou  through  many  cities  strayed, 
Their  customs,  laws,  and  manners  weighed  ? 

The  shepherd  modestly  replied, 
"  I  ne'er  the  paths  of  learning  tried ; 
Nor  have  I  roamed  in  foreign  parts, 
To  read  mankind,  their  laws  and  arts ; 
For  man  is  practised  in  disguise, 
He  cheats  the  most  discerning  eyes." — Extract. 


LESSON  11. 

PARAPHRASE    OX   THE    TWEXTT-THIRD    PSALM. 

The  Lord  my  pasture  shall  prepare, 
And  feed  me  with  a  shepherd's  care ; 
His  presence  shall  my  wants  supply, 
And  guard  me  with  a  watchful  eye  ; 
My  noon-day  walks  he  shall  attend, 
And  all  my  midnight  hours  defend. 
When  in  the  sultry  glebe  I  faint, 
Or  on  the  thirsty  mountains  pant : 
To  fertile  vales,  and  dewy  meads, 
My  weary  wand'ring  steps  he  leads ; 
Where  peaceful  rivers,  soft  and  slow, 
Amid  the  verdant  landscape  flow. 
Though  in  the  paths  of  death  I  tread, 
With  gloomy  horrors  overspread, 
My  steadfast  heart  shall  fear  no  ill, 
For  thou,  O  Lord,  art  with  me  still ; 
Thy  friendly  crook  shall  give  me  aid, 
And  guide,  me  through  the  dreadful  shade. 
Though  in  a  bare  and  rugged  way, 
Through  devious,  lonely  wilds  I  stray, 
Thy  bounty  shall  my  pains  beguile ; 


The  barren  wilderness  shall  smile, 

With  sudden  greens  and  herbage  crowned, 

And  streams  shall  murmur  all  around. — Addison. 


LESSON  12. 

A  few  examples,  in  which  the  same  tvord,  differently  situated 
or  applied,  becomes  different  parts  of  speech. 

Damp  air  is  injurious  to  health. 

Guilt  sheds  a  damp  upon  our  sprightliest  hours. 

Let  no  disappointment  damp  your  enterprise. 

Every  being  loves  its  like. 

The  gospel  makes  like  promises  to  all. 

I  like  to  se»  every  human  being  happy. 

You  should  acquit  yourselves  like  men. 

Those  that  would  excel,  must  be  attentive. 

I  wish  that  that  idea  might  be  forcibly  impressed. 

I  wish  that  he  would  lend  me  that  book  that  you  sold  him. 

I  will  submit,  for  submission  brings  peace. 

It  is  for  our  health  to  be  temperate. 

We  all  hope  to  be  happy  hereafter. 

Hope  is  the  last  thing  that  dies  in  man. 

After  a  calm,  we  may  expect  a  storm. 

It  is  easier  to  prevent  passion  than  to  calm  it. 

A  calm  evening  often  succeeds  a  stormy  day. 

Still  waters  are  commonly  the  deepest. 

We  should  endeavor  to  still  the  angry  passions. 

They  are  still  afraid,  though  out  of  all  danger. 

They  returned  before  we  expected  them. 

She  rode  before  her  brother  on  a  horse. 

He  provided  money  for  his  journey. 

I  will  go,  provided  he  will  accompany  me. 

It  is  much  more  blessed  to  give  than  to  receive. 

Much  money  has  been  expended  to  little  purpose. 

Where  much  is  given,  much  will  be  required. 

The  fair  was  numerously  attended. 

His  character  is  fair  and  honorable. 

The  hail  was  very  destructive. 

We  hail  you  as  friends  and  brothers. 

He  has  served  them  with  his  utmost  ability. 

When  we  do  our  utmost,  no  more  is  required. 

Little  things  appear  great  to  little  minds. 

Little  do  the  gay  think  of  the  misery  around  them. 

The  scholars  are  employed  in  a  very  useful  study. 

The  industrious  scholars  study  grammar. 

To-morrow  may  be  better  weather  than  to-day. 

I  read  to-day,  but  I  shall  write  to-morrow. 

Mind  what  is  dictated  by  Infinite  Wisdom. 

Cultivate  your  mind,  it  will  render  old  age  happy. 

Bentlet. 


LESSON  13. 

GRATITUDE. 

When  all  thy  mercies,  0  my  God, 

My  rising  soul  surveys ; 
Transported  with  the  view,  I'm  lost 

In  wonder,  love,  and  praise. 

Oh  how  shall  words,  with  equal  warmth, 

The  gratitude  declare, 
That  glows  within  my  ravish'd  heart ! 

But  thou  canst  read  it  there. 

Thy  providence  my  life  sustained, 

And  all  my  wants  redress'd, 
When  in  the  silent  womb  I  lay, 

And  hung  upon  the  breast. 


To  all  my  weak  complaints  and  cries, 

Thy  mercy  lent  an  ear, 
Ere  yet  my  feeble  thoughts  had  learned 

To  form  themselves  in  prayer. 

Unnumbered  comforts  to  my  soul 

Thy  tender  care  bestowed, 
Before  my  infant  heart  conceived 

From  whence  those  comforts  flowed. 

When  in  the  slipp'ry  paths  of  youth, 

With  heedless  steps  I  ran, 
Thine  arm,  unseen,  conveyed  me  safe, 

And  led  me  up  to  man. 

Through  hidden  dangers,  toils  and  death, 

It  gently  cleared  my  way, 
And  through  the  pleasing  snares  of  vice, 

More  to  be  feared  than  they. 

When  worn  with  sickness,  oft  hast  thou 
With  health  renew'd  my  face  ; 

And  when  in  sin  and  sorrow  sunk, 
Reviv'd  my  soul  with  grace. 

Thy  bounteous  hand  with  worldly  bliss 

Has  made  my  cup  run  o'er, 
And  in  a  kind  and  faithful  friend 

Has  doubled  all  my  store. 

Ten  thousand  thousand  precious  gifts 

My  daily  thanks  employ  ; 
Nor  is  the  least  a  cheerful  heart, 

That  tastes  those  gifts  with  joy. 

Through  every  period  of  my  life 

Thy  goodness  I'll  pursue  ; 
And  after  death,  in  distant  worlds, 

The  glorious  theme  renew. 

When  nature  fails,  and  day  and  night 

Divide  thy  works  no  more, 
My  ever  grateful  heart,  O  Lord, 

Thy  mercy  shall  adore. 

Through  all  eternity,  to  Thee 

A  joyful  song  I'll  raise  ; 
For,  O,  eternity's  too  short, 

To  utter  all  thy  praise. — Addison. 


LESSON  14. 

OX   PRIDE. 

Of  all  the  causes  which  conspire  to  blind 
Man's  erring  judgment,  and  misguide  the  mind, 
What  the  weak  head  with  strongest  bias  rules, 
Is  Pride,  the  never-failing  vice  of  fools. 
Whatever  Nature  has  in  worth  denied, 
She  gives  in  large  recruits  of  needful  pride ; 
For,  as  in  bodies,  thus  in  souls  we  find 
What  wants  in  blood  and  spirits,  swell'd  with  wind. 
Pride,  where  wit  fails,  steps  in  to  our  defence, 
And  fills  up  all  the  mighty  void  of  sense. 
If  once  right  reason  drives  that  cloud  away, 
Truth  breaks  upon  us  with  resistless  day. 
Trust  not  yourself;  but,  your  defects  to  know, 
Make  use  of  ev'ry  friend — and  ev'ry  foe. 
A  little  learning  is  a  dangerous  thing  ; 
Drink  deep,  or  taste  not  the  Pierian  spring. 


There  shallow  draughts  intoxicate  the  bt'&tif 
And  drinking  largely  sobers  us  again. 
Fir'd  at  first  sight  with  what  the  Muse  imparls* 
In  fearless  youths  We  tempt  the  heights  of  arts, 
While'  from  the  bounded  level  of  our  mind, 
Short  views  we  take,- nor  see  th6  lengths  behind  p 
But  more  advanc'd,  behold,  with  stfange'  surprise* 
New  distant  scenes  of  endless  science  rise. 
So,  pleas'd  at  first,  the  towering  Alps  we  try, 
Mount  o'er  the  vales,  and  seem  to  tread  the  sky ; 
Th'  eternal  snows  appear  already  past, 
And  the  first  clouds  and  mountains  seem  the  last ; 
But  those  attain'd,  we  tremble  to  survey 
The  growing  labors  of  the  lengthen'd  way  ; 
Th'  increasing  prospect  tires  our  wandering  eyes, 
Hills  peep  o'er  hills,  and  Alps  on  Alps  arise. 

What  conscience  dictates  to  be  done, 

Or  warns  me  not  to  do ; 
This,  teach  me  more  than  hell  to  shun, 
•     That,  more  than  heaven,  pursue. — Pope, 


LESSON  15. 


SELFISHNESS   REPROVED. 


Has  God,  thou  fool !  work'd  solely  for  thy  good, 
Thy  joy,  thy  pastime,  thy  attire,  thy  food  ? 
Who  for  thy  table  feeds  the  wanton  fawn, 
For  him  as  kindly  spread  the  flow'ry  lawn. 
Ts  it  for  thee,  the  lark  ascends  and  sings? 
Joy  tunes  his  voice,  joy  elevates  his  wings- 
Is  it  for  thee,  the  linnet  pours  his  throat  ? 
Loves  of  his  own,  and  raptures,  swell  the  note. 
The  bounding  steed  you  pompously  bestride, 
Shares  with  his  lord  the  pleasure  and  the  pride. 
Is  thine  alone  the  seed  that  strews  the  plain  ? 
The  birds  of  heav'n  shall  vindicate  their  grain. 
Thine  the  full  harvest  of  the  golden  year  ? 
Part  pays,  and  justly,  the  deserving  steer. 
The  hog,  that  ploughs  not,  nor  obeys  thy  call, 
Lives  on  the  labors  of  this  lord  of  all. 

Know,  Nature's  children  all  divide  her  care ; 
The  fur  that  warms  a  monarch,  warm'd  a  bear. 
While  man  exclaims,  "  See  all  things  for  my  use  !" 
"  See  man  for  mine  !"  replies  a  pamper'd  goose. 
And  just  as  short  of  reason  he  must  fall, 
Who  thinks  all  made  for  one,  not  one  for  all. 

Grant  that  the  pow'rful  still  the  weak  control ; 
Be  man  the  wit  and  tyrant  of  the  whole  ; 
Nature  that  tyrant. checks  ;  he  only  knows, 
And  helps  another  creature's  wants  and  woes. 
Say,  will  the  falcon,  stooping  from  above, 
Smit  with  her  varying  plumage,  spare  the  dove  ? 
Admires  the  jay  the  insect's  gilded  wings  ? 
Or  hears  the  hawk  when  Philomela  sings  ? 
Man  eares  for  all ;  to  birds  he  gives  his  woods, 
To  beasts  his  pastures,  and  to  fish  his  floods. 
For  some  his  int'rest  prompts  him  to  provide, 
For  more  his  pleasure,  yet  for  more  his  pride. 
All  feed  on  one  vain  patron,  and  enjoy 
Th'  extensive  blessings  of  his  luxury. 
That  very  life  his  learned  hunger  craves, 
He  saves  from  famine,  from  the  savage  saves ; 
Nay,  feasts  the  animal  he  dooms  his  feast ; 
And,  till  he  ends  the  being,  makes  it  blest ; 
Which  sees  no  more  the  stroke,  nor  feels  the  pain, 
Than  favor'd  man  by  touch  ethereal  slain. 


BOOK    FIRS?. 


13 


The  creature  had  his  feast  of  life  before ; 

Thou,  too,  must  perish  when  thy  feast  is  o'er. — Pope. 

LESSON  16. 

PROVIDENCE   VINDICATED   IN   THE   PRESENT   STATE    OP   MAN. 

Heav'n  from  all  creatures  hides  the  book  of  fate, 

All  but  the  page  prescrib'd  their  present  state  ; 

From  brutes  what  men,  from  men  what  spirits  know, 

Or  Who  could  suffer  being  here  below  ? 

The  lamb  thy  riot  dooms  to  bleed  to-day, 

Had  he  thy  reason,  would  he  skip  and  play  ? 

Pleas'd  to  the  last,  he  crops  the  flow'ry  food, 

And  licks  the  hand  just  rais'd  to  shed  his  blood. 

Oh,  blindness  to  the  future  !  kindly  given, 

That  each  may  fill  the  circle  mark'd  by  Heav'n ; 

Who  sees  with  equal  eye,  as  God  of  all, 

A  hero  perish,  or  a  sparrow  fall ; 

Atoms  or  systems  into  ruin  hurl'd, 

And  now  a  bubble  burst,  and  now  a  world. 

Hope  humbly  then  ;  with  trembling  pinions  soar  ; 
Wait  the  great  teacher  Death ;  and  God  adore. 
What  future  bliss,  he  gives  not  thee  to  know, 
But  gives  that  hope  to  be  thy  blessing  now. 
Hope  springs  eternal  in  the  human  breast, 
Man  never  is,  but  always  to  be  blest : 
The  soul,  uneasy,  and  confin'd  from  home, 
Bests  and  expatiates  in  a  life  to  come. 
Lo,  the  poor  Indian  !  whose  untutor'd  mind 
Sees  God  in  clouds,  or  hears  him  in  the  wind ; 
His  soul  proud  science  never  taught  to  stray 


Far  as  the  Solar  Walk  or  Milky  Way  ; 
Yet  simple  nature  to  his  hope  has  giv'n, 
Behind  the  cloud-topt  hill,  an  humbler  heav'n ; 
Some  safer  world  in  depth  of  woods  embrac'd, 
Some  happier  island  in  the  wat'ry  waste, 
Where  slaves  once  more  their  native  land  behold, 
No  fiends  torment,  no  Christians  thirst  for  gold. 
To  be  contents  his  natural  desire ; 
He  asks  no  angel's  wing,  no  seraph's  fire  ; 
But  thinks,  admitted  to  that  equar  sky, 
His  faithful  dog  shall  bear  him  company. 

Go,  wiser  thou !  and  in  thy  scale  of  sense, 
Weigh  thy  opinion  against  Providence  ; 
Call  imperfection  what  thou  fanciest  such, 
Say  here  he  gives  too  little,  there  too  much. 
In  pride,  in  reas'ning  pride,  our  error  lies  : 
All  quit  their  sphere,  and  rush  into  the  skies. 
Pride  still  is  aiming  at  the  blest  abodes, 
Men  would  be  angels,  angels  would  be  gods ; 
Aspiring  to  be  gods,  if  angels  fell, 
Aspiring  to  be  angels,  men  rebel ; 
And  who  but  wishes  to  invert  the  laws 
Of  order,  sins  against  th'  eternal  cause. — Pope. 


ADDRESSED    TO    ALL    YOUNG     LADIES    AND    GENTLEMEN    WHO 
MAY   STUDY   THIS    BOOK. 

"  Labor  for  learning  before  you're  too  old  ; 
As  knowledge  is  better  than  silver  or  gold ; 
For  silver  and  gold  will  vanish  away, 
But  learning's  a.  jewel  that  never'll  decay." 


SB  OOND- 


Grammar  is  the  art  of  speaking  and  writing  correctly.     It  is  divided  into  four  parts : — Orthography,  Etymology,  Syntax  and 

Prosody.    Orthography  teaches  the  nature  and  powers  of  letters,  and  the  just  method  of  spelling  words. 

Etymology  treats  of  the  different  sorts  of  words,  their  various  modifications,  and  their  derivation. 

Stntax  treats  of  the  agreement,  government,  and  proper  arrangement  of  words  and  sentences. 

Prosody  treats  of  the  just  pronunciation  of  words,  and  the  laws  of  versification. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


A  Letter  is  the  first  principle,  or  least  part  of  a  word. 

There  are  twenty-six  letters  in  the  English  language,  called  the 
English  Alphabet,  namely,  a,  b,  c,  d,  e,f,  g,  h,  i,  j,  k,  I,  m,  n,  o,p, 
q,  r,  s,  t,  u,  v,  w,  x,  y,  z ;  and  these  are  divided  into  vowels  and 
consonants. 

A  vowel  is  a  letter  which  makes  a  full  and  distinct  sound  of  itself. 

The  vowels  are  a,  e,  i,  o,  u  ;  and  w  and  y  are  considered  as 
vowels,  except  at  the  beginning  of  words. 

A  consonant  is  a  letter  which  cannot  make  a  distinct  sound, 
without  the  help  of  a  vowel.  All  letters  except  the  vowels  are 
consonants. 

Consonants  are  sometimes  divided  into  mutes  and  semivowels. 

The  mutes  cannot  be  sounded  at  all  without  the  help  of  a  vowel. 
They  are,  b,  p,  t,  d,  h,  and  c  and  g  hard. 


The  semivowels  have  an  imperfect  sound  of  themselves.  They 
are/,  /,  m,  n,  r,  v,  s,  z,  x,  and  c  and  g  soft. 

Four  of  the  semivowels,  namely,  /,  m,  n,  r,  are  also  distinguished 
by  the  name  of  liquids,  from  their  readily  uniting  with  other  con- 
sonants, and  flowing,  as  it  were,  into  their  sounds. 

A  diphthong  is  the  union  of  two  vowels  in  one  syllable ;  as,  ou 
in  sound. 

A  triphthong  is  the  union  of  three  vowels  in  one  syllable ;  as, 
eau  in  beauty. 

A  proper  diphthong  is  that  in  which  both  the  vowels  are  sound- 
ed ;  as,  oi  in  voice. 

An  improper  diphthong  has  but  one  of  the  vowels  sounded ;  as, 
ea  in  eagle. 


SOUNDS  OF  THE  LETTERS. 


A. 

A  has  five  sounds.  First,  the  long  slender  English  sound,  as 
in  fate,  paper,  Sec. :  Second,  the  long  Italian  sound,  as  in  far,  fa- 
ther, pa-pa,  ma-ma :  Third,  the  broad  German  sound,  as  in  fall, 
wall,  wa-ter :  Fourth,  the  short  Italian  sound,  as  in  fat,  mat,  mar- 
ry :  Fifth,  the  long  sound  before  r,  as  in  care,  fare,  pare.*  The 
long  Italian  sound  of  a  is  often  styled  the  middle  sound. 


*  Although  Walker  makes  no  difference  in  the  sound  of  a  in  Mayor  and  mare,— 
payer  [one  who  pays]  and  pair,— prayer  [one  who  prays]  and  prayer  [a  petition]— 
yet  there  is  obviously  a  great  difference;  and  I  have  taken  the  liberty  of  giving  the 
Fifth  sound  of  a,  as  above. 


There  are  two  cases  in  which  a  varies  from  the  above  descrip- 
tion ;  first,  a  in  cedar  and  liar  sounds  like  u  short.  Second,  a  in 
cabbage,  fruitage,  sounds  like  i  short. 

Aa  in  proper  names,  generally,  sounds  like  .«  short ;  as  in  Ba- 
laam, Canaan,  Isaac  ;  but  not  in  Baal,  Gaal. 

Ae  has  the  sound  of  long  e.  It  is  often  found  in  Latin  words. 
Some  authors  retain  this  form ;  as,  eenigma,  (equator,  JEsop,  iVc. ; 
but  others  have  laid  it  aside,  and  write  enigma,  Cesar,  Eneas,  &c 

Ai  has  the  sound  of  a  long  First,f  as  in  paid  ;  of  a  long  Fifth, 
t  A  long  FinU  and  a  long  Fifth,  denote  t\\o  first  nnd  fifth  sound  of  a. 


BOOK    SECOND. 


15 


as  in  air  ;  of  a  short,  in  raillery ;  of  e  short,  in  said,  saith,  again, 
waistcoat. 

Ao  has  the  sound  of  a  long  First,  as  in  gaol,  pronounced  jale. 

Au  sounds  like  a  long  First,  in  guage;  like  o  middle,  in  aunt, 
jaunt ;  and  like  a  broad,  in  laud,  fraud,  sauce,  saucy.  It  has  the 
sound  of  long  o,  in  hautboy  ;  and  that  of  o  Bhort,  in  laurel,  lau- 
danum, Sec 

Aw  has  always  the  sound  of  broad  a  ;  as  in  bawl,  scrawl,  dawn, 
fawn,  pawn* 

Ay,  like  its  near  relation  ai,  has  the  sound  of  a  long  First,  as  in 
day,  pray,  delay  ;  and  of  short  c  in  says% 

B. 

B  has  but  one  unvaried  sound,  at  the  beginning,  middle,  and  end 
of  words  ;  as  in  baker,  number,  rhubarb.  It  is  silent  before  t,  and 
after  m,  in  the  same  syllable ;  as,  lamb,  debt,  subtle.  In  other 
words,  besides  being  silent,  it  lengthens  the  syllable ;  as  in  climb, 
comb,  tomb. 

c. 

C  has  two  sounds  ;  hard  like  k,  and  soft  like  s.  It  is  always 
sounded  like  k  before  a,  o,  and  u  ;  as  in  cat,  cot,  cut, — and  like  s 
before  e,  i,  and  y  ;  as  in  cent,  cider,  cypher.  It  is  also  sounded 
like  k  before  I,  r,  and  t ;  as  in  cloth,  tract,  craft.  When  c  ends  a 
word,  or  syllable,  it  is  always  hard,  as  in  music,  flaccid,  siccity, 
pronounced  mu-sik,  flak-sid,  sik-sity.  It  has  sometimes  the  sound 
of  sh  ;  as  in  ocean,  social. 

C  is  silent  in  some  words,  as  in  Czar,  victuals,  indict. 

Ch  is  commonly  sounded  like  tsh  ;  as  in  church,  chin,  chaff", 
charter :  but  in  words  derived  from  the  Greek,  it  has  the  sound  of  k; 
as  in  chymist,  scheme,  chorus,  chyle,  distich :  and  in  foreign  names ; 
as,  Achish,  Baruch,  Enoch,  Sec  It  sounds  like  sh,  after  I,  or  n  ; 
as,  filch,  branch,  and  in  words  derived  from  the  French ;  as  in 
chaise,  chagrin,  chevalier,  machine.  Oh  in  arch,  before  a  vowel, 
sounds  like  k;  as  in  archangel,  Archipelago,  architect,  archives, 
archetype ;  except  in  arched,  archery,  archer,  archenemy  ':  but  be- 
fore a  consonant  it  always  sounds  like  tch  ;  as  in  archbishop,  arch- 
duke, archpresbyter,  Sec.  In  choir,  and  chorister,  the  ch  is  pro- 
nounced like  qu  ;  in  ostrich,  like  dgde,  as  if  spelled  ostridge.  Ch 
is  silent  in  schedule,  schism,  and  yacht ;  pronounced  seddule,  sizm, 
and  got. 

D 

JD  has  one  uniform  sound,  as  in  day,  red  ;  unless  it  may  be  said 
to  take  the  sound  of  t,  in  stuffed,  stripped,  Sec,  pronounced  stuff, 
stript,  Sec. 

D,  like  t,  to  which  it  is  so  near  related,  when  it  comes  after  the 
accent,  and  is  followed  by  the  diphthongs  ie,  io,  ia,  or  eou,  slides  in- 
to gzh,  or  the  consonant  j  :*  thus  soldier,  grandeur,  are  pronounced 
as  if  written  sol-jer,  gran-jeur  ;  and  verdure,  (where  it  must  be  re- 
membered that  u  is  a  diphthong,)  as  if  written  ver-jure  ;  and  for 
the  same  reason,  education  is  elegantly  pronounced  ed-jucation, 
although  the  accent  comes  after  the  d.  But  duke  and  reduce,  pro- 
nounced juke  and  re-juce,  where  the  accent  is  after  the  d,  cannot 
be  too  much  reprobated. 

E. 

E  has  two  sounds.  First,  the  long  sound,  as  in  me,  here,  me-tre, 
me-dium :  Second,  the  short  sound,  as  in  met,  let,  get. 

E  has  a  number  of  irregular  sounds.  It  sounds  like  a  long 
First,  as  in  they,  whey  ;  like  a  long  Fifth,  as  in  there,  where,  and 
e'er;  like  a  middle,  in  clerk,  sergeant,  Sec;  like  i  short,  in  yes, 
England,  praises,  faces,  Sec. ;  like  u  short,  in  her,  and  the  unac- 
cented termination  er,  as  in  reader.  E  is  always  silent  at  the  end 
of  a  word,  except  in  monosyllables  that  have  no  other  vowel ;  as 
he,  me,  she  ;  or  in  word3  derived  from  the  Greek ;  as,  catastrophe, 

*  This  rule  is  not  universal.  We  are  generally  agreed  in  aspirating  the  d  in 
comedian,  and  pronounce  it  comejean:  but  few,  "if  any,  can  bo  found,  who  as- 
pirate in  trajedmn,  and  pronounce  it  as  if  written  trajejtan. 


epitome.     It  softens  the  foregoing  consonants,  and  lengthens  the 
preceding  vowels  ;  as,  force,  rage,  robe. 

Ea  has  the  sound  of  a  long  First,  as  in  great,  steak ;  of  a  long 
Fifth,  as  in  bear,  pear,  swear,  wear ;  of  a  middle,  in  dearn,  heart, 
hearth  ;  of  e  long,  as  in  eat,  beat,  deacon,  treason,  plead,  bohea  ; 
and  e  short,  in  head,  bread,  cleanly,  Sec 

Eau  has  the  sound  of  long  o  ;  as  in  beau,  flambeau,  portmanteau. 
In  beauty  and  its  compounds,  it  has  the  sound  of  long  u. 

Ee  sounds  like  e  long,  as  in  seek,  sweet;  and  like  i  short,  in  been. 

Mi  sounds  like  a  long  First,  in  vein,  reign,  feign,  deign,  reigns, 
eight,  weight,  veil,  streight,  freight,  feint,  skein,  neigh,  Sec. ;  like  a 
long  Fifth,  in  heir,  their ;  like  e  long,  in  ceil,  seize,  fiend,  deceit, 
either,  neither,  leisure,  obeisance;  like  e  short,  in  heifer;  like  i 
long,  in  height,  sleight ;  like  i  short,  in  teint ,  forfeit,  surfeit,  sove~ 
reignty,  &c. 

Eo  sounds  like  e  long,  in  people  ;  like  e  short,  in  leopard,  jeop- 
ardy;  and  in  the  law  terms,  feoffee,  feoffer,  feoffment ;  like  o  long, 
in  yeoman ;  and  like  u  short,  in  surgeon,  sturgeon,  dudgeon,  gud- 
geon, Sec 

Eu  sounds  like  u  long,  in  feud,  deuce,  eulogy,  pleurisy.  When  it 
follows  r,  it  sounds  like  oo  ;  as  in  rheum,  rheumatism. 

Ew  sounds  like  u  long,.iny*ew,  new,  dew,  Sec,  pronounced  fa,  du, 
nu;  and  after  j,  r,  or  ch,  it  sounds  like  oo  ;  as  in  Jew,  crew,  chew ; 
like  o  long,  in  sew,  shew,  strew,  shewn,  shewbread. 

Ey,  when  the  accent  is  on  it,  is  always  sounded  like  a  long  First, 
as  in  Bey,  Bey,  grey,  prey,  they,  trey,  whey,  obey,  convey,  survey, 
purvey,  Sec,  except  in  key,  ley,  where  it  sounds  like  e  long.  When 
this  diphthong  is  unaccented,  it  takes  the  sound  of  long  e  /  as,  al- 
ley, valley,  barley.     Eye  sounds  like  i  long. 

F. 

F  has  always  the  same  sound  ;  as  in  fair ;  except  in  of,  where 
it  sounds  like  v. 

G. 

G,  like  C,  has  two  sounds,  a  hard  and  a  soft  one ;  hard,  as  in 
gay,  go  ;  soft,  like  j,  as  in  gentle,  giant.  It  has  generally  its  soft 
sound  before  e,  i,  and  y.  In  other  situations,  it  has,  generally,  its 
hard  sound,  except  when  preceded  by  d,  or  followed  by  e.  It  is 
silent  when  it  comes  before  m  or  n  ;  as  in  reign,  gnat,  foreign,  as- 
sign, arraign,  Sec 

Gh,  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  has  the  sound  of  the  hard  g  ; 
as,  ghost,  ghastly,  aghast,  gherkin  ;  in  the  middle,  and,  sometimes, 
at  the  end,  it  is  quite  silent ;  as  in  right,  high,  plough,  mighty.  At 
the  end,  it  has  often  the  sound  of  f ;  as  in  laugh,  cough,  tough, 
enough,  rough  ;  or  like  k,  in  hough,  lough,  shough,  pronounced  hock, 
lock,  shock.  Sometimes  the  g  only  is  sounded  ;  as  in  burgh,  burgh- 
er. 

Gn,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  or  syllable  accented,  gives  the  pre- 
ceding vowel  a  long  sound  ;  as  in  resign,  impugn,  oppugn,  impregn, 
impugned  ;  pronounced  impune,  imprene,  Sec. 

H. 

H  does  not  represent  any  particular  sound,  but  is  a  mere  effort 
of  the  breath,  which  modifies  the  sound  of  the  following  vowel ;  as 
horse,  heave,  hat.  It  is  always  silent  after  r,  and,  frequently,  when 
preceded  by  a  vowel;  as,  rhetoric,  rhyme,  rhapsody,  myrrh, fore- 
head. H  final,  preceded  by  a  vowel,  is  always  silent ;  as,  ah ! 
hah  !  oh  !  foh  !  Sarah,  Mesiah.  At  the  beginning  of  words,  it  is 
always  sounded,  except  in  heir,  heiress,  honest,  honesty,  honor, 
honorable,  herb,  herbage,  hospital,  hostler,  hour,  humble,  humor,  hu- 
morous, humorsome. 

I. 

I  has  two  sounds.  First,  the  long  diphthongal  sound ;  as  in 
pine,  title :  Second,  the  short  simple  sound  ;  as  in  pin,  tit-tie.  It 
has  a  number  of  irregular  sounds.  Before  r,  it  often  sounds  like  u 
short,  as  in  frst,  flirt,  sir.  In  some  words  it  has  the  sound  of  e 
long ;  as  in  fatigue,  caprice,  tontine,  machine,  bombazine,  magazine. 
In  a  few  words,  it  sounds  like  short  a  ;  as  in  sirrah. 


16 


BOOK    SECOND, 


id  is  frequently  sounded  like  ya  ;  as  in  Christian,  filial,  pon- 
iard; pronounced  Christ-yan,  Sec.  It  has  sometimes  the  sound  of 
short  %  >•  as  in  carriage,  marriage,  Parliament. 

le  sounds  like  e  long,  in  fiend,  grieve,  thieve  fief  liege,  chief, 
field,  grenadier  ;  like  e  short,  in  friend,  tierce  ;  liket  long,  in  die, 
hie,  lie,  pie,  tie,  vie  ;  like  i  short,  in  sieve. 

Ieii  and  iew,  have  the  sound  of  long  u  ;  as  in  Hew,  view,  adieu, 
purlieu.  In  one  word,  lieutenant,  these  letters  are  pronounced  like 
short  e,  as  if  written  lev-tenant. 

lo,  when  the  accent  is  upon  the  first  vowel,  forms  two  distinct 
syllables;  as,  priory,  violet,  violent.  The  terminations  tion,  and 
sion,  are  sounded  exactly  like  the  word  shun,  except  when  the  t  is 
preceded  by  s  or  x ;  as  in  question,  digestion,  combustion,  mixtion, 
Sec. 

lou  is  sometimes  pronounced  distinctly  in  two  syllables  ;  as  in 
bilious,  carious,  abstemious :  but  these  vowels  often  coalesce  into 
one  syllable,  pronounced  like  shus ;  thus,  precious, factious,  noxious, 
are  sounded  as  if  written  presh-us,  fac-shus,  nok-shus. 

J. 

J  sounds  exactly  like  soft  g  ;  except  in  hallelujah,  where  it  has 
the  sound  of  y.     It  is  never  silent. 

K- 

K  has  exactly  the  sound  of  hard  c,  and  is  used  before  e  and  i, 
where,  according  to  English  analogy,  c  would  be  soft  ;  as,  kept 
king,  skirts.  It  is  silent  hefore  n,  as  in  knife,  know,  knell,  knocker. 
It  is  sometimes  double  in  proper  names ;  as,  Akkub,  Bukkiah,  Ha- 
bakkuk,  Sec. ;  but  c  is  used  before  it,  to  shorten  the  vowel  by  a 
double  consonant ;  as,  cockle,  pickle,  sucker. 

L. 

L  has  always  a  soft  liquid  sound ;  as  in  love,  billow,  quarrel. 

Some  irregularities  attend  this  letter.  It  has  the  power  of  r  in 
colonel,  and  is  generally  silent  before  /,  k,  m,  and  v ,  when  preceded 
by  a ;  as  in  half,  calf,  behalf,  talk,  chalk,  walk,  folks,  psalm,  salmon, 
almond,  calve,  halve.  It  is  silent  in  halser,  chaldron,  falcon,  Sec, 
and  in  the  auxiliary  verbs  could,  would,  should.  The  custom  is  to 
double  the  /  at  the  end  of  monosyllables;  as,  mill,  will,  fall',  ex- 
cept when  a  diphthong  precedes  it  as,  hail,  toil,  soil. 

Le,  at  the  end  of  words,  is  pronounced  like  a  weak  el ;  in  which 
e  is  almost  silent;  as,  table,  shuttle. 

M. 

M has  always  the  same  sound :  as,  murmur,  monumental ;  ex- 
cept in  comptroller,  which  is  pronounced  controller. 

N. 

N  has  two  sounds :  the  one  simple  and  pure ;  as  in  man,  net, 
Sec ;  the  other  compounded  and  mixed  like  ng,  as  in  hang,  thank. 
The  latter  sound  is  heard  when  it  is  followed  by  c  hard,  g,  k,  q,  or  x\; 
as  in  concord,  anger,  blanket,  conquer,  lynx. 

N  is  silent  when  it  ends  a  syllable,  and  is  preceded  by  /  or  m  ; 
as,  kiln,  hymn,  limn,  solemn,  column,  autumn,  condemn,  contemn. 

o. 

0  has  four  sounds.  First,  the  long  open  sound  ;  as  in  no,  note, 
notion.  Second,  the  long  close  sound  ;  as  in  move,  prove,  which 
corresponds  to  the  double  o :  Third,  the  long  broad  sound ;  as  in 
nor,  for,  or:  Fourth,  the  short  broad  sound;  as  in  not,  hot,  got. 
The  long  close  sound  of  o  is  often  styled  the  middle  sound. 

Oa  sounds  like  o  long,  in  moat,  boat,  coat,  oat,  Sec ;  and  like  a 
broad,  in  groat,  broad,  abroad,  Sec. 

Oe  sounds  like  o  long,  in  doe,  roe,  foe,  toe ;  like  oo  in  canoe, 

shoe,  Sec;  like  u  short,  in  does.     It  lias  sometimes  the  sound  of 

I  ng  e  ;  as  in  Phcetiix,  foetus,  Antceci ;  and   sometimes  of  short  e  ; 

in  ceconomics,  ecumenical. 
as 


0%  has  almost  universally  the  double  sound  of  a  broad  and  e 
long  united  ;  as  in  boil,  spoil,  toil,  oil,  soil,  joint,  point,  anoint ; 
which  should  never  be  pronounced  as  if  written  bile,  spile,  Sec. 

Oo  almost  always  preserves  its  regular  sound  ;  it  is  pronounced 
long,  as  in  moon,  soon,  fool,  rood,  food,  mood,  Sec.  This  is  its  reg- 
ular sound.  It  sounds  like  o  long,  in  door,  floor,  pronounced  dore, 
flore :  like  u  middle,  in  wool,  wood,  good,  hood,  foot,  stood,  under- 
stood, withstood,  Sec,  and  like  u  short,  in  blood,  flood. 

Ou  has  seven  different  sounds.  The  first  and  proper  sound  is 
equivalent  to  ow  in  down  ;  as  in  bound,  found,  surround,  Sec.  The 
second  is  that  of  short  u  ;  as  in  enough,  cousin,  double,  trouble,  ad- 
journ, journey,  touchy,  courage,  encourage,  couple,  scourge,  flourish, 
nourish,  southern,  southward,  country,  famous,  Sec.  The  third  is 
that  of  oo ;  as  in  soup,  youth,  bouse,  bousy,  surtout,  croup,  group, 
uncouth,  wound,  (a  hurt,)  throughly,  you,  your,  amour,  paramour, 
tour,  tournament,  rendezvous,  accoutre,  billetdoux,  &c.  The  fourth 
is  that  of  long  o  ;  as  in  though,  although,  coulter,  court,  poultice, 
soul,  source,  resource,  mourn,  bourn,  shoulder,  borough,  thorough, 
Sec.  The  fifth  is  like  the  noun  awe,  and  is  heard  only  in  ought, 
bought,  brought,  sought,  besought,  fought,  nought,  thought,  methought, 
wrought.  The  sixth  sound  is  that  of  short  oo,  or  the  middle  u,  as 
heard  only  in  the  auxiliary  verbs  could,  would,  should,  rhyming 
with  good,  hood,  stood.  The  seventh  sound  is  that  of  short  o,  and 
heard  only  in  cough  and  trough,  pronounced  cof,  trof;  and  in  lough, 
shough,  pronounced  lock  and  shock. 

Ow  is  generally  sounded  like  ou  in  thou  ;  as  in  vow,  now,  how, 
cow,  sow,  clown,  frown,  town,  crown,  drown,  power,  powder,  vowel, 
prowess.  It  sounds  like  o  long,  in  grow,  blow,  show,  know,  snow, 
flown,  growth,  low,  below,  owner,  bestower,  Sec. 

Oy  is  but  another  form  for  oi,  and  is  pronounced  exactly  like  it. 

P. 

P  has  but  one  sound,  as  in  pen.  It  is.  silent  before  s,  and  also 
before  t,  when  preceded  by  m,  as  in  psalter,  empty. 

Ph  is  generally  sounded  like' jf  ;  as  in  philosophy,  phantom,  Sec. 
In  nephew  and  Stephen,  it  has  the  sound  of  v.  In  diphthong,  and 
triphthong,  the  sound  of  p  only  is  heard  ;  in  phthisis,  phthisic,  and 
phthisical,  both  letters  are  silent.  In  sapphire,  the  first  p  slides 
into  ph. 

Q. 

Q  has  always  the  sound  of  k.  It  is  constantly  followed  by  u, 
pronounced  like  w ;  and  its  general  sound  is  heard  in  quack,  quill, 
queen,  Sec,  pronounced  kwack,  kwill,  kween,  Sec 

Qu  is  sometimes  sounded  like  k  ;  as  in  conquer,  liquor,  pro- 
nounced konkur,  &c. 

R. 

R  has  two  sounds,  one  rough,  as  in  Rome,  rage ;  the  other 
smooth,  as  in  bard,  card. 

Re,  at  the  end  of  many  words,  is  pronounced  like  a  weak  er  ;  as 
in  theatre,  sepulchre,  massacre. 

s. 

S  has  two  different  sounds ;  one  a  sharp,  hissing  sound,  at  the 
beginning  of  words ;  as  saint,  sister,  sell,  sun  ;  the  other,  a  soft  and 
flat  sound,  like  z ;  as  in  is,  his,  was,  these,  those,  commas.  At  the 
end  of  words  it  generally  takes  the  soft  sound.  It  sounds  like  z, 
before  ion,  if  a  vowel  go  before  it ;  as,  intrusion ;  but  like  *  sharp, 
if  a  consonant  precede  it ;  as,  conversion.  These  two  sounds,  ac- 
companied by  the  aspirate,  or  h,  form  all  the  varieties  which  are 
found  in  authors  upon  this  letter.  S  is  silent  in  isle,  island,  aisle, 
viscount,  demesne. 

Sc  has  the  power  of  sk,  before  a,  o,  u,  and  r ;  as  in  scale,  scoff, 
sculpture,  scribble  ;  like  soft  s,  before  e,  i,  and  y  ;  as  in  scene,  sci- 
ence, Scythian. 

T. 

T  generally  sounds  as  in  take,  temper.  71  before  u,  where  the 
accent  precedes,  sounds  like  tch,  or  tsh  ;  as  in  nature,  virtue,  pro- 


BOOK    SECOND. 


17 


nounced  as  if  written,  na-tshure,  or  na-tchure,  virtshue,  or  vir- 
ichue.  The  same  may  be  observed  of  t,  when  followed  by  eou,  or 
uou  ;  as  in  righteous,  piteous,  plenteous,  unctuous,  presumptuous,  Sec, 
pronounced  righ-tcheous,  pit-cheous,  plen-tcheolis,  nng-tchiious,  pre- 
sump-tchuous,  Sec.  Nor  is  this  tendency  of  t  before  long  u  found 
only  where  the  accent  immediately  precedes ;  for  we  hear  the  same 
aspiration  in  this  letter  in  spiritual,  spirituous,  signature,  ligature, 
forfeiture,  as  if  written  spiritshual,  spiritshuous,  Sec,  where  the  ac- 
cent is  two  syllables  before  these  letters ;  and  the  only  termination 
which  seems  to  refuse  this  tendency  of  the  t  to  the  aspiration,  is 
that  in  iude  ;  as  latitude,  longitude,  multitude,  Sec. 

FV  before  a  vowel,  preceded  by  s,  x,  or  n,  has  the  sound  of  tch,  or 
tsh;  as  in  bestial,  celestial,  frontier,  admixtion,  Sec,  pronounced  bes- 
tchial,  celes-tchial,  fron-tcheer,  admix-tchion  ;  but  when  not  preceded 
by  s,  x,  or  n,  it  sounds  like  sh  ;  as  in  nation,  patient,  notion  ;  except 
in  such  words  as  tierce,  tiara,  Sec,  and  excepting  also  derivatives 
from  words  ending  in  ty ;  as,  mighty,  mightier ;  I  pity,  thov  pitiest, 
he  pities  ;  twentieth,  thirtieth,  Sec. 

T  is  silent  when  preceded  by  s,  and  followed  by  the  abbreviated 
terminations  en  and  le  ;  as  in  hasten,  chasten,  fasten,  listen  christen, 
moisten,  castle,  nestle,  wrestle,  thistle,  xohistle,  epistle,  apostle,  bustle, 
Sec,  which  are  pronounced  as  if  written  hace'n,  chace'n,  cassle,  nes- 
sle,  Sec  In  often,  and  soften,  the  t  is  silent :  also,  in  mortgage,  bank- 
ruptcy. 

Th  has  two  sounds,  one  soft  and  flat ;  as,  thus,  whether,  hither, 
thither,  Sec ;  the  other  sharp ;  as,  breath,  thick,  throne,  panther,  ethics, 
Thursday.  Th  is  sometimes  pronounced  like  simple  t ;  as,  T horn- 
as,  thyme,  Thames,  asthma,  Sec 

u. 

XI  has  three  sounds.  First,  the  long  diphthongal  sound ;  as  in 
tube,  cube,  cubic  ;  Second,  the  short  simple  sound ;  as  in  tub,  cup, 
sup ;  Third,  the  middle,  or  obtuse  sound;  as  in  bull,  full,  pull:  In 
this  sound  we  do  not  pronounce  the  latter  part  of  u  quite  so  long  as 
the  oo  in  pool,  nor  so  short  as  the  u  in  dull;  but  with  a  middle  sound 
between  both,  which  is  the  true  short  sound  of  the  oo  in  coo  and  woo, 
as  may  be  heard  by  comparing  woo  and  wool;  the  latter  of  which  is 
a  perfect  rhyme  to  bull. 

XI  has  some  irregular  sounds.  "When  u  accented  follows  r,  or 
ch,  in  the  same  syllable,  it  sometimes  has  the  long  sound  of  oo ;  as 
in  true,  rule.  It  has  the  sound  of  e  short,  in  bury,  and  burial;  pro- 
nounced berry,  berrial;  and  of  i  short,  in  business  ;  pronounced  biz- 
ness. 

Ua  sounds  like  wa,  in  assuage,  persuade,  antiquary ;  like  mid- 
dle a,  in  guard,  guardian,  guarantee. 

Tie  sounds  like  u  long,  in  clue,  cue,  due,  blue,  true,  flue,  pursue, 
Sec,  like  we  in  quench,  querist,  conquest,  Sec  In  a  few  words  it 
is  pronounced  like  e  short;  as  in  guest,  guess.  In  some  words 
it  is  entirely  sunk ;  as  in  antique,  oblique,  prorogue,  catalogue,  dia- 
logue, Sec. 

Ui  sounds  like  u  long,  in  suit,  sluice^juice,  pursuit,  Sec  When 
ui  follows  b  or  g,  the  u  is  silent,  and  the  g  has  its  hard  sound ;  as  in 
guide,  guile,  guild,  build,  guilt,  disguise,  beguile,  guinea,  Sec ;     It 


sounds  like  wi,  in  languid,  anguish,  quickly,  extinguish,  Sec ;  like  oo 
in  fruit,  bruise,  recruit,  Sec 

Uo  sounds  like  wo  ;  as  in  quote,  quorum,  quondum,  Sec. 

Uy  has  the  sound  of  long  e;  as  in  obloquy,  soliloquy;  pronounced 
obloquee,  &c,  except  buy,  and  its  derivatives. 

Uai  has  the  sound  of  wa  ;  as  in  quail,  quaint,  acquaintance. 

Ilea  and  uee  sound  like  wee ;  as  in  squeak,  squeal,  squeamish, 
squeeze,  queer,  Sec 

Uoi  and  uoy  sound  like  woi  ;  as  in  quoif,  quoiffure,  quoit,  quoin, 
and  buoy. 

V. 

Fhas  the  sound  of  flat//  and  bears  the  same  relation  to  it  as  z 
does  to  s.  It  has  one  uniform  sound,  as  in  voice,  vanity,  love  ;  and 
if  ever  silent,  it  is  in  the  word  twelvemonth,  where  both  that  letter 
and  the  e,  are,  in  colloquial  pronunciation,  generally  dropped,  as  if 
written  tweT month. 

w. 

W,  when  a  consonant,  has  nearly  the  sound  of  oo  ;  as,  water  re- 
sembles ooater.  W  before  h  is  pronounced  as  if  it  were  after  the 
h  ;  as  in  why,  when  ;  pronounced  hwy,  hwen. 

W  before  r  is  always  silent ;  as  in  wrack,  wrangle,  wrap,  wrath, 
Sec,  and  before  h  and  the  vowel  o,  when  long,  as  whole,  who,  Sec, 
pronounced  hole,  hoo,  Sec.  In  sword,  and  answer,  it  is  always  si- 
lent: also  in  the  preposition  toward,  and  towards,  pronounced  as  if 
written  toard,  and  toards,  rhyming  with  hoard  and  hoards  ;  but  in 
the  adjectives  and  adverbs,  toward  and  towardly,  froward  and  fro- 
wardly,  the  w  is  heard  distinctly.  It  is  sometimes  dropped  in  the 
last  syllable  of  awkward,  as  if  written  awkard;  but  this  pronuncia- 
tion is  vulgar.  W  is  often  joined  to  o,  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  with- 
out affecting  the  sound  of  that  vowel ;  as,  crow,  blow,  grow,  know, 
row,  tow,  Sec 

X. 

X  has  three  sounds,  viz ;  It  is  sounded  like  z  at  the  beginning  of 
proper  names  of  Greek  original ;  as  in  Xanthus,  Xenophon,  Xerxes. 

It  has  a  sharp  sound  like  ks,  when  it  ends  a  syllable  with  the  ac- 
cent upon  it ;  as,  exit,  exercise,  excellence  ;  or  when  the  accent  is  on 
the  next  syllable,  if  it  begin  with  a  consonant ;  as,  excuse,  extent, 
expense. 

It  has,  generally,  a  flat  sound  like  gz,  when  the  accent  is  not  on 
it,  and  the  following  syllable  begins  with  a  vowel ;  as,  exert,  exist, 
example  ;  pronounced,  egzert,  egzist,  egzample. 

Y. 

Y,  when  a  consonant,  has  always  the  same  sound ;  as  in  young  ; 
but,  as  a  vowel,  it  has  different  sounds.  "When  it  follows  a  conso- 
nant, and  ends  a  word  or  syllable,  it  sounds  like  i  long,  as  in  defy, 
tyrant,  reply,  Sec. ;  but  when  the  accent  does  not  fall  on  it,  then  it 
is  sounded  like  e  long,  as  folly,  vanity. 

z. 

Z  sounds  like  the  flat  s;  as  in  freeze,  frozen,  brazen. 


OF  SYLLABLES  AND  THE  RULES  FOR  ARRANGING  THEM. 


A  syllable  is  a  sound,  either  simple  or  compounded,  pro- 
nounced by  a  single  impulse  of  the  voice,  and  constituting  a  word, 
or  part  of  a  word ;  as  a,  an,  ant. 

Spelling  is  the  art  of  rightly  dividing  words  into  their  syllables, 
or  of  expressing  a  word  by  its  proper  letters. 

The  following  are  the  general  rules  for  the  division  of  words  in- 
to syllables. 


1.  A  single  consonant  between  two  vowels,'must  be  joined  to  the 
latter  syllable ;  as,  de-light,  bri-dal,  re-source  ;  except  the  letter  x  ; 
as,  ex-ist,  ex-amine:  and  except  likewise  words  compounded;  as, 
up-on,  un-even,  dis-ease. 

2.  Two  consonants  proper  to  begin  a  word,  must  not  be  separa- 
ted ;  as,  fa-ble,  sti-fk.     But  when  they  come  between  two  vowels, 


18 


BOOK    SECOND, 


and  are  such  as  cannot  begin  a  word,  they  mnst  be  divided ;  as,  ut- 
most, un-der,  insect,  er-ror,  cof-fin, 

3.  When  three  consonants  meet  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  if  they 
can  begin  a  word,  and  the  preceding  vowel  be  pronounced  long, 
they  are  not  to  be  separated ;  as,  de-throne,  destroy.  But  when  the 
vowel  of  the  preceding  syllable  is  pronounced  short,  one  of  the 
consonants  always  belongs  to  that  syllable;  as,  dis-tract,  dis-prove, 
dis-train. 

4.  When  three  or  four  consonants,  which  are  not  proper  to  be- 
gin a  syllable,  meet  between  two  vowels,  such  of  them  as  can  begin 
a  syllable  belong  to  the  latter,  the  rest  to  the  former  syllable ;  as, 


abstain,  com-plete,  em-broil,  dan-dler,  dap-ple,  constrain,  handsome, 
parch^ment. 

5.  Two  vowels,  not  being  a  diphthong,  must  be  divided  into  sep- 
arate syllables ;  as,  cru-el,  de-ni-al,  so-ci-e-ty. 

6.  Compounded  words  must  be  traced  into  the  simple  words  of 
which  they  are  composed;  as,  ice-house,  glow-worm,  over-power, 
never-the-less. 

7.  Grammatical,  and  other  particular  terminations,  are  general- 
ly separated ;  as,  teach-est,  teaeh-ethr  teach-ing,  teach-er,  contend-estT 
great-er,  wretch-ed,  good-ness,  free-dom,  false-hood. 


OF  WORDS  IN  GENERAL  AND  THE  RULES  FOR  SPELLING  THEM. 


Words  are  articulate  sounds,  used  by  common  consent,  as  signs 
of  our  ideas. 

A  word  of  one  syllable  is  termed  a  Monosyllable ;  a  word  of  two 
syllables,  a  Dissyllable ;  a  word  of  three  syllables,  a  Trisyllable  ; 
and  a  word  of  four  or  more  syllables,  a  Polysyllable. 

All  words  are  either  primitive  or  derivative. 

A  primitive  word  is  that  which  cannot  be  reduced  to  any  sim- 
pler word  in  the  language ;  as,  man,  good,  content. 

A  derivative  word  is  that  which  may  be  reduced  to  another 
word  in  English  of  greater  simplicity ;  as,  manful,  goodness,  con- 
tentment, Yorkshire,* 

The  orthography  of  the  English  Language  is  attended  with 
much  uncertainty  and  perplexity.  But  a  considerable  part  of  this 
inconvenience  may  be  remedied,  by  attending  to  the  general  laws 
of  formation ;  and,  for  this  end,  the  learner  is  presented  with  a  view 
of  such  general  maxims  in  spelling  primitive  and  derivative  words, 
as  have  been  almost  universally  received. 

Rule  1.  Monosyllables  ending  withy,  I,  or  s,  preceded  by  a 
single  vowel,  double  the  final  consonant ;  as,  staff",  mill,  pass,  Sec. 
The  only  exceptions  are,  of,  if,  as,  is,  has,  was,  yes,  his,  this,  us, 
and  thus. 

Rule  2.  Monosyllables  ending  with  any  consonant  but  f  I,  or 
s,  and  preceded  by  a  single  vowel,  never  double  the  final  consonant ; 
excepting  add,  ebb,  butt,  egg,  odd,  err,  inn,  bunn,  purr,  and  buzz. 

Rule  3.  Words  ending  with  y,  preceded  by  a  consonant,  form 
the  plurals  of  nouns,  the  persons  of  verbs,  verbal  nouns,  past  partici- 
ples, comparatives,  and  superlatives,  by  changing  y  into  i  ;  as,  spy, 
spies  ;  I  carry,  thou  carriest,  he  carrieth,  or  carries  ;  carrier,  carri- 
ed; happy,  happier,  happiest. 

The  present  participle  in  ing,  retains  the  y,  that  I  may  not  be 
doubled ;  as,  carry,  carrying  ;  bury,  burying,  Sec. 

But  y,  preceded  by  a  vowel,  in  such  instances  as  the  above,  is 
not  changed;  as,  boy,  boys  ;  I  cloy,  he  cloys,  cloyed,  &c. ;  except  in 
lay,  pay,  and  say  ;  from  which  are  formed,  laid,  paid,  and  said;  and 
their  compounds,  unlaid,  unpaid,  unsaid,  Sec. 

Rule  4.  Words  ending  with  y,  preceded  by  a  consonant,  upon 
assuming  an  additional  syllable  beginning  with  a  consonant,  com- 
monly change  y  into  i  ;  as,  happy,  happily,  happiness.     But  wheny 


*  A  compound  word  is  included  under  the  head  of  derivative  words ;  as,  pen 
lenife,  teacup,  kokingglass ;  may  be  reduced  to  other  words  of  greater  simplicity. 


is  preceded  by  a  vowel,  it  is  very  rarely  changed  in  the  additional 
syllable;  as,  coy,  coyly;  boy,  boyish,  boyhood;  annoy,  annoyer,  an- 
noyance ;  joy,  joyless,  joyful. 

Rule  5.  Monosyllables  and  words  accented  on  the  last  sylla- 
ble, ending  with  a  single  consonant  preceded  by  a  single  vowe^ 
double  that  consonant,  when  they  take  another  syllable  beginning 
with  a  vowel;  as,  wit,  witty ;  thin,  thinnish ;  to  abet,  an  abettor;  to 
begin,  a  beginner. 

But  if  a  diphthong  precedes,  or  the  accent  is  on  the  preceding 
syllable,  the  consonant  remains  single ;  as,  to  toil,  toiling  ;  to  offer ^ 
an  offering  ;  maid,  maiden,  Sec. 

Rule  6.  Words  ending  with  any  double  letter  but  I,  and  taking 
ness,  less,  ly,  or  ful,  after  them,  preserve  the  letter  double ;  as, 
harmlessness,  carelessness,  carelessly,  stiffly,  successful,  distressful, 
&c.  But  those  words  which  end  with  double  I,  and  take  ness,  less, 
tyifd,  after  them,  generally  omit  one  I;  as,  fulness,  stilness,  fully, 
skilful,  Sec. 

Rule  7.  Ness,  less,  ly,  and  fid,  added  to  words  ending  with  si- 
lent e,  do  not  cut  it  off;  as,  paleness,  guileless,  closely,  peaceful ;  ex- 
cept in  a  few  words ;  as,  duly,  truly,  awful. 

Rule  8.  Ment,  added  to  words  ending  with  silent  e,  generally 
preserves  the  e  from  elision ;  as,  abatement,  chastisement,  incitement, 
Sec.  The  words  judgment,  abridgment,  acknowledgment,  are  devia- 
tions from  the  rule. 

Like  other  terminations,  ment  changes  y  into  i,  when  preceded 
by  a  consonant ;  as,  accompany,  accompaniment ;  merry,  merriment. 

Rule  9.  Able  and  ible,  when  incorporated  into  words  ending 
with  silent  e,  almost  always  cut  it  off;  as,  blame,  blamable ;  curey 
curable  ;  sense,  sensible  ;  Sec,  but  if  c  or  g  soft  comes  before  e  in  the 
original  word,  the  e  is  then  preserved  in  words  compounded  with 
able  ;  as,  change,  changeable  ;  peace,  peaceable,  Sec. 

Rule  10.  When  ing  or  ish  is  added  to  words  ending  with  silent 
e,  the  e  is  almost  universally  omitted;  as,  place,  placing ;  lodge, 
lodging;  slave,  slavish ; prude,  prudish. 

Rule  11.  Words  taken  into  composition,  often  drop  those  let- 
ters which  were  superfluous  in  the  simple  words ;  as,  handful,  dung- 
hil,  withal,  also,  chilblain,  Sec. 


ETYMOLOGY. 


There  are,  in  English,  ten  sorts  of  words ;  or,  as  they  are  commonly  called,  Parts  of  Speech,  namely]: — Article,  Noun,  Pronoun,  Ad- 
jective, Verb;  Participle,  Adverb,  Preposition,  Conjunction  and  Interjection, 


ARTICLE. 

An  Article  is  a  word  placed  before  nouns  to  limit  their  signi- 
fication ;  as,  a  garden,  an  eagle,  the  woman. 

There  are  two  articles,  «  or  an,  and  the. 

A  or  an  is  called  the  indefinite  article. 

The  is  called  the  definite  article. 

The  indefinite  article  limits  the  noun  to  one  of  a  kind,  but,  gen- 
erally, to  no  particular  one ;  as,  give  me  a  book ;  that  is,  any  book. 

The  definite  article  limits  the  noun  to  one  or  more  particular  ob- 
ject ;  as,  give  me  the  book ;  that  is,  some  particular  book. 

NOUN. 

A  Noun  is  a  word  which  is  the  name  of  any  person,  place,  or 
thing;  as,  John,  London,  house,  virtue. 

Nouns  are  of  two  kinds,  common  and  proper. 

Common  nouns  are  the  names  of  whole  sorts  or  species ;  as,  man, 
horse,  tree. 

Proper  nouns  are  the  names  of  individuals ;  as,  T/iomas,  Jane, 
Ihston. 

To  nouns  belong  gender,  person,  number,  and  case. 

Gender  is  the  distinction  of  sex. 

There  are  three  genders,  the  masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter. 
The  masculine  gender  denotes  males ;  as,  man,  boy,  lion. 
The  feminine  gender  denotes  females ;  as,  woman,  girl,  lioness. 
The  neuter  gender  denotes  tilings  without  sex ;  as,  chair,  peach, 
table. 

Person  is  the  quality  of  the  noun  which  modifies  the  verb. 

There  are  three  persons,  the  first,  second,  and  third. 

The  first  person  denotes  the  person  speaking;  as,  /learn. 

The  second  person  denotes  the  person  or  thing  spoken  to;  as,  you 
learn. 

The  third  person  denotes  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of;  as,  he 
learns. 

Nouns  have  but  two  persons,  the  second  and  third ;  but  pronouns 
have  three. 

Number  is  the  distinction  of  one  from  many. 

Nouns  have  two  numbers,  the  singular  and  pluraL 

The  singular  number  denotes  but  one  object ;  as,  pen,  booh. 

The  plural  number  denotes  more  objects  than  one ;  as,  pens,  books. 

Case  is  the  different  state  or  situation  of  nouns  with  regard  to 
other  words. 

Nouns  have  three  cases,  the  nominative,  possessive,  and  objective. 

The  nominative  case  is  the  actor,  or  subject  of  the  verb ;  as,  the 
boy  runs ;  it  generally  comes  before  the  verb. 

The  possessive  case  denotes  property  or  possession ;  it  is  general- 
ly formed  by  adding  s  to  a  noun  with  an  apostrophe ;  thus,  John's 
book ;  when  the  plural  ends  in  s,  the  apostrophe  only  is  added ;  as, 
on  eagles'  wings. 

The  objective  case  is  the  object  on  which  the  action  of  a  verb  or 
participle  terminates,  or  the  object  of  a  preposition;  as,  Moses 
smote  the  rock  with  his  rod;  it  generally  comes  after  the  verb  or 
preposition. 


PRONOUN. 

A  Pronoun  is  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun,  to  avoid  the  too 
frequent  repetition  of  the  same  word ;  as,  Dick  is  idle,  and  he  must 
be  punished. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  pronouns,  personal  and  relative. 

Personal  pronouns  stand  immediately  for  the  name  of  some  per- 
son or  thing;  as,  Mary  has  long  lessons,  and  she  learns  them  well. 

Relative  pronouns  relate  directly  to  some  noun  or  personal  pro- 
noun, called  the  antecedent ;  as,  the  boy  who  studies.  They  are 
who,  whose,  whom,  which,  what,  and  that.  The  same  that  belong  to 
nouns,  belong  also  to  pronouns.* 

ADJECTIVE. 

An  Adjective  is  a  word  which  expresses  some  quality  or  pro- 
perty of  a  noun ;  as,  a  good  boy,  a  bad  girl,  a  sweet  apple. 

Pronominal  adjectives  are  those  which  are  sometimes  used  as  ad- 
jectives, and  sometimes  as  pronouns. 

Adjectives  are  varied  only  to  express  the  degrees  of  comparison. 

They  have  three  degrees  of  comparison,  the  positive,  compara- 
tive, and  superlative. 

The  positive  degree  expresses  the  quality  of  an  object  without 
any  increase  or  diminution ;  as,  wise,  great,  good. 

The  comparative  degree  increases  or  lessens  the  positive  in  signi- 
fication ;  as,  wiser,  greater,  better. 

The  superlative  degree  increases  or  lessens  the  positive  in  the 
highest  or  lowest  degree ;  as,  wisest,  greatest,  best. 

Some  adjectives  do  not  admit  of  comparison ;  as,  chief,  perfect, 
supreme,  square,  &c 

VERB. 

A  Verb  is  awordwhieh  expresses  action  or  being;  as,  birds  fly, 
he  runs,  I  live. 

Verbs  are  of  two  kinds,  transitive  and  intransitive.! 

They  are  also  divided  into  regular,  irregular,  and  defective. 

A  transitive  verb  denotes  action  or  energy  which  terminates  on 
some  object ;  as,  Peter  struck  Joseph. 

An  intransitive  verb  denotes  simple  being  or  existence,  or  it  de- 
notes action  which  is  limited  to  the  subject ;  as,  I  am,  he  stands,  the 
fish  swims. 

Regidar  verbs  are  those  whose  imperfect  tense  and  perfect  parti- 
ciple end  in  ed;  as,  loved. 

Irregular  verbs  are  those  whose  imperfect  tense  and  perfect  parti- 
ciple do  not  end  in  ed;  as,  wrote,  written. 

All  monosyllables  are  irregular,  unless  compounded. 


*Except  articles. 

fTo  these  may  be  added  a  combination  of  verbs  called  the  passive  form,  denoting 
action  received  or  endured  by  the  person  or  thing  which  is  the  nominative  ;  as, 
Samuel  was  kicked  by  a  horse.  It  is  formed  by  adding  the  perfect  participle  of  a 
transitive  verb  to  the  verb  to  be,  through  all  its  various  changes  of  number,  person, 
mood,  and  tense. 

"  The  common  distribution  into  active,  neuter,  and  passive,"  says  Dr.  Webster,  "  is 
very  objectionable.  Many  of  our  neuter  verbs  imply  action  in  a  pre-eminent  de- 
gree ;  as,  to  run,  to  walk,  to  fly ;  and  the  young  learner  cannot  easily  conceive  why 
such  verbs  should  not  be  called  active.  "The  only  distribution  which  seems  to  be 
correct,  and  sufficiently  comprehensive,  is  into  transitive  and  intransitive. " 


20 


BOOK    SECOND. 


Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  used  only  in  some  of  their 
moods  and  tenses ;  as,  ought,  quoth,  &c. 

To  verbs,  belong  mood,  tense,  number,  and  person. 

Mood  is  the  manner  of  representing  action  or  being. 

There  are  five  moods,  namely:  the  indicative,  subjunctive,  po- 
tential, infinitive,  and  imperative. 

The  indicative  mood  simply  indicates  or  declares  a  thing,  or  asks 
a  question ;  as,  I  learn. 

The  subjunctive  mood  expresses  action  or  being,  in  a  doubtful  or 
conditional  manner ;  as,  if  I  learn. 

The  potential  mood  declares  the  power,  liberty,  possibility,  or  ne- 
cessity of  action  or  being ;  as,  I  may,  can,  or  must  learn. 

The  infinitive  mood  expresses  a  thing  in  a  general  and  unlimited 
manner,  having  no  nominative,  consequently,  neither  number  nor 
person ;  as,  I  should  like  to  learn. 

The  imperative  mood  commands,  exhorts,  or  entreats ;  as,  learn, 
learn  thou,  or  do  thou  learn. 

Tense  is  the  division  of  time. 

There  are  six  tenses,  namely ;  the  present,  imperfect,  perfect, 
pluperfect,  first  future,  and  second  future. 

The  present  tense  denotes  present  time ;  as,  I  write. 

The  imperfect  tense  denotes  past  time,  however  distant;  as,  I 
wrote  yesterday. 

The  perfect  tense  denotes  past  time,  but  also  conveys  an  allusion 
to  the  present;  as,  I  have  written  to-day. 

The  pluperfect  tense  denotes  past  time,  but  as  prior  to  some  other 
past  time  specified ;  as,  I  had  written  before  the  messenger  arrived. 

The  first  future  tense  denotes  future  time ;  as,  I  shall  write  to- 
morrow. 

The  second  future  tense  denotes  future  time,  but  as  prior  to  some 
other  future  time  specified ;  as,  I  shall  have  written  before  the  post 
arrives. 

PARTICIPLE. 

A  Participle  is  a  word  derived  from  a  verb,  and  partakes  of 
the  nature  of  the  verb,  adjective,  and  noun ;  as,  I  heard  a  child  cry- 
ing ;  I  saw  a  letter  written  by  William. 

Participles  are  of  two  kinds,  present  and  perfect. 

The  present  participle  denotes  present  time,  and  generally  ends 
in  ing  ;  as,  loving. 

The  perfect  participle  denotes  past  time,  and,  in  regular  verbs, 
corresponds  exactly  with  the  imperfect  tense ;  as,  loved. 

Participles,  like  verbs,  have  a  transitive,  intransitive,  and  passive 
signification. 

ADVERB. 

An  Adverb  is  a  word  generally  used  to  qualify  or  modify  the 
sense  of  verbs;  as,  the  man  fought  bravely;  the  birds  fly  swiftly. 
It  sometimes  qualifies  participles,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs ;  as, 
studying  diligently,  she  committed  her  lesson ;  extremely  cold  weath- 
er; he  learns  very  rapidly.  Some  adverbs  admit  of  comparison; 
as,  soon,  sooner,  soonest. 

PREPOSITION. 

A  Preposition  is  a  word  which  serves  to  connect  words,  and 
show  the  relation  between  them,  or  to  show  the  condition  of  things ; 
as,  a  bird  on  the  tree ;  a  squirrel  in  the  cage. 

CONJUNCTION. 

A  Conjunction  is  a  word  that  is  chiefly  used  to  connect  sen- 
tences, joining  two  or  more  simple  sentences  into  one  compound 
one ;  as,  Henry  works  and  George  plays ;  Jack  will  study  or  go  to 
sea. 

INTERJECTION. 

An  Interjection  is  a  word  used  to  express  passion  or  emotion ; 
usually  that  which  is  violent  or  sudden ;  as,  oh!  alas!  ah!  hush! 
lo!  fie!   O!  behold! 

When  Oh  is  used  as  an  interjection,  the  poinfis  generally  placed 


immediately  afler  it ;  but  when  0  is  employed,  the  point  is  placed 
after  one  or  more  intervening  words;  as,  "  Oh!  my  offence  is  rank, 
it  smells  to  heaven !"     "  But  thou,  0  hope !  with  eyes  so  fair. " 

_  Note.  Nouns  composed  of  two  or  more  words,  separated  by  hyphens,  are  some- 
times called  compound  nouns  ;  as,-  railroad,,-  tea-potf  &c— those  with  some  title 
added  to  them,  complex  notions  ;  as,  Mr.  Jones,  Gen.  Taylor,  Judge  White,  J. 
Phelps,  Esq.,  Dr.  John  Gilbert,  &c. — those  which  are  the  names  of  some  quality,  ab- 
stract nouns  ;  as,  virtue,-  vice,  cheerfulness,  vanity,  charity,  goodness,  &c. — those  de- 
noting multitude,  or  many  united  in  one  body,  collective  nouns  ;  as,  an  army,  a 
Jtock,  a  council,  an  assembly,  &c. ;  and  those  derived  from  verbs,  verbal  or  participial 
nouns  ;  as,  the  ringing  of  bells,  the  singing  of  birds,  &c.  N.  B.  All  the  above,  ex- 
cept complex  nouns,  [proper]  are  classed  under  the  general  head  of  common  nouns. 


DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


Sing. 
Nom.  king 
Poss.  king's 
Obj.    king. 


Plu. 
Nom.  kings 
Poss,  kings' 
Obj.  kings. 


Sing. 
Nom.  man 
Poss.  man's 
Obj.   man. 


Plu. 
Nom.  men 
Poss.  men's 
Obj.    men. 


Number.  The  plural  .number  of  nouns  is  generally  formed  by 
adding*,  or  es3  to  the  singular;  as,  book,  books ;  fox,  foxes.  All 
nouns  which  form  their  plurals  in  this  manner,  are  called  regular ; 
those  which  deviate  from  this,  are  called  irregular. 

A  CATALOGUE  OF  IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 
Singular.         Plural. 

Man,  Men. 

woman,  women, 

brother,  brothers  or  brethren. 

ox,  oxen, 

mouse,  mice, 

tooth,  teeth, 

beau,  beaux, 

child,  children, 

die,  dice.* 

louse,  lice, 

goose,  geese. 

Many  nouns,  ending  in  f  or  fe,  form  their  plurals  by  changing 
the  termination  into  ves  ;  as,  leaf,  leaves  ;  wife,  wives  ;  beef,  beeves. 

Nouns  ending  with  y,  preceded  by  a  consonant,  change  the  y  in- 
to ies  ;  as,  lady,  ladies;  cherry,  cherries;  those  preceded  by  a  vowel 
have  the  regular  plural ;  as,  attorney,  attorneys  ;  turkey,  turkeys. 

Some  nouns  have  no  plural ;  as,  wheat,  gold,  pride,  milk,  water, 
wine,  &c.  ;J  and  some  have  no  singular ;  as,  ashes,  tongs,  shears. 
Others  are  alike  in  both  numbers ;  as,  sheep,  swine,  deer,  salmon, 
trout.  N.  B.  Some  of  those  having  a  plural  ending  only,  may  be 
used  in  the  singular  or  plural ;  as,  bellows,  gallows,  &c.  News  and 
molasses  are  always  singular. 

GENDER. 

The  English  language  has  three  methods  of  distinguishing  sex, 
namely:     1.  By  different  words;  as, 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Foot, 

Feet. 

criterion, 

criteria. 

phenomenon, 

parenthesis, 

ellipsis, 

emphasis, 

hypothesis, 

basis, 

phenomena. 

parentheses 

ellipses. 

emphases. 

hypotheses. 

bases. 

axis, 

axes. 

genius, 
radius, 

genii.f 
radii. 

Male. 

Female. 

Male. 

Female, 

Bachelor, 

Maid. 

Landlord, 

Landlady. 

beau, 

belle. 

lord, 

lady. 

boy, 

girl. 

man, 

woman. 

brother, 

sister. 

master, 

miss. 

buck, 

doe. 

master, 

mistress. 

drake, 

duck. 

nephew, 

niece. 

earl, 

countess. 

papa, 

mamma. 

father, 

mother. 

singer, 

songstress  or  singer. 

friar  or  monk, 

nun. 

sloven, 

slut. 

gander, 

goose. 

stag, 

hind. 

gentleman, 

lady. 

wizard, 

witch. 

lad, 

lass. 

*  Small  cubes  for  gaming:— die,  used  to  stamp  coin,  has  the  regular  plural  ;  as, 
die,  dies.  . 

t  Genii,  when  denoting  aerial  spirits,  gemmis  when  signifying  persons  of  genius. 

JExcept  when  different  kinds  or  varieties  are  spoken  of  ;  as,  ths  u-ines  of  Europe, 
the  teas  of  China. 


BOOK    SECOND. 


21 


2.  By  a  difference  of  termination ;  as, 

Male.  Female.  Male.  Female. 

Abbot,  Abbess.  Jew,  Jewess, 

actor,  actress.  landgrave,  landgravine, 

author,  authoress.  lion,  lioness, 

administrator,  administratrix,  margrave,  margravine, 

adulterer,  adulteress.  marquis,     ,       marchioness, 

ambassador,  ambassadress,  monitor,  monitress. 

arbiter,  arbitress.  mayor,  mayoress, 

baron,  baroness.  negro,  negress, 

bridegroom,  bride.  patron,  patroness, 

benefactor,  benefactress.  peer  peeress, 

carterer,  carteress.  poet,  poetess, 

chanter,  chantress.  priest,  priestess, 

conductor,  conductress.  prince,  princess, 

count,  countess.  prior,  prioress, 

czar,  czarina  prophet,  prophetess, 

dauphin,  dauphiness.  protector,  protectress, 

deacon,  deaconess.  shepherd,  shepherdess, 

don,  donna.  songster,  songstress, 

duke,  duchess.  sorcerer,  sorceress,   [tana, 

emperor,  empress.  sultan,  sultaness  or  sul- 

enchanter,  enchantress.  tailor,  tailoress. 

executor,  executrix.  testator,  testatrix, 

editor,  editress.  tiger,  tigress, 

giant,  giantess.  traitor,  traitoress. 

governor,  governess.  tutor,  tutoress, 

hero,  heroine.  viscount,  viscountess, 

hunter,  huntress.  votary,  votaress, 

host,  hostess.  widower,  widow, 

instructer,  instructress. 

3.  By  prefixing  some  word  indicating  sex ;  as, 
A  man-servant,  A  maid-servant.     A  male-child,  A  female-child. 
A  he-goat,  A  she-goat. 
The  same  noun  is  sometimes  masculine  and  sometimes  feminine. 
The  words  parent,  child,  cousin,  friend,  neighbor,  servant,  and  seve- 
ral others,  are  used  indifferently  for  males  and  females. 

Note.  Some  nouns,  naturally  neuter,  are,  by  a  figure  of  speech,  converted  in- 
to the  masculine  or  feminine  gender,  as  when  we  say  of  the  sun,  he  is  setting;  and 
of  a  ship,  she  sails  well.  Figuratively,  those  nouns  which  are,  by  nature,  strong 
and  powerful,  or  conspicuous  for  the  attributes  of  imparting  or  communicating, 
are  called  masculine  ;  as,  Time,  Death,  the  Sun,  &c.  Those  which  are  peculiarly 
amiable  or  beautiful,  or  conspicuous  for  the  attributes  of  containing  or  bringing 
forth,  are  called  feminine  ;  as,  Virtue,  Fortune,  Ship,  the  Earth,  the  Moon,  &c. 

Case.  When  the  possessive  singular  ends  in  es,  or  ss,  the  apos- 
trophe only  is  generally  added ;  as,  Achilles'  shield,  for  goodness' 
sake,  Moses'  rod.  Also,  in  singulars  not  ending  in  s,  which  would 
occasion  too  much  of  a  hissing  sound,  or  increase  the  difficulty 
of  pronunciation,  the  s  is  generally  omitted ;  as,  for  conscience'  sake, 
Ajax'  shield. 

Note.  When  the  letter  $,  added  as  a  sign  of  the  possessive,  will  not  coalesce 
with  the  name,  it  adds  a  syllable  ;  as,  Thomas's  bravery — pronounced  as  if  writ- 
ten Thomases ;  the  church's  property,  churches  property. 

DECLENSION  OF  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


FIRST  PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  I, 

Poss.  my  or  mine,* 
Obj.  me. 

Plu. 
Nom.  we, 
Poss.  our  or  ours, 
Obj.  us. 


SECOND   PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  thou, 
Poss.  thy  or  thine, 
Obj.  thee. 

Plu. 
Nom.  ye  or  you.f 
Poss.  your  or  yours. 
Obj.  you. 


THIRD    PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  he, 
Poss.  his, 
Obj.  him. 

Plu. 
Nom.  they, 
Poss.  their  or  theirs, 
Obj.  them. 


*  My,  thy,  your,  &c,  become  mine,  thine,  yours,  when  the  nouns  which  they  possess  are 
not  expressed ;  thus,  instead  of  saying,  this  is  my  book,  we  may  say  this  is  mine. 

t  The  pronoun  you  was  formerly  used  in  the  plural  number  only,  and  is  still  classed  as 
such  in  Murray  and  others,  but  it  is  now  generally  used  in  the  singular  number  also— the 
sense  alone  determining  the  difference  ;  as,  girls,  you  were  in  fault— or  Kate,  you  were  in 
fault. 


THIRD   PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  she, 
Poss.  her  or  hers, 
Obj.  her. 

Plu. 
Nom.  they, 
Poss.  their  or  theirs, 
Obj.  them. 


THIRD   PERSON. 

Sing. 
Nom.  it, 
Poss.  its, 
Obj.  it. 

Plu. 
Nom.  they, 
Poss.  their  or  theirs, 
Obj.  them. 


"When  the  noun  self  is  added  to  the  personal  pronouns,  as  him- 
self, myself,  itself,  themselves,  Sec,  they  are  used  indifferently  in  the 
nominative  or  objective  case,  but  have  no  possessive. 

DECLENSION  OF  THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Singular  and  Plural. 
Nom.  who,  Poss.  whose,  Obj.  whom. 

Nom.  whoever,       Poss.  whosever,  Obj.  whomever. 

Nom.  whosoever,    Poss.  whosesoever,     Obj.  whomsoever. 

Which,  what,  and  that,  are  of  both  numbers,  and  are  used  in  the  nom- 
inative or  objective  case,  but  have  no  possessive;  except  that  whose 
is  sometimes  used  as  the  possessive  of  which  ;  as,  "  The  tree  whose 
mortal  taste  brought  death."  When  the  word  ever  or  soever  is  an- 
nexed to  the  relatives,  they  are  sometimes  called  compound  relatives. 
What  is  a  kind  of  compound  relative,  including  both  the  antece- 
dent and  the  relative,  and  is  mostly  equivalent  to  that  which  ;  as, 
I  have  heard  what  has  been  alleged ;  that  is  to  say,  I  have  heard 
that  which  has  been  alleged,  or  the  thing  which,  &c.  The  word 
that  is  a  relative  pronoun  when  it  may  be  changed  into  who  or 
which,  without  destroying  the  sense;  an  adjective,  when  it  belongs 
to  a  noun  expressed  or  understood ;  and  in  all  other  places  it  is  a 
conjunction.  Which  and  what  are  sometimes  used  as  adjectives ; 
as,  which  book,  what  boy.  N.  B.  When  the  relatives  are  used 
in  asking  questions,  they  are  sometimes  called  Interrogative  Pro- 
nouns— in  which  case  they  have  no  antecedents,  but  relate  to  the 
word  which  contains  the  answer ;  as,  who  tore  my  book  ?  An- 
swer— John.     Here  who  relates  to  John. 


Positive. 

wise, 

great, 

virtuous, 

amiable, 

good, 

bad,  evil  or  ill,     worse, 

little,  less  or  lesser, 

much  or  many,    more, 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

Comparative.  Superlative. 

wiser,  wisest, 

greater,  greatest, 

more  virtuous,  most  virtuous, 

less  amiable,  least  amiable, 

better,  best, 

worst, 
least, 
most. 
f  nearest,  [referring  to  place."] 
\  next,  [in  order.] 
(  latest,  [referring  to  time.] 
\  last,  [in  order.] 
(  farthest, 
(  furthest. 

(foremost,  [in place.] 
\  first,  [in  time  or  order.] 
(  oldest,  t 
(eldest.  J 

N.  B. — Adjectives  of  more  syllables  than  one  are  generally 
compared  by  more  and  most,  or  by  less  and  least.  Adjectives  are 
regularly  compared,  when  the  comparative  degree  is  formed  by  the 
addition  of  r  or  er,  and  the  superlative  by  st  or  est ;  or  by  prefix- 
ing more  and  most,  or  less  and  least.  Some  adjectives  form  the  su- 
perlative by  the  suffix  of  most:  as  hind,  hinder,  hindermost,  or 

*  Farther,  seems  to  take  precedence  in  modern  use, 
t  Applied  to  persons  or  things. 
X  Applied  to  persons  only. 


late, 
far, 
fore, 
old, 


nearer, 

later, 

C  farther,* 
\  further, 

former, 

(  older, 
(  elder, 


22 


BOOK    SECOND. 


hindmost ;  up,  upper,  uppermost  or  upmost ;  in,  inner,  innermost  or 
inmost ;  nether,  nethermost.  An  imperfect  degree  (less  than  the  com- 
parative) is  expressed  by  the  ending  ish :  as,  blackish,  saltish,  &c. 

A  LIST  OF  THE  PRONOMINAL  ADJECTIVES. 
One,  other,  another,  each,  every,  either,  neither,  this,  that,  these, 
those,  all,  any,  both,  same,  such,  some,  former,  latter,  none.     Of 
these,  one  and  other  are  declined  the  same  as  nouns.     Thus : 

Singular.  Plural.  Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.  one  Nom.  ones  Norn,  other  Nom.  others 

Pos.   one's  Pos.   ones'  Pos.   other's  Pos.  others' 

Obj.   one.  Obj.   ones.  Obj.  other.  Obj.  others. 

Another  is  declined  in  the  same  manner,  but  wants  the  plural. 
Former  and  latter  have  sometimes  a  possessive  case  ;  as,  "  The 
former's  phlegm,  was  a  check  upon  the  latter's  vivacity." 

AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

Auxiliary  or  helping  verbs,  are  those  by  the  help  of  which  the 
English  verbs  are  principally  conjugated.  Those  which  are  al- 
ways auxiliaries,  are  may,  can,  must,  might,  could,  would,  should  and 
shall.  Those  which  are  sometimes  auxiliaries,  and  sometimes  prin- 
cipal verbs,  are  do,  be,  have  and  will.  A  transitive  or  an  intransitive 
verb  may  be  conjugated  differently  from  the  usual  manner,  by  ad- 
ding its  present  participle  to  the  auxiliary  verb  be,  through  all  the 
moods  and  tenses  ;  as,  instead  of,  I  write,  I  wrote,  I  have  written, 
&c,  we  may  say,  I  am  writing,  I  was  writing,  I  have  been  writing, 
&c.  This  is  called  the  tense  definite  ;  as  it  marks  the  time  with 
more  precision  than  the  tense  indefinite.     [The  usual  method.] 

When  a  verb  of  the  indicative  mood  is  used  in  the  sacred  or 
solemn  style,  the  ending  of  the  third  person  singular,  present  time, 
is  ever  in  th  ;  as,  He  loveth,  &c.  The  verb  to  be  is  an  exception. 
Hath  and  doth  are  also  used  in  the  sacred  or  solemn  style,  instead 
of  has  and  does  ;  as,  He  hath  written,  he  doth  love. 

Ought,  quoth  and  several  others,  as  well  as  all  the  auxiliaries, 
are  defective  verbs ;  because  they  cannot  be  conjugated  through 
all  the  moods  and  tenses. 

Participles  have  no  nominative,  number,  nor  person.  Ex- 
amples of  the  present  participle. — I  heard  a  lady  singing :  Know- 
ing him  to  be  in  fault,  I  rebuked  him.  Examples  of  the  past  or 
perfect  participle :  "  Words  fitly  spoken  are  like  apples  of  gold,"  &c 
Having  finished  his  work,  he  submitted  it. 

A  LIST  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  ADVERBS. 

Of  number.     Once,  twice,  thrice,  &c. 

Of  order.  First,  secondly,  thirdly,  fourthly,  fifthly,  lastly,  fi- 
nally, &c. 

Of  place.  Here,  there,  where,  elsewhere,  anywhere,  some- 
where, nowhere,  herein,  whither,  hither,  thither,  upward, 
downward,  forward,  backward,  whence,  hence,  thence, 
whithersoever,  &c. 

Of  time. 

Of  time  present.     Now,  to-day,  &c. 

Of  time  past.  Already,  before,  lately,  yesterday,  heretofore, 
hitherto,  long  since,  long  ago,  &c. 

Of  time  to  come.  To-morrow,  not  yet,  hereafter,  hencefor- 
ward, by  and  by,  instantly,  presently,  immediately,  straight- 
way, &c. 

Of  time  indefinite.  Oft,  often,  oft-times,  oftentimes,  some- 
times, soon,  seldom,  daily,  weekly,  monthly,  yearly,  al- 
ways, when,  then,  ever,  never,  again,  &c. 

Of  quantity.  Much,  little,  sufficiently,  how  much,  how  great, 
enough,  abundantly,  &c. 

Of  manner  or  quality.  Wisely,  foolishly,  justly,  unjustly, 
quickly,  slowly,  &c.  Adverbs  of  quality  are  the  most 
numerous  kind  ;  and  they  are  generally  formed  by  adding 
the  termination  ly  to  an  adjective  or  participle,  or  changing 
le  into  ly  ;  as  bad,  badly ;  cheerful,  cheerfully  ;  able,  ably; 
admirable,  admirably. 


4. 


7.  Of  doubU    Perhaps,  peradventure,  possibly,  perchancei 

8.  Of  affirmation.   Verily,  truly,  undoubtedly,  doubtless,  certain- 

ly, yea,  yes,  surely,  indeed,  really,  &c. 

9.  Of  negation.     Nay,  no,  not,  by  no  means,  not  at  all,  in  no 

wise,  &c. 

10.  Of  interrogation.     How,  why,  wherefore,  whether,  &c. 

11.  Of  comparison.     More,  most,  better,  best,  worse,  worst,  less, 

least,  very,  almost,  little,  alike,  &c. 


of 

to 

for 

by 

with 

in 


LIST  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  PREPOSITIONS. 

into 

within 

without 

over 

under 


above 

below 

between 

beneath 

from 


at 

up 

down 

before 

behind 


through 


on  or  upon 

among 

after 

about 

against. 


beyond 
A  LIST  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  CONJUNCTIONS. 

And,  *  if,  that,  both,  then,  since,  for,  because,  therefore,  where- 
fore. 

But,  or,  nor,  as,  than,  lest,  though,  unless,  either,  neither,  yet, 
notwithstanding. 

REMARKS. 

Sometimes  verbs,  nouns  and  adjectives  are  used  as  interjections ; 
i.  e.  are  uttered  by  way  of  exclamation,  in  a  detached  manner ;  as, 
bless  me  I  gracious  heavens  !  &c. 

Note. — The  noun  and  verb  are  the  two  principal  parts  of  speech ;  that  is  to  say, 
all  other  words  are  dependent  on  them,  or  added  to  them  as  auxiliaries.  No  com- 
plete sentence  can  be  formed  without  the  use  of  both,  expressed  or  understood, 
unless  when  a  pronoun  is  used  for  a  noun.  The  same  word,  differently  situated 
or  applied,  often  becomes  a  different  part  of  speech ;  as,  I  have  a  book— I  book  Ten 
Dollars  a  day.  *■• 

Derivation  is  when  one  word  is  derived  from  another  ;  as,  from  the  noun  wealth 
comes  wealthy,  from  the  verb  to  love  comes  lover,  &c. 

Declension  is  the  variation  of  nouns  and  pronouns —  Conjugation  is  the  variation 
of  verbs. 

A  CATALOGUE  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect  Part. 

Abide, 

abode, 

abode. 

Am, 

was, 

been. 

Arise, 

arose, 

arisen. 

Awake, 

awoke,  R. 

awaked. 

Bear,  to  bring  forth, 

bore, 

born. 

Bear,  to  carry, 

bore, 

borne. 

Beat, 

beat, 

beaten,  or  beat. 

Begin, 

began, 

begun. 

Bend, 

bent,  r. 

bent,  R. 

Bereave, 

-bereft,  R. 

bereft,  r. 

Beseech, 

besought, 

besought. 

Bid, 

bid,  or  bade, 

bidden,  or  bid. 

Bind, 

bound, 

bound. 

Bite, 

bit, 

bitten,  or  bit. 

Bleed, 

bled, 

bled. 

Blow, 

blew,  r. 

blown,  R. 

Break, 

broke, 

broken. 

Breed, 

bred, 

bred. 

Bring, 

brought, 

brought. 

Build, 

built,  R. 

built,  R. 

Burst, 

burst, 

burst. 

Buy, 

bought, 

bought. 

Cast, 

cast, 

cast 

Catch, 

caught,  R. 

caught,  R. 

Chide, 

chid, 

chidden,  or  chid. 

Choose, 

chose, 

chosen. 

Cleave,  to  stick 

or") 

adhere, 

REGULAR. 

*  Those  in  the  first  division,  are  generally  called 

Copulative,  and  those  in  the  second, 

Disjunctive  conjunctions. 

BOOK    SECOND. 

23 

PRESENT. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect  Part. 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect  Part. 

Cleave,  to  split, 

cleft, 

cleft,  or  cloven. 

Meet, 

met, 

met. 

Cling, 

clung. 

clung. 

Mow, 

mowed, 

mowed,  or  mown. 

Clothe, 

clothed, 

clothed,  or  clad. 

Pay, 

paid, 

paid. 

Come, 

came, 

come. 

Put, 

put, 

put. 

Cost, 

cost, 

cost. 

Quit, 

quitted,  or  quit, 

quitted,  or  quit. 

Crow, 

crowed,  or  crew, 

crowed. 

Read, 

read, 

read. 

Creep, 

crept, 

crept. 

Rend, 

rent, 

rent. 

Cut, 

cut, 

cut. 

Rid, 

rid, 

rid. 

Dare,  to  venture, 

durst, 

dared. 

Ride, 

rode, 

rode  or  ridden. 

Dare,  to  challenge^ 

R. 

Ring, 

rung,  or  rang, 

rung. 

Deal, 

dealt,  R. 

dealt,  R. 

Rise, 

rose, 

risen. 

Dig, 

dug,  R. 

dug,  R. 

Rive, 

rived, 

rived,  or  riven. 

Do, 

did, 

done. 

Run, 

ran,  or  run, 

run. 

Draw, 

drew, 

drawn. 

Saw, 

sawed, 

sawed,  or  sawn. 

Dream, 

dreampt,  R. 

dreampt,  R. 

Say, 

said, 

said. 

Drive, 

drove, 

driven. 

See, 

saw, 

seen. 

Drink, 

drank, 

drunk.* 

Seek, 

sought,                 , 

sought. 

DweU, 

dwelt,  R. 

dwelt,  R. 

Sell, 

sold, 

sold. 

Eat, 

ate,  or  eat, 

eaten. 

Send, 

sent, 

sent. 

Fall, 

fell, 

fallen. 

Set, 

set, 

set. 

Feed, 

fed, 

fed. 

Shake, 

shook, 

shaken. 

Feel, 

felt, 

felt. 

Shape, 

shaped, 

shaped,  or  shapen. 

Fight, 

fought, 

fought. 

Shave, 

shaved, 

shaved,  or  shaven, 

Find, 

found, 

found. 

Shear, 

sheared, 

sheared,  or  shorn. 

Flee, 

fled, 

fled. 

Shed, 

shed, 

shed. 

Fling, 

flung, 

flung. 

Shine, 

shone,  R. 

shone,  R. 

Fly, 

flew, 

flown. 

Show, 

showed, 

shown,  R. 

Forget, 

forgot, 

forgotten,  or  forgot. 

Shoe, 

shod, 

shod. 

Forsake, 

forsook, 

forsaken. 

Shoot, 

shot, 

shot. 

Freeze, 

froze, 

frozen. 

Shrink, 

shrunk, 

shrunk. 

Get, 

got, 

got. 

Shred, 

shred, 

shred. 

Gild, 

gilt,  R. 

gilt,  R. 

Shut, 

shut, 

shut. 

Gird, 

girded,  or  girt, 

girded,  or  girt. 

Sing, 

sung,  or  sang, 

sung. 

Give, 

gave, 

given. 

Sink, 

sunk,  or  sank, 

sunk. 

Go, 

went, 

gone. 

Sit, 

sat, 

sat. 

Grave, 

graved, 

graven,  r. 

Slay, 

slew, 

slain. 

Grind, 

ground, 

ground. 

Sleep, 

slept, 

slept. 

Grow, 

grew, 

grown. 

Slide, 

slid, 

slidden,  or  slid. 

Have, 

had, 

had. 

Sling, 

slung, 

slung. 

Hang, 

hung,  R. 

hung,  R. 

Slink, 

slunk, 

slunk. 

Hear, 

heard, 

heard. 

Slit, 

slit,  R. 

slit,  R. 

Heave, 

heaved,  or  hove, 

heaved. 

Smite, 

smote, 

smitten. 

Hew, 

hewed, 

hewed,  or  hewn. 

Sow,  ||  to  scatter, 

sowed, 

sowed,  or  sown. 

Hide, 

hid, 

hidden,  or  hid. 

Speak, 

spoke, 

spoken. 

Hit, 

hit, 

hit. 

Speed, 

sped, 

sped. 

Hold, 

held, 

held,  or  holden. 

Spend, 

spent, 

spent. 

Hurt, 

hurt, 

hurt. 

Spill, 

spilt,  R. 

spilt,  R. 

Keep, 

kept, 

kept. 

Spin, 

spun, 

spun. 

Kneel, 

kneeled,  or  knelt, 

kneeled,  or  knelt. 

Spit, 

spit 

spit. 

Knit, 

knit,  r. 

knit,  R. 

Split, 

split, 

split, 

Know, 

knew, 

known. 

Spread, 

spread, 

spread. 

Lade,f  to  load, 

laded, 

laden. 

Spring, 

sprung,  or  sprang, 

sprung. 

Lay,  to  place, 

laid, 

laid, 

Stand, 

stood, 

stood. 

Lead, 

led, 

led. 

Steal, 

stole, 

stolen. 

Leave, 

left. 

left. 

Stick, 

stuck, 

stuck. 

Lend, 

lent, 

lent. 

Sting, 

stung, 

stung. 

Let, 

let, 

let. 

Stink, 

stunk, 

stunk. 

Lie,J  to  lie  down, 

lay, 

lain. 

Stride, 

strode,  or  strid, 

stridden,  or  strid. 

Light, 

lighted,  or  lit, 

lighted,  or  lit. 

Strike, 

struck, 

struck,  or  stricken, 

Load,  REGULAR. 

String, 

strung, 

strung. 

Lose, 

lost, 

lost. 

Strive, 

strove,  R. 

striven,  r. 

Make, 

made, 

made. 

Strow, 

strowed, 

strowed,  or  strown. 

Mean, 

meant, 

meant. 

Strew,  REGULAR. 

Swear, 

Sweat, 

*  Drunk,  is  also  frequently  used  as  an  adjective ; 

as,  he  is  drunk,  \ intoxicated.] 

swore, 
sweat,  r. 

sworn, 
sweat,  R. 

Other  words,  nearly  o 
cloven,  holden,  stricken, 

•  quite  obsolete  as  participles,  are  often  used  as  adjectives  as, 
molten,  drunken,  beholden,  bounden,  <fc. 

t  Lade,  to  dip,  is  rej 

jular. 

%  Lie,  to  deceive,  is  regular. 

H  Sew,  [  so,  ]  to  stitch,  is  regular. 

24 


BOOK    SECOND. 


Present. 

Sweep, 

Swell, 

Swim, 

Swing, 

Take, 

Teach, 

Tear, 

Tell, 

Think, 

Thrive, 

Throw, 

Thrust, 

Tread, 

Wax,  REGULAR. 

Wear, 

Weave, 

Weep, 

Wet, 

Win, 

Wind, 

Work, 

Wring, 

Write, 


Imperfect. 
swept, 
swelled, 

swum,  or  swam, 
swung, 
took, 
taught, 
tore, 
told, 
thought, 

thrived,  or  throve, 
threw, 
thrust, 
trod, 

wore, 

wove, 

wept, 

wet,  r. 

won, 

wound, 


Perfect  Part. 
swept. 

swelled,  or  swollen, 
swum, 
swung, 
taken, 
taught, 
torn, 
told, 
thought. 

thrived,  or  thriven, 
thrown, 
thrust, 
trodden,  or  trod. 

worn. 

woven. 

wept. 

wet,  r, 

won. 

wound. 


worked,  or  wrought,    worked,  or  wrought, 
wrung,  R.  wrung,  R. 

wrote,  written. 


Those  verbs  which  are  conjugated  regularly,  as  well  as  irregu- 
larly, are  marked  with  an  r.  Those  verbs  and  participles  which 
are  the  first  mentioned  in  the  list  seem  to  be  the  most  eligible. 
N.  B.  Those  verbs  which  are  irregular  only  in  familiar  writing 
and  discourse,  and  which  are  improperly  terminated  by  t,  instead 


of  ed,  are  not  inserted.  Of  this  class  are  such  as  learnt,  spelt,  latcht, 
Sfc,  the  use  of  which  termination  should  be  carefully  avoided  in 
every  soft  of  composition,  and  even  in  pronunciation.  These  how- 
ever must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  those  necessary  and  al- 
lowable contractions,  which  are  the  only  established  forms  of  ex- 
pression ;  such  as  dwelt,  lost,  felt,  fyc.  Words  that  are  obsolete 
have  also  been  omitted ;  such  as  holpen,  drunken,  gat,  swang,  SfC. 

CONJUGATION. 

Conjugation  is  the  variation  of  verbs,  or  their  inflection  in  all 
the  moods,  tenses,  numbers  and  persons.  See  pages  25,  26,  27 
and  28. 

Remarks,  with  regard  to  the  conjugation  of  verbs,  SfC. 

Verbs  are  sometimes  conjugated,  in  part,  by  the  help  of  the  aux- 
iliary do : — thus,  instead  of  saying,  I  learn,  thou  learnest,  he  learns, 
&c,  we  may  say,  I  do  learn,  thou  dost  learn,  he  does  learn, — I  did 
learn,  thou  didst  learn,  &c.  The  same  in  the  subjunctive  mood, 
omitting  the  personal  termination  of  do  in  the  present  tense ;  as,  if 
I  do  learn,  if  thou  do  learn,  if  he  do  learn. 

Verbs  may  also  be  conjugated  interrogatively,  as  well  as  qffirma- 
atively ;  as,  do  I  learn  ?  dost  thou  learn  ?■  does  he  learn  ?  did  I 
learn  ?  didst  thou  learn  ?  has  he  learned  ?  will  he  learn  ?  canst  thou 
learn  ?  must  I  learn  ?  &c.  They  may  likewise  be  conjugated  neg- 
atively ;  as,  I  do  not  learn,  I  have  not  learned,  I  cannot  learn,  I  will 
not  learn,  &c. 

Pronouns. — The  pronouns  thou  and  ye  are  used  in  the  sacred 
or  solemn  style,  and  you  in  common  or  familiar  style. 

N.  B.  The  pronoun  you  should  never  be  applied  to  the  Supreme 
Being. 


- 
«  _ 

-   j 


I 


! 


-     = 


- 


I 


i 

a 


~  5 


-        :        : 


:  = :  : 

;  _  —     —  -  — 

=  51  IJ 


-= 

I" 
= 


_ 


- 


x  s  «  a 


£J1  = 


7 

— 
I 


-  3r  -=  -= 


=  :  f        1  -  - 


X     - 


:  : 

-     __      : 


■hi                   ?      .£    -  -.  .= 

i       —  >       —  — 

-     -    J:  J  J     -  *  *  J 

_  -  Z           ^>-r-  — r-—  ^*-r- 


*    5  -  ~  ; 

-     [  t     .  - 


^      - 


-  -  = 


i  = 


$  :~ 


M 


S 

a 


ft 
o 

"© 

IB 

o 

-M 

-  © 

•*sl 

W 

> 
i— i 

»© 

H 

© 

O 

B 

*a 

fca 

© 

*-5 

►2 

M> 

© 

1 


ft  .a  t> 

s    9 


©  .—5 

■51 

l»-sj 

©• 

ed, 

r  will  have 
have  loved 

number. 

have  had, 
ave  had. 

*W 

r  will  have 
have  had. 

c 

£ 

s 

e  lov 
all  o 
will 

iad, 
wilt 

iiih 

5. 
5 

e  ha 
alio 
will 

•t>  -c    J. 

ti—  k  f 

>  -3    5- 

~© 

os  _ 

Iha 
ou  s 
alio 

Jj     51     O 

•*  ■8fl' 
p— i    o  'a 

-sn 

a    ^-^ 

—    r=    ^ 

'cs    ^-=5 

-sV-^ 

15i 

J    5s    «° 

P      02 

co    <a    {s-, 

M    o    >» 

«  * 

*  o-JS 
F    i>^ 

^2o 

«o2 

'-t->    rfl 

1— 1  +2  ^ 

F  >^ 

i>  '"3 
O    © 

"-1    t> 


J        ©  « 
a        >  ^ 

a      ^  t> 

a  -0 
©s  qj 
•S    > 


a    o^ 


cS 

-a  »  cs 


I    I  f—s     3. 


©  a 
>•   © 

© 

> 
cS 

-5 

cj    © 

,a  -a 

— C      © 

fc>    r--'Q 

3 

it3 

V 

en, 
r  wii 
hay 

s  >  % 

© 

o 

St 

> 
d 

03 

3 

a 

5s 

«l 

©    ©  33 

-J3. 

Js 

V 

i — 1 

D    C3    ^ 

? 

^ 

I 

P 

!>  -a  v. 

Sing 
I  have 
halt  or 

all  ha 
you  s 
hall  o 

5s 

5 

Is 

CO 

B 
0 

•a  '*.  ^ 

M     ©     i^ 

,-3  2 
»  2 

1— 1  +3 

To 

5s      . 

OJ     > 
>-,  O 

7j 

1   £>£ 

© 

F. 

S|_(    SsH    s*_| 

<«  5h  5h 

«4-i   «»_ 

Cm 

HHH 

1— 1   1— t 

1— 1 

M 

r— I 

H 

w  S  aTrS  » 
P   5s    g   I;   f 

H     C  ^>    5. 

.a  =3    to    cS 

CO  ^6  rTJ    s  'S 
w         m    2    CD 


OS   S 


a   cs 


■ri.fe* 


O 

.♦      -   o3    © 

^03-3 

a  s  ^  ra 
1 5 :  *  ^ 

S3     ^  5. 

"2     5s    +2     C> 

t>j  ^a  a  x 


© 


P-, 


■a  cs 


^c>     ^  ^   © 

8      ©    ~    rO 

a=      - 

5s     S-     O     ^ 
'S      S-r-      O 

C    «    03  __ 

a  as   S   ea 


<T3    >    > 


"S  ra5      i%a  i— i  i — ! 


o      as 


o 


© 


rf  =3  as 


j  os 


>  ►   -a 

s+_|    C+h    s(_( 


(S     >s,  o  ^ 


1 


>  2 


M    is© 


>      . 


*..> 


SO 


^  s^h    C^    C+^ 


a  ^ 

1=1    OS 

03       3    r3 


■s  ©  3  fe 

s 

b  o  3" 

a    „ 

■s  — '  o  r2 

2s,  ^  t^S 

'Ji*ti 

^^ 

|g,l 

^S 

T3 

03 

T3 

nri 

T1 

^a 

3  ^3 

r3      ° 


T3 
cS 

5s 

© 

© 

V3   r£ 
fd     © 

r3 

ngular  numhe 
iad  been, 
)u  hadst  been 
had  been. 

^2 

n3-    . 
OS  ra 

r=i      03 

Plural. 

had  been, 

or  you  had 

5  j  had  been 

Ss      © 

e  © 

F  ^a 


^21  J 


F  w 


^ 


».    sU 

ra     © 

O  na 
"^    cS 

© 

a 

p 

na  ^> 

03    . 

«   ©   >   2 


I* 


© 

(3 
© 
© 

OS 
s^3 


^  © 
H2    t* 


©    P    > 

>  t  .2 


H    5s    O 
O  isS 

en 

2 

o 

5s 

© 

3  i5 

td  ^    © 

-1. 

F 

>~»1 1 

s  ©> 

©  ^a 

rC 

© 

.      2  -m    oS    5s  '    ' 

^S     ©  -S     ro  Q~     ^ 

5s  oe  a  ",fl      -^ 
;5  -^  2  ©       « 


cS 

©    .• 

T3     03     cS 

ra 


a  © 

o    > 
!>»  03 


5^ 
|) 

.'S  ^  ©  . 

a  a  ©  a 

a  ©  ^  © 

«  ©  ^  © 

si'  oS 

^  ^  Ja  2 

sn  e+H  si-. 


a 
© 
© 

^   a 

s  ^  © 

t -="  © 

s.S        ©        5        > 


© 


y     03 
?      ©      2 

F    ^^ 


5.     _ 

S?     >     O 

1SJS 

5s      r^     ^_      -3 

53  jo  rW 

|i:§ 

^m  al  ^ 


na   ©  nrj 

©   >■   © 

> 

a 


:J  a 

!    3-3 


a  > 


e  © 

5s    rO 

«?      © 
^s>        JT 

Ri  ss 

© 
I 


o  •> 

>>        oS 

©  ©        >s, 

®  a    2 

C+s    s(_i  sj_| 

MM  M 


o 


H    a 

S  co 

"  a  ©  f-h  t> 

|  Is!  §.2 
I^mI^ 


id 
O 

•^      ^2    . 

'ft,      >  r2 

^    O    ~  M 

"-1    ©    P>» 
C3     ©     2 

K+3 


s,_i  sw    C+h    sfs| 

M  M  M  M 


^M 


^'S 


— *  ©  >-» 
Sf  «  2 
F  ^t: 


!3  ©    © 

"a  P  ■*  © 

S5  S  3  F 
.a  fe  o 
J-s       .a  *> 

^  M  ^  -3 


ft, 


>  T3 
O    © 


F   ^: 


*5    © 
©i  © 


^  S 


CO  s© 

H    I 

H  a 

H    5s 

w  s 
w  ^ 


© 

©    I— c 

>   a 
^  o 

r3 


<4JCHCU 

M  M  M 


A    ©    >, 

©  ©2 


HNCO  '  1— I  <N  CO 

•aAO^j  ox 


S 


> 

0 

© 

r3 

03 

£1 

a 
c 

3   © 

o    > 


_*    s|_,    C+_(  C+-,    s^    C+h 

-(MM  M  M  M 

■5  oj  co  rH  oi  CO 


s 

^2 

s 

is!         3 

©■          O     . 

<■»         <a 

*-     ^  >»  2 

5s           ^5       . 

a  oT  P^s 

©       v,             © 
13      ©      3    rQ 

litis 

we  b 
ye  or 
they 

Jys    s(_,    sw   «4-l 

^J  HH  M  M 

CiM     S+—     ClM 

M  M  M 

(N  CO 

•aa  ox 


a  ©  — ■  t> 

b  $ 

h2     ©     3  ^2 

Ss^   J     « 


.  ,  oa 

^i  £ 

—'   F   © 

S  §  S 

£    k>F 
©  ^  © 

F    k^« 

S.CmCh 


© 
F 


T3 
© 

O   rig 

©  s. 

&  o 
3  ^ 
o   © 

^§? 
^^ 

«*-  Ch 


rH  CM  CO  HNM 

•aaAOi  aa  °X 


p 

» 

o 

<a 

r-O 

o 

© 

M 

a 

3 

t-3 

aT 

-al 

© 

1— 1 

H 

4) 

s 

{zq 

><; 

© 

w 

■*o 

H 

O 

© 

P 

CO 

w      ^  *r 


&     _ 


2  ^ 
3  3 


2 


P 
O 

43 


s  £  s  s 

$43  J  43 
>   3       'a 


Q)      ^ 


*s2 


1 


H 

4^ 


3/3  ft 


% 8 

O  'Si  > 

«  .X,    O 


©^ 
3,2 


.SPg  § 

aj~ 


o  .=« 


2  "3 
2  To 

A 

B  ^  > 

°    o 


*©    3 

S  2 

5-     © 


S   5 

3     ^ 

43     co 


3    ~ 

O  ns 
43  -3 


a  a 

cd  o 

2  -3 

rQ  CO 


43    — < 

s  a 

2  o 

4=  ,3 

, |       .0 

^2      *s 


■ 

43 


r©    3  -3 

a  o  3 


►3  ^ 


J  CO  Is©    r3 


^   a   « 

CD         TJ 

3    co    o 
•— J-3    « 

O      Js 


S3  tJ 


2  a 

>     CD 

3  0) 

-"  b-3-° 
«"2  £ 

ill  2^ 
r—  l_i  M  'a 

r3  Js    's 

3        ©  o 
2         -.a 

*2         "^3    co 


©    « 


— T'a  3  CL 


2  i? 


^  * 


^22 

p  J_r       "tT      S    O    O 


»"3        2 


-3 
Ml 
"2 


3    LTi    T    CJ 


2  to 


°  p. 


a  cq 


2  2- 

r*9  — 


-a 


T5  CD  .« 

^c=  I 'a 


e^ 


#  3  fe 


cd  _c:i 


H      W      £ 


»  a-   « 

•-c  >>  a  a 

a  ^  s  . 

W    C5    CD    >> 

«^  O      O 


^  2 
1  s 

*i  o 

J  p 

^3     . 


Ktf 


i   ^ 


IS  n3 

si 

a  fe 
o  ^ 

■s  2 
Tc3 


■S-T3  H   tens 

pS     o  •"    CD 

fca  >  a  a  > 
m      HS, 


.XWra 


§^° 


1 ,« -a 


CD     O 


CD 
i> 
O      . 

^  CD    CD 

a  $5  o  «  o 

CO  ,<J     >   — i 

£  s  cd  a  a 

H     Ss     5    "   ^ 

a*  *>  °  a 

n  .s  a 

w  ;~  a 


5 


c3    O 
V     CD      ^ 

«>    ^  a 
a 

o 


it=  a 

2    2    a 


S  Ji2 

2  "5  « 

i  Si  af 

;  +j  5   s 
:  co        a 

a  S  S 

cs  a  „ 

"a  j? 

j?^a 

a  J5  >, 


3 


>   o 


fc:    ^   a  i— t 

a  <s   o   3 

H   8  -a  o 

3  ■  ► 

H    a    c$     ^ 

£  »H  2  ^ 

fi    S     3    3 
Ph  -S    ^    « 


-i. 

3    '*"' 

To  s 


2^ 

§^ 
St 


-  to 

CD  •« 

>  a 


S  21! 
2  f  o 

CO    r— I       Js 

.  3      <=> 

'    k    O      „ 

-  ^  2 
r3~r-rr3 
T3  2  o 

sab. 

o  a  ? 

>•  °    ^ 

"  °2 
-a  -a  o 

3    fcC  o 

8aV 
2^  §  f 

.a°^a 
a  is  >, 


« 

s 

<l 

» 

p 

w 

^J 

H 

^ 

H 

1. 

R 

4^ 

s 

on 

W 

« 

rH 

< 

CO     a; 

4)    -    »: 

>  a  2 

2  v.  ^ 

O      CO 

3  to  a 
as. 

°~-  s 

r<      »     » 

3  >" 


Bi 


a 
-  a 

aJ 


CD    co    g 

^^  r1  co 

.'18.8 

iaik 

!    k    »    ° 

§3° 

£22 
cs  ^  a 

a  s* 


O     b 


V 


-a 

<D  1-3 

1    2~  CD 

S  o  s  i 


CD  nS 

a  «  j 
«  .a 


^  r  I 


a    °i 


CO      > 

s  2 

a  ^ 


°.  a  ^ 

^2  a 
ai  o 


3    g'fl 

2  S  cs 

pT  a  3 
a  a  ° 

°  3  >; 

>->2  2 

«  ^  a 


a>   c    3 


.  ^-  rt  ^ 
*!   c   a   23 

g  cd i  -a  ^ 

r<5      CD    u 

S   ;j   §   rt-s 

s  >  a  ^3  ^ 

f  5  ^  '£  % 

S    co   ^_>    3  ^ 

Iff* 


2i^ 

^a^ 

a"3  a 

a2  « 


CD 
O 

rS  I 

C     2     CD 

Sa-° 
£  3  a 

2  a^ 

'S      r,      CO 

*j    O    3 
02      ^3 

g  s  a 

a  3  v. 

H   o   o 
*■»     ^   ^ 

j.  c»  a 

a  3  cd 
a  a 

°    a     r*» 

cf^a 
a  ^  ►. 

£  5 1 


CD 
CD 

~rO 

CD    CD 

2  a 

a 


O  CD  ■— i 

1-1  >  a 

3  2  ^ 

CD  r3  CD 


5     U3 

Mi     CD 

S  -a 


1!  3 

S  "So 

^  a 

-*  a 


2  tc 


QQ 


►, 


8  « 

b;  a 


3 

-a 


-  a  h3 


£3      1 

CD    3  ^r 

3    -^  g . 

O    o> 

^  -a 
H 


o 


'S  ^^j. 

sas 


> 

3 

2 


►5     3 


S  2 


_  a 

.3    O 

is 


►2?    -J£  a5 

^?  *3  ^  3 

5jj  3    3  te 
•s  °  2 


i0 


tf  a  cd'. ^ 
Up  -a  a  '2 


a^ 


33 


.  "^    CD 
CD  H3    > 

>■  2  2 

2  §  -s 

'S  r3  r3 

.  *»  3  ° 

1    2    r-"3 

>    3  p—    o 

i  o  3  £ 
2"§  w 

ba.  ^  -S 


d 


-3    ^^ 

43  *.  -a 
^'2^2 
s  o  2  ^3 

5?  -S  3  . 
H  ro  O  o 
s    *»    fe     ^ 

*  °    -2 

|^§2    P 
n3"^2 

rS      CO      O 

3  a  « 
8  2d^- 

a  a  be 

2°  2  a 

a  J  cd 


u  2  2 

43^32 

^  ^  2 

3     --S 

O  1-3    co 


CS    °    Is  r3 

s  ta,|-3T  3 
^  2  3  ^ 


42    3 


•— •    oa        ^ 

2  ^       -a 

a 
o 
a 


41  ?a 


-s  3 

co    O 

b  is 


5? 


o 

*  "  2~ 
•^2  3 
3.5P8 

2^o  2° 

to  r-.  a 
'a  %  ^> 

■®    03^ 


s  2  2 
&i§2 

S    >.    o 


2  s 

3  r^ 

2 


P= 


8 -a 

w 


fcfi  3    > 

•a  o  o 
a  -a  -1 


3    v. 
42°. 

CO    rQ 

v.  2 

o   o 

'a    _ 
.22 

H    2    3 

1  ^  8 

it 

li 

2    s 

3  p«) 
a  fe  cS 


a 
o 

r3 


CD 
> 

3 

r3 

J|a2 

g    r3       K     +J 

1  «  °  2 

'5    co     ^3 
J3    n    3    - 


3  2 

s  t. 

1-1    co 
k    3 

°.a 


B 


«jj  °  *r  s 


a 

a 

2  2  « 


~  ^  s 

a  l?  3 

3  a  w 
»-  a  ^» 

>»  O    3 

CD  J 


S 


^        a  cd 

r§  2?a^ 

if  ?5 « 

s  to    °    3 

.  a  m  s 
s  a  S  *■ 

5*s   .s  +r  s 
s  a  s°  Si 

^a  Is* 
3  g  a 

a  Q  - 


3     CD 

a^ 


2  s  s 
a  3  v 


e;^ 


hHK 


^2 
3  3 

a  a  2j 

°.a  S 

5-^a 
a  ^  t>s 

CO  13 

tSr    ^    -S 


> 

a 

O 

V 

?-. 

V 

43 

B 

0 

=T 

4= 

CO 

8 

+> 

/ 

a 

^* 

3 

3 

3 

CD 

J* 

3 

O 

i 

2 


5M     , 

.«  a 


^  2 


Bq 


3  3 

»  a. 


3       r>» 

CD    C3 


w    3 


a  2 ,2  rt-» 


O    «3 
43  r2  ,3 

H 


•aAo.i  ox 


1— I  CM  CO  H  (N  CO 

•aAVH  ox 


<M  CO 

•ag 


OX 


M  CO  H(N  CO 

•aaAoq;  aa  ox 


28 


BOOK    SECOND. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Conjugation  of  the  verbs  to  love,  to  have,  to  he,  and  to  be  loved,  m 
the  Infinitive  Mood. 


PRESENT    TENSE, 


«3  To  love. 
| 

o 

H 


PARTICIPLE. 


Present.     Loving. 


PRESENT  TENSE. 

4  To  have. 
§ 

m  PARTICIPLE. 

g-t  Present.     Having. 


PRESENT   TENSE. 

To  be. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present.     Being. 


|  PRESENT   TENSE. 

^  To  be  loved. 

a 

O  .     PARTICIPLE, 

**  Present.     Being  loved. 


PERFECT     TENSE. 

To  have  loved. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Perfect.     Loved. 
Compound  Perfect.     Having 
loved. 


PERFECT  TENSE, 

To  have  had. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Perfect.     Had. 

Compound  Perfect.  Having  had. 


PERFECT   TENSE, 

To  have  been. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Perfect.     Been. 
Compound  Perfect.     Having 
been. 

PERFECT   TENSE. 

To  have  been  loved. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Perfect.     Loved. 
Compound  Perfect.      Having 
been  loved. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Conjugation  of  the  verbs  to  love,  to  have1  to  be,  and  to  be  loved,  in 
the  Imperative  Mood. 

PRESENT    TENSE. 

®  Singular  number. 

o    2.     Love,  love  thour  or  do  thou  love. 

E-t  Plural. 

2.    Love,  love  ye  or  you,  or  do  ye  or  you  love. 


Singular  number. 
&  2.  Have,  have  thou,  or  do  thou  have. 
■ 

^  Plural. 

g-t    2.     Have,  have  ye  or  you,  or  do  ye  or  you  have. 


Singular  number. 
2.     Be,  be  thou,  or  do  thou  be. 

6 

W  Plural. 

g$    2.     Be,  be  ye  or  you,  or  do  ye  or  you  be. 


h3  Singular  number. 

£  2.     Be  loved,  be  thou  loved,  or  do  thou  be  loved. 
o  Plural. 

**  2.     Be  loved,  be  ye  or  you  loved,  or  do  ye  or  you  be  loved. 


RULES  OF  SYNTAX. 


RULE  1, 

The  subject  of  the  verb  must  always  be  in  the  nominative  case ; 
as,  /  love ;  we  play.  N.  B.  Sometimes  the  verb  is  understood ; 
as,  Who  tore  my  book  ?  Answer,  James ;  that  is,  James  tore  it. 
Peter  is  taller  than  I;  that  is,  taller  than  I  am. 

RULE  2. 

The  verb  roust  agree  with  its  nominative  in  number  and  person  ; 
as,  He  improves  ;  the  birds  sing.  N.  B.  When  a  verb  is  placed 
between  two  nominatives  of  different  numbers,  it  may  agree  with 
either,  but  is  generally  made  to  agree  with  the  first ;  as,  Words 
are  wind ;  "  His  meat  leas  locusts  and  wild  honey." 

RULE  3. 

Pronouns  must  agree  with  their  antecedents,  or  the  nouns  they 
represent,  in  gender  and  number ;  as,  The  boy  who  plays  ;  thou 
who  writest ;  the  trees  which  grow  ;  Frank  has  lost  his  hat,  Jane 
her  bonnet,  and  the  ladies  their  shawls.  Relatives  agree  with 
their  antecedents  in  gender,  number,  and  person,  and  must  have 


verbs  agreeing  with  them  accordingly.  Who,  whose,  and  whom, 
are  applied  to  persons,  and  which  to  things  or  brutes  ;  that  is  ap- 
plied to  persons,  things  or  brutes.  N.  B.  When  a  person  is  refer- 
red to  without  distinction  of  gender,  the  masculine  is  generally 
preferred ;  as,  The  reader  i8  requested  to  suspend  his  judgment. 

RULE  4. 

Transitive  verbs,  transitive  participles,  and  prepositions  govern 
the  objective  case ;  as,  He  struck  me ;  we  will  prevent  their  hurt- 
ing u*;  I  spoke  to  him.  N.  B.  Sometimes  verbs  and  prepositions 
are  understood  ;  as,  I  love  him  and  her ;  he  gave  it  to  you  and 
me ;  that  is,  love  her,  and  to  me. 

RULE  5. 

Two  or  more  nouns,  signifying  the  same  thing,  are  put,  hy  appo- 
sition, in  the  same  case ;  as,  Paul,  the  apostle,  was  a  learned  man ; 
I  saw  Baxter,  the  merchant,  him  who  lives  in  Broadway.  N.  B. 
Neuter  verbs  have  the  same  case  after  as  before  them ;  as,  It  was 
not  /  who  tore  the  book ;  I  took  it  to  be  him.  But  the  words  be- 
fore and  after,  are  always  in  apposition ;  as,  Jack,  is  a  good  boy  ; 
I  took  him  to  be  the  man. 


BOOK    SECOND. 


29 


RULE  6. 

When  an  address  is  made  to  a  person,  the  noun  or  pronoun  is 
put  in  the  nominative  case  independent :  as,  Hugo,  study  your  les- 
son ;  O !  thou,  who  art  highly  favored. 

RULE  7. 

A  noun  or  pronoun,  joined  with  a  participle,  and  standing  inde- 
pendent of  the  rest  of  the  sentence,  is  in  the  nominative  case  in- 
dependent ;  as,  The  general  being  slain,  the  army  was  routed ;  she 
being  absent,  the  business  was  attended  to  by  others. 

RULE  8. 

A  noun  or  pronoun,  signifying  possession,  must  be  put  in  the 
possessive  case  ;  as,  Henry's  cane  ;  my  horse.  N.  B.  When  the 
singular  ends  in  es  or  ss,  the  apostrophe  only  is  generally  added ; 
as,  Achilles'  shield  ;  for  goodness'  sake.  When  two  or  more  nouns 
come  together  in  the  possessive  case,  the  apostrophe  is  generally 
added  to  one  only,  and  understood  to  the  rest ;  as,  Paul,  the  Apos- 
tle's advice. 

RULE  9. 

The  verbs  which  follow  bid,  dare,  feel,  hear,  let,  make,  need, 
see,  &c,  are  used  in  the  infinitive  mood,  without  having  the  sign 
to  prefixed  to  them ;  as,  He  bids  me  come  ;  I  dare  engage  ;  I  hear 
the  birds  sing.  N.  B.  Dare,  to  challenge,  and  see,  to  take  care,  both 
admit  to  after  them ;  as,  He  dares  me  to  try  ;  I  shall  see  to  have 
it  done. 

RULE  10. 

Collective  nouns,  or  nouns  of  multitude,  must  have  verbs  and 
pronouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  singular  or  plural  number,  ac- 
cording as  they  convey  unity  or  plurality  of  idea :  as,  The  army 
was  impeded  in  its  march ;  the  council  were  divided  in  their  sen- 
timents. 

RULE  11. 

Two  or  more  nouns  or  pronouns  in  the  singular  number,  con- 
nected by  and,  must  have  verbs,  nouns,  and  pronouns  agreeing  with 
them  in  the  plural  number ;  as,  Socrates  and  Plato  were  wise ; 
they  were  the  most  eminent  men  in  Greece. 

RULE  12. 

Two  or  more  nouns  or  pronouns  in  the  singular  number,  con- 
nected by  or  or  nor,  must  have  verbs,  nouns,  and  pronouns,  agree- 
ing with  them  in  the  singular  number ;  as,  Neither  Tim  nor  Har- 
ry is  the  boy  who  disobeyed  his  master.  N.  B.  When  or  or  nor 
comes  between  a  singular  and  plural  noun  or  pronoun,  the  verb 
must  be  plural ;  as,  Neither  poverty  nor  riches  were  injurious  to 
him.  But  in  this  case,  the  plural  noun  or  pronoun,  when  it  can 
conveniently  be  done,  should  be  placed  next  to  the  verb. 

RULE  13. 

Adjectives  must  never  be  used  in  the  place  of  adverbs,  nor  ad- 
verbs in  the  place  of  adjectives ;  as,  She  writes  very  neat,  and 
spells  accurate.  [It  should  be  neatly  and  accurately.]  A  serene 
sky  appears  pleasantly  after  a  storm.  \_pleasant.~\  Adverbs  re- 
quire an  appropriate  situation  in  a  sentence,  viz :  for  the  most  part 
before  adjectives,  after  verbs,  and  frequently  between  the  auxilia- 
ry and  the  verb ;  as,  A  very  prudent  woman ;  she  behaves  discreet- 
ly, and  is  much  admired.  An  adverb  must  never  be  placed  between 
the  preposition  to  and  the  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood ;  as,  Please 
to  not  interrupt  me.     [It  should  be,  please  not  to  interrupt  me.] 

RULE  14. 

This  and  that,  the  only  adjectives  varied  on  account  of  number, 
must  agree  in  number  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  refer  ;  as,  I 


have  not  seen  George  these  four  years ;  I  dislike  that  kind  of  in- 
dulgences. [Not  this  four  years,  and  those  kind.]  N.  B.  The 
pronoun  them  must  never  be  used  as  an  adjective  to  any  noun  ;  as, 
Give  me  them  books,  [should  be  those.']  This  and  these  refer  to 
things  nearest  or  last  mentioned  ;  that  and  those  to  things  farther 
distant  or  first  mentioned ;  as,  This  knife  and  these  quills  are  mine ; 
that  knife  and  those  quills,  on  the  shelf,  are  yours.  The  path  of 
virtue  and  the  road  of  vice  are  open  before  you ;  that  leads  to  hap- 
piness, this  to  misery. 

RULE  15. 

When  we  make  a  comparison  between  two  persons  or  things  on- 
ly, the  adjective  or  adverb  must  never  be  used  in  the  superlative 
degree ;  as,  Which  of  those  two  boys  is  the  tallest  ?  [should  be 
taller.']  But  in  a  comparison  between  three  or  more,  the  superla- 
tive must  be  used ;  as,  This  is  the  best  apple  of  the  three. 

RULE  16. 

When  the  verb  is  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  present  tense,  its  per- 
sonal termination  must  always  be  omitted  ;  as,  If  the  fire  burn. 
[not  burns.]  The  verb  to  be  has  the  personal  termination  omitted 
in  the  present  and  imperfect  tense  ;  as,  If  she  be  at  home ;  if  she 
were  at  church  yesterday.  A  verb  in  the  subjunctive  mood  is  fre- 
quently in  the  future  tense  without  having  the  sign  shall,  will,  or 
should  expressed ;  in  which  case,  the  present  termination  should 
never  be  used ;  as,  If  he  preach  to-morrow,  I  shall  hear  him.  [not 
preaches.]  N.  B.  When  there  is  no  doubt  or  condition  expressed, 
the  verb  must  not  have  the  subjunctive  form,  although  it  may  be 
preceded  by  the  subjunctive  sign ;  as,  If  there  is  a  God. 

RULE  17. 

When  the  form  of  the  imperfect  tense  and  perfect  participle  are 
different,  auxiliaries  must  never  be  joined  to  the  former ;  as,  I  have 
wrote,  for  I  have  Written.  Neither  should  the  perfect  participle  be 
used  in  the  place  of  the  imperfect  tense ;  as,  I  seen  him,  for  I  saw 
him.     See  Catalogue  of  irregular  verbs. 

RULE  18. 

Transitive  verbs  should  not  be  used  to  express  the  meaning  of 
those  that  are  intransitive,  and  the  contrary ;  as,  He  laid  in  the 
street  ;  he  invited  me  to  set  down ;  I  set  with  Charles  yesterday  at 
Church,  [should  be  lay,  sit  and  sat.  See  the  catalogue  of  irreg- 
ular verbs.]  N.  B.  The  present  tense  should  never  be  used  to  ex- 
press past  time ;  as,  I  see  him  yesterday,     [should  be  saw.] 

RULE  19. 

Sometimes  a  noun  is  in  the  possessive  case  when  it  is  joined  to 
a  participle  ;  as,  Much  depends  upon  this  rrde's  being  observed. 
Being  observed,  is  here  used  as  a  noun,  in  the  objective  case,  and 
governed  by  on,  and  governs  rule's  in  the  possessive  case.  N.  B. 
Participles  not  only  often  perform  the  office  of  nouns,  but  they 
sometimes  perform  the  office  of  a  noun  and  participle  at  the  same 
time  ;  as,  By  loving  virtue,  misery  may  be  shunned. 

RULE  20. 

A  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood  should  always  be  written  in  the 
perfect  tense,  when  it  expresses  action  antecedent  to  the  verb  con- 
nected with  it ;  as,  He  is  supposed  to  have  written  the  letter  while 
he  was  at  college.  Otherwise,  the  present  tense  must  be  used  ;  as, 
I  intended  to  write  a  letter  last  week,     [not  to  have  written.] 

RULE  21. 

When  the  present  participle  has  an  article  before  it,  the  prepo- 
sition of  must  always  follow ;  and  the  one  should  never  be  used 
without  the  other ;  as,  The  repenting  of  sinners  gives  joy  to  the 
celestial  regions. 


30 


BOOK    SECOND. 


RULE  22. 

Two  negatives  should  never  be  used  in  the  same  simple  sen- 
tence, unless  to  express  an  affirmation  ;  as,  I  cannot  give  no  more 
for  it.  It  should  be,  I  cannot  give  any  more  for  it ;  or,  I  can  give 
no  more  for  it.  «, 

RULE  23. 

Those  conjunctions  that  have  corresponding  conjunctions,  an- 
swering to  them,  must  have  the  proper  ones.  As  should  always  be 
followed  by  as,  when  expressing  comparison  of  equality ;  as,  Dick 
is  as  large  as  Harry.  But  when  of  inequality,  with  not  added,  so 
as  must  be  used  ;  as,  Tom  is  not  so  large  as  Jerry.  N.  B.  As 
must  never  follbw  the  adverb  more ;  as,  He  is  more  active,  but  not 
so  studious  as  his  companion,  [it  should  be,  He  is  more  active 
than  his  companion,  but  not  so  studious.]  Because  more  always 
requires  than  after  it. 

RULE  24. 

The  adjective  such  is  proper  to  be  used,  when  we  refer  to  the  na- 
ture or  species  of  a  thing;  as,  Such  a  temper  I  never  knew.  But 
when  degree  is  signified,  with  an  adjective  added,  the  adverb  so 
must  be  used;  as,  So  bad  a  temper  I  never  knew. 

RULE  25. 

Interjections  always  require  the  objective  case  after  them  when 
it  is  of  the  first  person ;  as,  Ah  !  me  ;  but  the  nominative,  when  it 
is  not  of  the  first  person  ;  as,  O  !  thou!  O  !  happy  they. 

RULE  26. 

An  adjective,  without  a  noun  expressed,  having  the  definite  ar- 
ticle before  it,  generally  requires  a  plural  verb;  as,  The  sincere 
are  always  esteemed. 

RULE  27. 

There  must  be  no  nominative  case  in  a  sentence,  without  a  verb 
expressed  or  understood,  except  the  nominative  case  independent ; 
as,  "  He  that  hath  ears  to  hear,  let  him  hear."  It  should  be,  Let 
him  hear  that  hath  ears  to  hear.  Sometimes,  however,  redundant 
words  are  peculiarly  emphatical. 

RULE  28. 

A  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood,  a  sentence,  or  part  of  a  sentence, 
sometimes  performs  the  office  of  a  noun,  and  is  the  nominative 
case  to  a  verb :  in  which  case,  the  verb  must  generally  be  in  the 
third  person,  singular ;  as.  To  err  is  human ;  That  virtue  will  be 
rewarded  and  vice  punished,  is  a  doctrine  plainly  taught  in  the 
Bible. 

RULE  29. 

The  practice  of  separating  the  preposition  from  its  noun,  in  or- 
der to  connect  different  prepositions  with  the  same  noun,  is  inelegant, 
and  should  generally  be  avoided  ;  as,  He  was  refused  entrance  into, 
and  forcibly  driveir/rwn  the  house.  It  should  be,  He  was  refused 
entrance  into  the  house,  and  forcibly  driven  from  it. 

RULE  30. 

The  adjective  each  or  every,  being  connected  in  a  sentence,  has 
the  same  effect  as  or  or  nor,  and  requires  a  singular  verb ;  as,  Ev- 
ery leaf  and  every  twig  teems  with  life;  each  man,  woman  and 
child  is  dependent  on  Divine  bounty.  Either  and  neither  signify 
one  or  the  other  of  two  persons  or  things  ;  hence  it  would  be  im- 
•  proper  to  say,  either  of  the  three. 


RULE  31. 

The  pronoun  what  should  never  be  used  for  the  conjunction  that; 
as,  He  would  not  believe  but  what  I  was  in  fault — [should  be,  but 
that."]  Neither  should  the  word  no  follow  whether,  when  contrast 
is  intended  ;  as,  He  would  do  it  whether  he  had  leave  or  no — [no*.] 
Neither  should  the  word  for  be  used  before  a  verb  in  the  infinitive 
mood  ;  as,  "  What  went  ye  out  for  to  see  ?  " 

RULE  32. 

When  singular  pronouns,  or  a  noun  and  pronoun  of  different 
persons,  are  connected  by  or  or  nor,  the  verb  must  agree  in  person 
with  that  which  is  placed  next  to  it ;  as,  He  or  I  am  to  be  blamed  ;* 
I  or  he  is  to  be  blamed.  N.  B.  When  two  or  more  pronouns,  or 
nouns  and  pronouns,  of  different  persons,  are  connected  by  and,  the 
plural  verb  and  pronoun,  referring  to  them,  must  agree  in  person 
with  that  which  is  of  the  first  person  in  preference  to  the  second 
and  third,  and  with  the  second  in  preference  to  the  third ;  as,  I, 
thou,  and  he  should  govern  our  passions;  thou  and  he  should  gov- 
ern your  passions.  Because,  I,  thou,  and  he,  make  we,  and  thou 
and  he  make  you. 

RULE  33. 

Personal  pronouns  must  not  be  used  in  the  same  simple  sen- 
tence with  the  nouns  they  represent ;  as,  The  king  he  is  just — [the 
king  is  just.]  Pronouns  in  apposition  are  exceptions  to  this  rule  ; 
as,  I,  Richard  Roe,  of  Boston. 

RULE  34. 

The  conjunction  as,  after  such,  becomes  a  relative  pronoun,  and 
is  used  in  preference  to  who,  which,  or  that ;  as,  I  love  such  per- 
sons as  are  good.  The  relative  that,  after  the  adjective  same,  and 
all  superlatives,  is  preferred  to  who,  whom,  or  which  ;  as,  he  is  the 
same  man  that  we  saw ;  Solomon  is  the  wisest  man  that  ever  lived  ;. 
this  is  the  best  Grammar  that  I  ever  saw.  That  must  be  used 
when  there  are  two  antecedents,  the  one  a  person  and  the  other  a 
brute ;  as,  The  man  and  his  horse  that  were  drowned.  N.  B.  The 
relative  or  personal  pronoun  should  never  be  used  in  such  a  man- 
ner as  to  occasion  ambiguity :  as,  Pie  is  like  a  beast  of  prey  who  is 
void  of  compassion.  [It  should  be,  He  who  is  void  of  compa>sion 
is  like  a  beast  of  prey.]  Robert  is  preferred  to  Charles  only  be- 
cause he  is  not  known.  [Here,  Robert  or  Charles,  must  again  be 
repeated;  or  the  word  former  or  latter  used  instead  of  he.~\  The 
relative  should  be  placed  as  near  its  antecedent  as  the  construction 
will  admit.  N.  B.  A  relative  may  have  a  sentence  or  part  of  a 
sentence  for  its  antecedent,  and  then  it  must  be  in  the  third  person 
singular;  as,  We  are  required  "to  fear  God  and  keep  His  Com- 
mandments" which  is  the  whole  duty  of  man. 

RULE  35. 

It  is  a  general  rule,  that  when  we  can  change  the  verb  which  we 
make  use  of,  into  the  verb  to  be,  without  destroying  the  sense,  the 
word  connected  with  it  must  be  an  adjective  instead  of  an  adverb  ; 
as,  The  orange  tastes  [is~\  sour ;  The  clouds  look  [are']  dark.  N. 
B.  Some  adjectives  have  a  two-fold  meaning — expressing  the  qual- 
ity of  nouns — and  at  the  same  time  modifying  the  action  of  verbs. 

RULE  36. 

Adjectives  should  be  carefully  applied  to  the  nouns  to  which  they 
properly  belong;  as,  He  purchased  a  pair  of  new  boots,  [not  a 
new  pair  of  boots.]  When  two  or  more  adjective*  relate  to  the 
same  noun,  that  which  is  the  most  appropriate  and  expressive 
should  be  placed  next  to  it ;  as,  A  tall  young  woman,  [not  a 
young  tall  woman.]  N.  B.  Double  comparatives  and  superla- 
tives must  never  be  used  ;  as,  "•.After  the  most,  strides!  .-eel  of  our 

— — ' — r=raa 


BOOK    SECOND. 


31 


religion,  I  lived  a  Pharisee."     Some  adjectives  do  not  admit  of 
comparison  ;  as,  chief ,  perfect,  round,  square,  &c. 

KULE  37. 

Adjectives,  conveying  unity  or  plurality  of  idea,  must  have  nouns 
agreeing  with  them  accordingly ;  as,  One  foot,  twenty  feet,  ten 
pounds,  &c.  [not  twenty  foot,  ten  pound,  &c]  Some  technical 
terms,  however,  are  exceptions :  as,  Twenty  sail  of  vessels,  ten 
head  of  cattle.  N.  B.  The  word  means  is  singular  or  plural — 
therefore,  it  is  proper  to  say,  by  this  means  or  by  these  means ;  but 
not  without  regard  to  unity  or  plurality ;  as,  He  lived  temperately 
and  by  this  means,  preserved  his  health :  the  scholars  were  atten- 
tive, industrious,  and  obedient  to  their  tutors,  and  by  these  means 
acquired  knowledge.  The  word  mean  signifies  mediocrity,  or  mid- 
dle state,  and  is  always  singular  :  as,  This  is  a  mean  between  the 
two  extremes. 

RULE  38. 

The  adverbs  here  and  there  are  often  improperly  used  as  nouns ; 
as,  He  left  here  yesterday,  and  went  from  there  this  morning,  [this 
place,  thatplace.~\  Where,  here,,  and  there,  should  not  be  used  for 
wherein,  herein,  and  therein,  or  for  in  and  which;  as,  I  saw  an  ac- 
count where  the  truth  was  given.  The  adverb  how  should  not  be 
used  for  the  conjunction  that,  nor  instead  of  it ;  as,  We  heard  how 
he  was  coming.     [tliat.~\ 

RULE  39. 

Different  relations  and  different  senses  should  be  expressed  by 
different  prepositions.  An  accurate  and  appropriate  use  of  these 
little  words  is  of  great  importance,  and  requires  more  taste  and  judg- 
ment than  is  usually  imagined.  We  converse  with  a  person,  upon 
a  subject,  in  a  house.  To  is  made  use  of  before  nouns  of  place 
when  they  follow  verbs  and  participles  of  motion  ;  as,  I  went  to 
London,  I  am  going  to  town.  But  the  preposition  at  is  generally 
used  after  the  verb  to  be ;  as,  I  have  been  at  London,  I  was  at  the 
place  appointed,  I  shall  be  at  Paris.  We  likewise  say,  he  touched, 
or  arrived  at  such  a  place.  The  preposition  in  is  set  before  coun- 
tries, states,  counties,  townships,  cities,  and  large  towns;  as,  He 
lives  in  Maine,  in  New  York,  in  Baltimore,  in  Guilford.  But  be- 
fore villages  and  single  houses,  and  before  cities  which  are  in  dis- 
tant countries,  at  is  used  ;  as,  He  lives  at  Brattleboro'  east  village; 
she  resides  at  Paris.  N.  B.  But  is  sometimes  used  as  a  preposi- 
tion ;  as,  they  all  went  but  me.  Betwixt  and  between  are  to  be  us- 
ed when  there  are  only  two  persons  or  things  spoken  of,  and  among 
and  amongst,  when  there  are  more  than  two  ;  as,  Divide  the  money 
between  the  two  parents,  or  among  the  three  children.  Among 
should  not  be  used  before  each,  every,  either,  one,  another,  and  other 
words  expressing  unity ,  as,  Pride  shows  itself  among  every  rank 
of  society    [in  every  rank.] 

RULE  40. 

Articles  are  often  properly  omitted;  when  used,  they  should  be 
properly  applied :  as,  Man  is  mortal,  a  man  died ;  sin  is  ruinous,  a 
sin  is  a  crime.  A  becomes  an  before  a  vowel  or  silent  h ;  as,  an 
apple,  an  hour — except  before  a  vowel  sounded  like  w,  as  many  a 


one — before  u,  sounded  like  you,  as  a  unicorn — and  before  a  diph- 
thong sounded  like  yu,  as  a  eunuch.  It  also  becomes  an  before  h 
which  is  not  silent,  when  the  accent  is  on  the  second  syllable ;  as, 
an  Herculean  task.  N.  B.  The  indefinite  article  is  prefixed  to 
nouns  in  the  singular  number  only,  individually  or  collectively ;  as, 
a  man,  a  flock  of  birds.  The  is  used  before  singular  or  plural  nouns ; 
as,  the  boy,  or  the  boys. 

RULE  41. 

When  two  or  more  nouns  come  together  in  the  possessive  case, 
whether  in  apposition  or  not,  the  sign  of  the  possessive  is  generally 
annexed  to  the  last  only,  and  understood  to  the  rest;  as,  "ForZ^a- 
vid,  my  servant's  sake"  ;  Peter,  John,  and  Andrew's  occupation  was 
that  of  fishermen.  But  when  the  latter  part  of  the  sentence  is  con- 
siderably extended,  or  when  a  pause  is  proper,  the  sign  should  be 
attached  to  the  first  only ;  as,  He  emulates  Caesar's  glory,  the 
greatest  general  of  antiquity ;  he  left  the  parcel  at  Smith's,  the  sta- 
tioner and  bookseller.  When  words  intervene  between  the  posses- 
sives,  the  sign  is  generally  applied  to  each;  as,  I  have  my  father's 
as  well  as  mother's  consent.  Sometimes,  though  rarely,  two  or 
more  nouns  in '  the  possessive,  immediately  succeed  each  other  in 
the  following  form  :  as,  '■'■Peter's  ivife's  mother  lay  sick  of  a  fever ;" 
better  expressed,  generally,  thus :  the  mother  of  Peter's  wife,  &c. 
The  preposition  of  frequently  expresses  the  relation  of  property ; 
thus,  instead  of  saying,  Virtue's  reward,  we  may  say,  the  reward 
of  virtue.  This  form  is  sometimes  much  the  more  elegant;  as, 
The  condition  of  the  kingdom,  instead  of  the  kingdom's  condition. 
Sometimes  we  meet  with  several  nouns  in  succession,  connected 
by  of;  as.  The  severity  of  the  distress  of  the  son  of  the  king  touch- 
ed the  nation.  It  would  be  much  better  to  say,  The  severe  distress 
of  the  king's  son,  &c.  When  of  'is  used  before  the  possessive  case  of 
nouns,  there  is  a  double  possessive,  the  thing  possessed  not  being 
repeated ;  as,  A  friend  of  Edward's  ;  i.  e.  a  friend  of,  or  among  Ed 
ward's  friends  :  Vital  air  was  a  discovery  of  Priestly's.  [making.] 
When  property  or  possession  is  implied  in  the  strictest  sense,  this 
idiom  is  proper ;  otherwise,  the  sign  of  the  possessive  should  gen- 
erally be  omitted ;  as,  These  pictures  of  the  king's  were  sent  to 
him  from  Italy ;  This  picture  of  the  king  does  not  much  resemble 
him.  N.  B.  Little  explanatory  circumstances  are  particularly  awk- 
ward between  a  possessive  and  the  word  which  follows  it;  as,  She 
began  to  extol  the  farmer's  (as  she  called  him)  excellent  under- 
standing. It  ought  to  be,  The  excellent  understanding  of  the  far- 
mer, as  she  called  him. 

RULE  42. 

Conjunctions  connect  nouns  and  pronouns  in  the  same  case,  and 
generally  verbs,  of  like  moods  and  tenses;  as,  He  divided  the  mon- 
ey between  him  and  me  ;  Candor  is  to  be  approved  and  practiced. 

RULE  43. 

Care  must  be  taken  not  to  make  use  of  an  improper  mood,  tense, 
preposition,  or  word  of  any  kind;  and  that  all  words  which  are 
used,  be  properly  modified,  and  properly  placed,  so  that  all  the  parts 
of  sentences  shall  correspond  to  each  other  in  a  clear  and  perspic- 
uous manner. 


.t^.. 


32 


BOOK     SECOND. 


FALSE  GRAMMAR  AND  KEY. 


FALSE  GRAMMAR  ADAPTED  TO  THE  RULES. 


ADAPTED  TO  RULE  1. 

1.  Her  that  is  virtuous  deserves  esteem.  2.  Them  that  oppress 
the  poor,  to  increase  their  riches,  shall  come  to  want.  3.  Peter 
and  me  went  to  church.  4.  How  dost  thee  do  ?  5.  I  can  run  as 
fast  as  him.  6.  You  read  better  than  her.  7.  Thee  must  be  more 
attentive  to  thy  studies.     8.  Edward  is  five  years  older  than  me. 

RULE  2. 

1.  Fifty  pounds  of  wheat  contains  forty  pounds  of  flour.  2. 
Crosses  in  trade  damps  the  spirit  of  enterprise.  3.  A  variety  of 
pleasing  objects  charm  the  sight.  4.  The  frogs  in  the  pond  makes 
a  great  noise.  5.  The  number  of  oysters  increase.  6.  The  girls 
was  here  yesterday ;  but  they  was  in  great  haste.  7.  Great  pains 
has  been  taken  to  little  purpose.  8.  Has  the  cattle  been  taken 
care  of  ?  9.  Thou  should  be  more  diligent  in  attending  to  thy 
studies.  10.  Was  you  at  church  yesterday?  11.  Where  is  Eli- 
za's shoes  ?  12.  How  does  the  children  behave?  13.  Was  the 
boys  here  yesterday  ?  14.  Where  has  the  scholars  all  gone  ? 
15.  Where  was  you  last  week?  16.  Several  places  in  the  road 
wants  repairing — we  was  all  very  much  frightened  yesterday.  17. 
The  rules  of  the  school  was  very  strict.  18.  Thou  should  love  thy 
neighbor  as  thyself.  19.  Thou  hearest  the  sound  of  the  wind,  but 
canst  not  tell  whence  it  comes  or  whither  it  goest. 

RULE  3. 

1  Boys  that  behaves  well  in  school  will  gain  praise.  2.  The 
men  that  was  here  yesterday,  live  in  Boston.  3.  O !  thou  who 
ruleth  on  high,  and  who  hates  iniquity.  4.  The  book  of  poems, 
which  were  sent  me  yesterday,  is  very  elegant.  5.  He  that  ruleth 
his  passions  is  better  than  he  that  takest  a  city.  6.  Let  every  per- 
son mind  their  own  business.  7.  Every  tree  is  known  by  their 
fruit.  8.  Rebecca  took  goodly  raiment  which  was  with  her  in  the 
house,  and  put  them  on  Jacob.  9.  No  one  speaks  evil  of  them- 
selves. 10.  "  Take  handfuls  of  ashes  of  the  furnace,  and  let  Mo- 
ses sprinkle  it  towards  the  heaven,"  &c.  11.  An  orator's  tongue 
should  be  agreeable  to  the  ears  of  their  auditors.  12.  Every  girl 
should  be  rewarded  according  to  their  merits.  13.  I  heard  a  per- 
son say,  that  they  thought  you  handsome.  14.  Every  person, 
whatever  be  their  station,  should  attend  to  the  duties  of  morality 
and  religion.  15.  He  is  a  wise  man  which  speaks  little.  16.  They 
which  seek  wisdom  will  certainly  find  her.  17.  "  Our  Father 
which  art  in  heaven."  18.  These  are  beasts  of  prey,  whom  we 
sometimes  hunt,  and  by  whom  we  are  sometimes  hunted. 

RULE  4. 

1.  He  and  they  we  know,  but  who  art  thou  ?  2.  He  invited  my 
brother  and  I  to  see  his  garden.  3.  The  master  loves  thou,  be- 
cause thou  art  diligent.  4.  Who  do  you  see  ?  5.  Who  do  you  love  ? 
6.  Who  did  he  strike  ?  7.  Who  is  he  courting  ?  8.  Who  did  she 
marry?  9.  Who  did  you  tell?  10.  I  thank  ye,  sir.  11.  I  es- 
teem him  and  her  and  they.  1 2.  Who  did  they  entertain  so  free- 
ly? 13.  He  who  committed  the  offence,  thou  shouldst  correct,  not 
I  who  am  innocent.     14.  Who  shall  we  send  to  the  Legislature  ? 


KEY,  OR  FALSE  GRAMMAR  CORRECTED. 


ACCORDING  TO  RULE  1. 

1.  She  that  is  virtuous  deserves  esteem.  2.  They  that  oppress 
the  poor,  to  increase  their  riches,  shall  come  to  want.  3.  Peter 
and /went  to  church.  4.  How  dost  thou  do?  5.  lean  run  as 
fast  as  he.  6.  You  read  better  than  she.  7.  Thou  must  be  more 
attentive  to  thy  studies.     8.  Edward  is  five  years  older  than  I. 

RULE  2. 

1.  Fifty  pounds  of  wheat  contain  forty  pounds  of  flour.  2. 
Crosses  in  trade  damp  the  spirit  of  enterprise.  3.  A  variety  of 
pleasing  objects  charms  the  sight.  4.  The  frogs  in  the  pond  mate 
a  great  noise.  6.  The  number  of  oysters  increases.  6.  The  girls 
were  here  yesterday ;  but  they  were  in  great  haste.  7.  Great 
pains  have  been  taken  to  little  purpose.  8.  Have  the  cattle  been 
taken  care  of  ?  9.  Thou  shouldst  be  more  diligent  in  attending  to 
thy  studies.  10.  Were  you  at  church  yesterday?  11.  Where  are 
Eliza's  shoes ?  12.  How  do  the  children  behave?  13.  Were  the 
boys  here  yesterday  ?  14.  Where  have  the  scholars  all  gone?  15. 
Where  were  you  last  week?  16.  Several  places  in  the  road  want 
repairing — we  were  all  very  much  frightened  yesterday.  17.  The 
rules  of  the  school  were  very  strict.  18.  Thou  shouldst  love  thy 
neighbor  as  thyself.  19.  Thou  hearest  the  sound  of  the  wind,  but 
canst  not  tell  whence  it  cometh  or  whither  it  goeth. 
RULE  3. 

1.  Boys  that  behave  well  in  school  will  gain  praise.  2.  The  men 
that  were  here  yesterday,  live  in  Boston.  3.  O !  thou  who  rulest 
on  high,  and  who  hatest  iniquity.  4.  The  book  of  poems,  which 
was  sent  to  me  yesterday,  is  very  elegant.  5.  He  that  ruleth  his 
passions  is  better  than  he  that  taketh  a  city.  6.  Let  every  person 
mind  his  own  business.  7.  Every  free  is  known  by  its  fruit.  8. 
Rebecca  took  goodly  raiment  which  was  with  her  in  the  house,  and 
put  it  on  Jacob.  9.  No  one  speaks  evil  of  himself *.  10.  "Take 
handfuls  of  ashes  of  the  furnace,  and  let  Moses  sprinkle  them  to- 
wards the  heaven,"  &c.  11.  An  orator's  tongue  should  be  agreea- 
ble to  the  ears  of  his  auditors.  12.  Every  girl  shall  be  rewarded 
according  to  her  merits.  13.  I  heard  a  person  say,  that  he  or  she 
thought  you  handsome.  14.  Every  person,  whatever  be  his  sta- 
tion, should  attend  to  the  duties  of  morality  and  religion.  15.  He 
is  a  wise  man  who  speaks  little.  16.  They  who  seek  wisdom,  will 
certainly  find  her.  17.  "Our  Father  who  art  in  heaven."  18. 
These  are  beasts  of  prey,  which  we  sometimes  hunt,  and  by  which 
we  are  sometimes  hunted. 

RULE  4. 

1.  Him  and  them  we  know,  but  who  art  thou?  2.  He  invited 
my  brother  and  me  to  see  his  garden.  3.  The  master  loves  thee, 
because  thou  art  diligent.  4.  Whom  do  you  see  ?  5.  Whom  do  you 
love?  6.  Whom  did  he  strike?  7.  Whom  is  he  courting?  8. 
Whom  did  she  marry  ?  9.  Whom  did  you  tell  ?  10.  I  thank  you, 
sir.  11.  I  esteem  him  and  her  and  them.  12.  Whom  did  they  en- 
tertain so  freely?  13.  Him  who  committed  the  offence,  thou 
shouldst  correct,  not  me,  who  am  innocent  14.  Whom  shall  we 
send  to  the  Legislature?     15.    Suspecting  not  only  us,  but  them 


BOOK    SECOND. 


33 


15.  Suspecting  not  only  we,  but  they  also,  he  was  studious  to  avoid 
all  intercourse.  16.  You  are  displeased  with  me  for  admonishing 
ye.  17.  From  he  that  is  needy  and  afflicted,  turn  not  away.  18. 
He  sent  for  you  and  I.  19.  Who  does  he  study  with?  2(5.  Who 
did  you  walk  with?  21.  Who  did  you  ride  with?  22.  Who  did 
you  sit  with  ?  23.  Who  did  you  give  it  to  ?  24.  Who  shall  you 
send  for  ?  25.  Who  does  she  live  with  ?  26,  Who  are  you  talk- 
ing about  ?  27.  Who  shall  you  vote  for  ?  28.  Who  are  you  writ- 
ing to  ?  29.  Who  did  you  receive  the  news  from  ?  30.  Does  that 
boy  know  who  he  is  speaking  to?  31.  What  concord  can  subsist 
between  those  who  commit  crimes,  and  they  who  abhor  them  ?  32. 
From  the  character  of  those  persons  who  you  associate  with,  your 
own  will  be  established. 

RULE  5. 

1.  I  gave  the  book  to  James,  my  cousin,  he  who  was  here  yes- 
terday. 2.  Augustus,  the  Roman  Emperor,  him  who  succeeded 
Julius  Caesar,  is  variously  described.  3.  The  estate  was  left  to  Si- 
mon and  John,  the  two  eldest  sons,  they  that  had  been  to  Europe. 
4.  These  books  are  my  friend's,  he  who  keeps  the  library.  5.  Art 
thou  acquainted  with  Clarissa,  the  milliner,  she  whom  we  met  in 
our  walks  this  morning  ?  6.  It  was  not  me  that  made  the  noise. 
7.  Thou  art  him  who  sold  the  books.  8.  I  believe  it  to  be  they. 
9.  I  took  it  to  be  he.  10.  It  could  not  have  been  her.  11.  It 
might  have  been  him,  but  there  is  no  proof  of  it.  12.  Who  do 
you  think  me  to  be?  13.  Whom  do  men  say  that  I  am?  14.  Let 
him  be  who  he  may,  I  am  not  afraid  of  him. 

RULE  6. 

1,  *  Roman's,  countrymen,  and  lovers',  hear  me  for  my  cause." 
2.  O !  thee,  who  art  so  unmindful  of  thy  duty.  3.  Hail  thee,  that 
art  highly  favored.     4.  O  !  thee,  who  inhabitest  eternity. 

RULE  7. 

1.  Him  having  ended  his  discourse,  the  assembly  dispersed.  2. 
The  sun's  being  risen,  it  became  very  warm.  3.  They  all  had  lib- 
erty to  go,  us  only  excepted.  4.  William  and  her  having  engaged 
to  call,  we  waited  an  hour. 

RULE  8. 

1.  Thy  fathers  offence  will  not  condemn  thee.  2.  Hast  thou 
read  Cowpers  poems  ?  3.  "  Nevertheless  Asa  his  heart  was  per- 
fect with  the  Lord."  4.  Wisdoms  precepts  are  the  good  boy's 
greatest  delight.  5.  A  mans  manner's  frequently  influence  his  for- 
tune. 6.  A  mothers  tenderness  and  a  fathers  care,  are  Natures 
gift's  for  mans  advantage.  7.  The  girls  book's  were  kept  in  better 
order  than  the  boys. 

RULE  9. 

1.  I  bid  him  to  shut  the  door.  2.  I  dare  not  to  conclude  too 
hastily.  3.  I  will  make  him  to  understand  his  business.  4.  You 
need  not  to  be  very  urgent.  5.  He  dares  not  to  go.  6.  I  dare 
say  we  need  not  to  urge  John  to  study  his  grammar. 

RULE  10. 

1.  The  committee  was  divided  in  its  sentiments,  and  it  has  re- 
ferred the  business  to  the  general  meeting.  2.  The  family  was  all 
well  yesterday.  3.  When  the  nation  complain,  the  people  should 
listen  to  their  voice.  4.  The  flock,  and  not  the  fleece,  are,  or 
ought  to  be,  the  objects  of  the  shepherd's  care. 

RULE  11. 

1.  Sobriety  and  humility  leads  to  honor.  2.  Time  and  tide 
waits  for  no  man.  3.  A  fool  and  his  money  is  soon  parted.  4. 
Coffee  and  sugar  is  imported  from  the  West-Indies,  and  great 
quantities  of  it  are  used  every  year.  5.  Peter  and  John  was  here 
yesterday.     6.  Has  Mary  and  Charles  returned  ?     7.  Where  has 


5 


also,  he  was  studious  to  avoid  all  intercourse.  16.  You  are  dis- 
pleased with  me  for  admonishing  you.  17.  From  him  that  is  nee- 
dy and  afflicted,  turn  not  away.  18.  He  sent  for  you  and  me.  19. 
Whom  does  he  study  with  ?  *  20.  Whom  did  you  walk  with  ? 
21.  Whom  did  you  ride  with?  22.  Whom  did  you  sit  with? 
23.  Whom  did  you  give  it  to  ?  24.  Whom  shall  you  send  for  ? 
25.  Whom  does  she  live  with  ?  26.  Whom  are  you  talking  about? 
27.  Whom  shall  you  vote  for?  28.  Whom  are  you  writing  to? 
29.  W horn  did  you  receive  the  news  from?  30.  Does  that  boy 
know  whom  he  is  speaking  to?  31.  What  concord  can  subsist  be- 
tween those  who  commit  crimes,  and  those  who  abhor  them  ?  32. 
From  the  character  of  those  persons  whom  you  associate  with,  your 
own  will  be  established. 

RULE  5. 

1.  I  gave  the  book  to  James,  my  cousin,  him  who  was  here  yes- 
terday. 2.  Augustus,  the  Roman  Emperor,  he  who  succeeded  Ju- 
lius Ca?sar,  is  variously  described.  3.  The  estate  was  left  to  Si- 
mon and  John,  the  two  eldest  sons,  them  that  had  been  to  Europe. 
4.  These  books  are  my  friend's,  his  who  keeps  the  library.  5.  Art 
thou  acquainted  with  Clarissa,  the  milliner,  her  whom  we  met  in 
our  walks  this  morning  ?  6.  It  was  not  /  that  made  the  noise.  7. 
Thou  art  he  who  sold  the  books.  8.  I  believe  it  to  be  them.  9. 
I  took  it  to  be  him.  10.  It  could  not  have  been  she.  11.  It  might 
have  been  he,  but  there  is  no  proof  of  it.  12.  Whom  do  you  think 
me  to  be  ?  13.  Who  do  men  say  that  I  am?  14.  Let  him  be 
whom  he  may,  I  am  not  afraid  of  him. 

RULE  6. 

1.  u  Romans,  countrymen,  and  lovers,  hear  me  for  my  cause." 

2.  O !  thou,  who  art  so  unmindful  of  thy  duty.  3.  Hail !  thou, 
that  art  highly  favored.     4.  O!  thou,  who  inhabitest  eternity. 

RULE  7. 

1.  He  having  ended  his  discourse,  the  assembly  dispersed.  2. 
The  sun  being  risen,  it  became  very  warm.  3.  They  all  had  lib- 
erty to  go,  we  only  excepted.  4.  William  and  she  having  engaged 
to  call,  we  waited  an  hour. 

RULE  8. 

1.  Thy  father's  offence  will  not  condemn  thee.  2.  Hast  thou' 
read  Cowper's  poems  ?  3.  "  Nevertheless  Asa's  heart  was  per- 
fect with  the  Lord."  4.  Wisdom's  precepts  are  the  good  boy's 
greatest  delight.  5.  A  man's  manners  frequently  influence  his  for- 
tune. 6.  A  mother's  tenderness  and  a  father's  care,  are  nature's 
gifts,  for  man's  advantage.  7.  The  girls'  books  were  kept  in  better 
order  than  the  boys'. 

RULE  9. 

1.  I  bid  him  shut  the  door.     2.  I  dare  not  conclude  too  hastily. 

3.  I  will  make  him  understand  his  business.  4.  You  need  not  be 
very  urgent.  5.  He  dares  not  go.  6.  I  dare  say  we  need  not 
urge  John  to  study  his  grammar. 

RULE  10. 

1.  The  committee  were  divided  in  their  sentiments,  and  they 
have  referred  the  business  to  the  general  meeting.  2.  The  family 
were  all  well  yesterday.  3.  When  the  nation  complains  the  people 
should  listen  to  its  voice.  4.  The  flock,  and  not  the  fleece,  is,  or 
ought  to  be,  the  object  of  the  shepherd's  care. 

RULE  11. 

1.  Sobriety  and  humility  lead  to  honor.  2.  Time  and  tide  wait 
for  no  man.  3.  A  fool  and  his  money  are  soon  parted.  4.  Coffee 
and  sugar  are  imported  from  the  West  Indies,  and  great  quantities 
of  them  are  used  every  year.  5.  Peter  and  John  were  here  yes- 
terday.    6.  Have  Mary  and  Charles  returned  ?     7.  Where  have 

*  Or,  with  whom  does  he  study? 


34 


BOOK    SECOND. 


Briggs  and  his  wife  been  ?  8.  Is  Mr.  Shaw  and  his  wife  at  home  ? 
9.  Was  Sara  and  Ben  at  church  yesterday?  10.  Where  is  Har- 
riet and  Eliza?  11.  Idleness  and  ignorance  are  the  parent  of  ma- 
ny vices.  12.  Pride  and  revenge  is  hateful  to,  God  and  man.  13. 
Humility  and  love  constitutes  the  essence  of  true  religion.  14. 
Patience  and  diligence,  like  faith,  removes  mountains. 

RULE  12. 

1.  Man's  happiness  or  misery  are,  in  a  great  measure,  put  into 
his  own  hands.  2.  Neither  he  nor  she  were  at  home.  3.  Ignor- 
ance or  negligence  have  been  the  causes  of  this  mistake.  4.  Nei- 
ther Helen  nor  Julia  are  the  ladies  whom  we  saw  at  their  devotion. 
5.  Knowledge  or  virtue  are  preferable  to  riches  ;  strive,  therefore, 
in  early  life,  to  attain  them.  6.  Neither  wisdom  nor  wealth  are  to 
be  obtained  by  idle  wishes.  7.  Neither  they  nor  he  was  present. 
8.  Has  the  globe  or  the  map$  been  injured  by  the  accident?  9. 
Neither  the  sailors  nor  the  captain  were  saved. 

RULE  13. 

1.  Jane  speaks  very  correct.  2.  Ann  sings  delightful.  3.  We 
have  come  agreeable  to  promise.  4.  The  weather  is  remarkable 
fine.  5.  He  speaks  very  fluent,  but  does  not  reason  very  coherent- 
ly. 6.  He  conducted  himself  very  unsuitable  to  his  profession.  7. 
Drink  hearty,  sir.  8.  Alas !  they  are  miserable  poor.  9.  She 
was  exceeding  careful  not  to  give  offence.  1 0.  You  read  that  very 
good.  11.  The  cakes  eat  crisply.  12.  The  heavenly  bodies 
are  in  motion  perpetually.  13.  We  have  been  treated  kindly.  14. 
I  hope  you  will  conclude  to  not  go.  15.  We  ought  to  faithfully 
improve  our  precious  time. 

RULE  14. 

1.  Instead  of  improving  yourselves,  you  have  been  playing  this 
two  hours.  2.  We  do  not  approve  of  these  kind  of  practices.  3. 
Please  to  give  me  that  scissors.  4>  Those  sort  of  favors  did  real 
injury  under  the  appearance  of  friendship.  5.  Please  to  hand  me 
them  tongs.  6.  Give  me  one  of  them  apples.  7.  If  them  books 
were  mine,  I  would  have  them  rebound.  8.  See  them  birds  on  the 
tree.  9.  I  admire  these  paintings  yonder,  exceedingly,  especially, 
this  to  the  right. 

RULE  15. 

1.  Of  two  evils,  let  us  choose  the  least.  2.  He  is  the  strongest 
of  the  two.  3.  James  is  the  tallest  of  the  two  brothers,  although 
Henry  is  the  oldest.  4.  Gold  and  silver  are  both  precious  metals, 
but  the  former  is  by  far  the  most  valuable.  5.  Mary  is  the  best 
girl  of  the  two.  6.  Which  of  those  three  kites  is  the  higher  ?  7. 
Samuel  and  Thomas  are  both  studying  grammar ;  but  as  the  latter 
is  the  most  diligent,  he  will  probably  obtain  a  knowledge  of  it  the 
soonest.  8.  His  parents  frequently  visited  him,  but  his  mother 
much  the  oftenest. 

RULE  16. 

1.  I  shall  walk  out  to-day,  unless  it  rains.  2.  If  Jane  studies 
well,  she  will  commit  her  lesson.  3.  If  the  child  cries,  you  must 
rock  the  cradle.  4.  If  the  dog  bites,  I  will  whip  him.  5.  If  the 
bird  flies.  6.  If  the  horse  kicks.  7.  If  the  cat  scratches.  8.  If 
George  goes  to  Boston.  9.  If  my  friend  is  in  town.  10.  If  he  is 
a  good  boy.  11.  If  lam  in  fault.  12.  Unless  thou  art  honest. 
13.  If  Sam  has  a  watch.  14.  Unless  he  comes.  15.  Except  he 
repents.  16.  If  she  was  in  fault.  17.  If  Peter  was  here  we 
would  play  ball.  18.  Was  I  to  enumerate  all  her  virtues,  it  would 
look  like  flattery.  19.  Though  the  fact  be  extraordinary,  it  cer- 
tainly did  happen. 

RULE  17. 

1.  Thomas  has  fell  from  the  tree  and  broke  his  arm.  2.  I  have 
wrote  a  letter  to  send  to  the  post-office.  3.  Jack  has .  drove  his 
horse  fifty  miles  to-day.  •  4.  I  have  eat  quite  heartily.  5.  I  have 
drank  a  glass  of  water.     6.  I  have  spoke  the  truth.     7.  I  begun 


Briggs  and  his  wife  been  ?  8.  Are  Mr.  Shaw,  and  his  wife  at 
home?  9.  Were  Sam  and  Ben  at  church  yesterday  ?  10.  Where 
are  Harriet  and  Eliza?  11.  Idleness  and  ignorance  are  the  pa- 
rents of  many  vices.  12.  Pride  and  revenge  are  hateful  to  God 
and  man.  13.  Humility  and  love  constitute  the  essence  of  true  re- 
ligion.    14.  Patience  and  diligence,  like  faith,  remove  mountains. 

RULE  12. 

1.  Man's  happiness  or  misery  is,  in  a  great  measure,  put  into 
his  own  hands.  2.  Neither  he  nor  she  was  at  home.  3.  Ignor- 
ance or  negligence  has  been  the  cause  of  this  mistake.  4.  Neither 
Helen  nor  Julia  is  the  lady  whom  we  saw  at  her  devotion.  5. 
Knowledge  or  virtue  is  preferable  to  riches ;  strive,  therefore,  in 
early  life  to  attain  it.  6.  Neither  wisdom  nor  wealth  is-  to  be  ob- 
tained by  idle  wishes.  7.  Neither  he  nor  they  were  present.  8. 
Have  the  maps  or  the  globe  been  injured  by  the  accident  ?  9. 
Neither  the  captain  nor  the  sailors  were  saved. 

RULE  13. 

1.  Jane  speaks  very  correctly.  2.  Ann  sings  delightfully.  3. 
We  have  come  agreeably  to  promise.  4.  The  weather  is  remarka- 
bly fine.  5.  He  speaks  \evy  fluently,  but  does  not  reason  very  co- 
herently. 6.  He  conducted  himself  very  unsuitably  to  his  profes- 
sion. 7.  Drink  heartily,  sir.  8.  Alas !  they  are  miserably  poor. 
9.  She  was  exceedingly  careful  not  to  give  offence.  10.  You  read 
that  very  well.  11.  The  cakes  eat  crisp.  12.  The  heavenly 
bodies  are  perpetually  in  motion.  13.  We  have  been  kindly  treat- 
ed. 14.  I  hope  you  will  conclude  not  to  go.  15.  We  ought  faith- 
fully to  improve  our  precious  time. 

RULE  14. 

1.  Instead  of  improving  yourselves,  you  have  been  playing  these 
two  hours.  2.  We  do  not  approve  of  this  kind  of  practices.  3. 
Please  to  give  me  those  scissors.  4.  That  sort  of  favors  did  real 
injury  under  the  appearance  of  friendship.  5.  Please  to  hand  me 
those  tongs.  6.  Give  me  one  of  those  apples.  7.  If  those  books 
were  mine,  I  would  have  them  re-bound.  8.  See  those  birds  on 
the  tree.  9.  I  admire  those  paintings  yonder  exceedingly,  espe- 
cially, that  on  the  right. 

RULE  15. 

1.  Of  two  evils,  let  us  choose  the  lesser.  2.  He  is  the  stronger 
of  the  two.  3.  James  is  the  taller  of  the  two  brothers,  although 
Henry  is  the  older.  4.  Gold  and  silver  are  both  precious  metals, 
but  the  former  is  by  far  the  more  valuable.  5.  Mary  is  the  better 
girl  of  the  two.  6.  Which  of  those  three  kites  is  the  highest  ?  7. 
Samuel  and  Thomas  are  both  studying  grammar ;  but  as  the  latter 
is  the  more  diligent,  he  will  probably  obtain  a  knowledge  of  it  the 
sooner.  8.  His  parents  frequently  visited  him,  but  his  mother 
much  the  oftener. 

RULE  16. 

1.  I  shall  walk  out  to-day,  unless  it  rain.  2.  If  Jane  study 
well,  she  will  commit  her  lesson.  3.  If  the  child  cry,  you  must 
rock  the  cradle.  4.  If  the  dog  bite,  I  will  whip  him.  5.  If  the 
bird  fly.  6.  If  the  horse  kick.  7.  If  the  cat  scratch.  8.  If 
George  go  to  Boston.  9.  If  my  friend  be  in  town.  10.  If  he  be 
a  good  boy.  11.  If  I  be  in  fault.  12.  Unless  thou  be  honest.  13. 
If  Sam  have  a  watch.  14.  Unless  he  come.  15.  Except  he  re- 
pent. 16.  If  she  were  in  fault.  17.  If  Peter  were  here,  we  would 
play  ball.  18.  Were  I  to  enumerate  all  her  virtues,  it  would  look 
like  flattery.  19.  Though  the  fact  is  extraordinary,  it  certainly 
did  happen. 

RULE  17. 

1.  Thomas  has  fallen  from  the  tree  and  broken  his  arm.  2.  1 
have  written  a  letter  to  send  to  the  post  office.  3.  Jack  has  drirrii 
his  horse  fifty  miles  to-day.  4.  I  have  eaten  quite  heartily.  5.  I 
have  drunk  a  glass  of  water.     6.  I  have  spoken  the  truth.     7.  I 


BOOK    SECOND. 


35 


ay  school  yesterday.  8.  He  would  not  have  went,  if  he  had  known 
t.  9.  Dick  has  froze  his  ears.  10.  The  house  was  shook  by  the 
dolence  of  the  storm.  11.  Harriet  has  wove  twenty  yards  of 
loth  to-day.  12.  The  bird  has  flew  from  the  tree.  13.  He  has 
[rank  no  spirits  these  two  years.  14.  He  had  wrote  and  read 
auch  on  the  subject.  15.  The  following  toasts  were  drank  at  the 
ate  celebration. 

RULE  18. 

1.  Please  to  set  down  and  lie  your  hat  on  the  table.  2.  I  thank  ■ 
rou,  sir,  I  had  rather  stand  than  set,  for  I  am  tired  of  setting.  3. 
We  laid  in  bed  this  morning  till  breakfast  time.  4.  Where  did 
rou  set  last  Sabbath  at  Church?  5.  I  set  with  my  brother.  6. 
le  generally  sets  up  very  late  evenings,  and  lays  abed  late  morn- 
ngs.  7.  James  was  tired,  and  he  has  just  laid  down  to  rest.  8. 
Please  to  set  up  to  the  table,  ladies.  9.  I  set  on  the  hind  seat  of 
he  stage  all  day.  10.  I  have  lain  the  book  on  the  shelf.  11.  It 
ays  on  the  table.  12.  I  have  sat  things  in  order.  13.  I  see  my 
ild  friend  last  week.  14.  I  see  that  every  thing  was  in  order,  and 
hen  took  my  departure. 

RULE  19. 

1.  There  is  great  danger  of  children  being  humored  too  much 
>y  their  mothers.  2.  I  read  an  account  yesterday,  of  a  woman 
taving  been  burnt  to  death  by  her  clothes  accidentally  taking  fire. 
!.  There  is  official  intelligence  of  a  great  battle  having  been  fought 
tetween  the  two  armies. 

RULE  20. 

1.  I  found  my  friend  in  much  better  circumstances  than  I  ex- 
acted to  have  found  him.  2.  I  intended  to  have  written  by  the 
ast  mail.  3.  George  expected  to  have  received  an  answer  last 
peek.  4.  The  prisoner  was  acquitted,  although  he  was  supposed, 
iy  many,  to  be  concerned  in  the  plot  for  which  he  was  indicted. 

RULE  21. 

1.  By  the  exercising  our  judgment,  it  is  improved.  2.  By  ob- 
erving  of  truth,  thou  wilt  command  esteem.  3.  This  was  a  be- 
raying  the  trust  reposed  in  him.  4.  A  person  cannot  be  wise  or 
;ood  without  the  taking  pains  for  it.  5.  Learning  of  languages  is 
ery  difficult. 

RULE  22. 

1.  I  do  not  envy  nobody.  2.  I  think  I  cannot  help  him  no 
aore.  3.  Death  never  spareth  none.  4.  I  cannot  by  no  means 
illow  him  that  privilege. 

RULE  23. 

1.  This  writing  is  not  as  good  as  that.  2.  The  place  is  not  as 
deasant  as  we  expected.  3.  Ben  is  not  as  tall  as  Cyp.  4.  She 
s  not  as  old  as  her  husband.  5.  Sophia  does  not  behave  as  well 
is  Mary.  6.  Pompey  was  not  as  great  a  general  as  Caesar,  nor  as 
;reat  a  man.  7.  He  is  more  beloved,  but  not  so  much  admired  as 
3ynthio.  8.  Sincerity  is  as  valuable,  and  even  more  so,  than 
knowledge. 

RULE  24. 

1.  I  never  saw  such  a  tall  man.  2.  Did  you  ever  see  such  beau- 
iful  trees  ?  3.  He  was  such  an  extravagant  young  man,  that  he 
spent  his  whole  patrimony  in  a  few  years.  4.  I  never  saw  such 
arge  potatoes.     5.  I  never  knew  such  a  quarrelsome  fellow. 

RULE  25. 

1.  Ah!  wretched  I,  how  ungrateful.  2.  Oh!  happy  them,  sur- 
rounded with  so  many  blessings.  3.  How  swiftly  our  time  passes 
iway,  and  ah  !  we,  how  little  concerned  to  improve  it,  4.  Alas  ! 
dm,  where  is  he  now  ?     5.  Welcome  thee,  joyous  spring. 


began  my  school  yesterday.  8.  He  would  not  have  gone,  if  he 
had  known  it.  9.  Dick  has  frozen  his  ears.  10.  The  house  was 
shaken  by  the  violence  of  the  storm.  11.  Harriet  has  woven  twen- 
ty yards  of  cloth  to-day.  12.  The  bird  has  flow?i  from  the  tree. 
13.  He  has  drunk  no  spirits  these  two  years.  14.  He  had  written 
and  read  much  on  the  subject.  15.  The  following  toasts  were 
drunk  at  the  late  celebration. 

RULE  18. 

1.  Please  to  sit  down  and  lay  your  hat  on  the  table.  2.  I  thank 
you,  sir,  I  would  rather  stand  than  sit  for  I  am  tired  of  sitting.  3. 
We  lay  in  bed  this  morning  till  breakfast  time.  4.  Where  did  you 
sit  last  Sabbath  at  Church  ?  5.1  sat  with  my  brother.  6.  He 
generally  sits  up  very  late  evenings,  and  lies  abed  late  mornings. 
7.  James  was  tired,  and  he  has  just  lain  down  to  rest.  8.  Please 
to  sit  up  to  the  table,  ladies.  9.  I  sat  on  the  hind  seat  of  the  stage 
all  day.  10.  I  have  laid  the  book  on  the  shelf.  11.  It  lies  on  the 
table.  12.  I  have  set  things  in  order.  13.  I  saw  my  old  friend 
last  week.  14.1  saw  that  every  thing  was  in  order,  and  then  took 
my  departure. 

RULE  19. 

1.  There  is  great  danger  of  children's  being  humored  too  much 
by  their  mothers.  2.  I  read  an  account  yesterday,  of  a  woman's 
having  been  burnt  to  death  by  her  clothes'  accidentally  taking  fire. 
3.  There  is  official  intelligence  of  a  great  battle's  having  been  fought 
between  the  two  armies. 

RULE  20. 

1.  I  found  my  friend  in  much  better  circumstances  than  I  ex- 
pected to  Jind  him.  2.  I  intended  to  write  by  the  last  mail.  3. 
George  expected  to  receive  an  answer  last  week.  4.  The  prisoner 
was  acquitted,  although  he  was  supposed,  by  many,  to  have  been 
concerned  in  the  plot  for  which  he  was  indicted. 

RULE  21. 

1.  By  the  exercising  of  our  judgment,  it  is  improved.  2.  By 
the  observing  of  truth,  thou  wilt  command  esteem.  3.  This  was  a 
betraying  of  the  trust  reposed  in  him.  4.  A  person  cannot  be 
wise  or  good  without  the  taking  of  pains  for  it.  5.  The  learning 
of  languages  is  very  difficult. 

RULE  22. 

1.  I  do  not  envy  any  body.  2.  I  think  I  cannot  help  him  any 
more.  3.  Death  spareth  none.  4.  I  cannot  by  any  means  allow 
him  that  privilege. 

RULE  23. 

1.  This  writirg  is  not  so  good  as  that.  2.  The  place  is  not  so 
pleasant  as  we  expected.  3.  Ben  is  not  so  tall  as  Cyp.  4.  She  is 
not  so  old  as  her  husband.  5.  Sophia  does  not  behave  so  well  as 
Mary-  6.  Pompey  was  not  so  great  a  general  as  Caesar,  nor  so 
great  a  man.  7'.  He  is  more  beloved  than  Cynthio,  but  not  so 
much  admired.  8.  Sincerity  is  as  valuable  as  knowledge,  and  even 
more  so. 

RULE  24. 

1.  I  never  saw  so  tall  a  man.  2.  Did  you  ever  see  so  beauti- 
ful trees  ?  3.  He  was  so  extravagant  a  young  man,  that  he  spent 
his  whole  patrimony  in  a  few  years.  4.  I  never  saw  so  large  po- 
tatoes.    5.  I  never  knew  so  quarrelsome  a  fellow. 

RULE  25. 

1.  Ah!  wretched  me,  how  ungrateful.  2.  O!  happy  they,  sur- 
rounded with  so  many  blessings.  3.  How  swiftly  our  time  passes 
away,  and  ah !  us,  how  little  concerned  to  improve  it.  4.  Alas  ! 
he,  where  is  he  now  ?     5.  Welcome  thou,  joyous  spring  ! 


36 


BOOK    SECOND. 


RULE  26. 

1.  The  inquisitive  is  generally  talkative.  2.  The  generous  nev- 
er recounts,  minutely,  the  actions  they  have  done. 

EULE  27. 

1.  He  that  wishes  to  be  great,  let  him  pay  diligent  attention  to 
his  study.  2.  Whoever  entertains  such  an  opinion,  he  judges  er- 
roneously. 

RULE  28. 

1.  To  live  soberly,  righteously,  and  piously,  are  required  of  all 
men.     2.  To  conquer  or  to  die  were  his  desperate  resolution. 

RULE  29, 

# 

1.  On  this  occasion  the  pronoun  is  governed  by,  and  consequent- 
ly agrees  with,  the  preceding  word, 

RULE  30. 

1.  Each  day  and  hour  of  our  lives  bring  new  expressions  of  the 
divine  munificence.  2.  Every  star  and  planet,  that  adorn  the 
firmament,  declare  the  glory  of  God.  3.  You  may  take  either  of 
the  three  books. 

RULE  31. 

1.  I  do  not  doubt  but  what  he  did  it  for  the  best.  2.  I  do  not 
care  whether  he  succeeds  or  no.  3.  Whether  I  shall  come  or  no, 
is  altogether  uncertain. 

RULE  32. 

1.  He  or  I  is  going  to  college.  2.  I  or  thou  have  been  greatly 
in  fault. 

RULE  33. 

1.  Many  words  they  darken  speech.  2.  Ignatius,  who  was 
bishop  of  Antioch,  he  came  with  the  apostles.  3.  John  Baxter, 
his  book. 

RULE  34. 

1.  His  engagements  were  such  that  would  not  admit  of  his  ab- 
sence. 2.  We  should  avoid  such  persons  who  oppose  the  truth. 
3.  The  Amazon  as  in  South  America,  which  is  the  largest  river  in 
the  world.  4.  Martha  said  that  Mary  had  injured  her  friend.  5. 
The  love  of  riches,  which  are  the  root  of  all  evil,  is  a  prevailing 
sin. 

RULE  35. 

1.  The  apple  tastes  sweetly.  2.  The  moon  looks  brightly.  3. 
The  fields  appear  very  pleasantly.     4.  The  clouds  look  darkly. 

RULE  36. 

1.  Amanda  lost  a  shawl  and  a  new  pair  of  gloves.  2.  This  is  a 
fine  piece  of  cloth.  3.  Here  is  a  superfine  barrel  of  flour,  a  sweet 
firkin  of  butter,  and  a  fresh  hamper  of  eggs.  4.  The  two  last  are 
a  present.  5.  Senex  is  .an  old,  crabbed  man.  6.  Juliana  is  a  lit- 
tle, excellent  girl.  7.  Parse  the  six  first  lines,  and  omit  the  three 
last.  8.  Sing  the  four  first  verses.  9.  I  never  had  a  worser  pen. 
10.  Virtue  is  the  chiefest  good  of  man.  11.  He  is  the  most  pru- 
dentest  man  in  town.  12.  This  is  the  most  usefulest  book  I  ever 
read.     13.  He  is  the  chiefest  among  ten  thousand. 

RULE  37. 

1.  Joseph  is  six  foot  and  four  inches  high.  2.  I  sold  my  horse 
for  one  hundred  pound  in  cash. 

RULE  38. 

1.  We  left  there  at  five,  and  arrived  at  New  York  about  six  in 
the  evening.  2.  We  set  out  from  there  in  the  morning,  and  are  to 
go  from  here  in  the  evening.      3.  Edward  showed  me  a  letter 


RULE  26. 

1.  The  inquisitive  are  generally  talkative.  2.  The  generous 
never  recount,  minutely,  the  actions  they  have  doner 

RULE  27. 

1.  Let  him  that  wishes  to  be  great,  pay  diligent  attention  to  his 
study.    2.  Whoever  entertains  such  an  opinion,  judges  erroneously. 

RULE  28. 

1.  To  live  soberly,  righteously,  and  piously,  is  required  of  all 
men.     2.  To  conquer  or  to  die  was  his  desperate  resolution, 

RULE  29. 

1.  On  this  occasion,  the  pronoun  is  governed  by  the  preceding 
word,  and  consequently  agrees  with  it. 

RULE  30. 

1.  Each  day  and  each  hour  of  our  lives  brings  new  expressions 
of  the  divine  munificence.  2.  Every  star  and  planet,  that  adorns 
the  firmament,  declares  the  glory  of  God.  3.  You  may  take  any 
one  of  the  three  books. 

RULE  31. 

1.  I  do  not  doubt  but  that  he  did  it  for  the  best.  2.  I  do  not 
care  whether  he  succeed  or  not.  3.  Whether  I  shall  come  or  not, 
is  altogether  uncertain. 

RULE  32. 

1.  He  or  I  am  going  to  college.  2.  I  or  thou  hast  been  greatly 
in  fault. 

RULE  33. 

1.  Many  words  darken  speech.  2.  Ignatius,  who  was  Bishop 
of  Antioch,  came  with  the  apostles.     3.  John  Baxter's  book. 

RULE  34. 

1.  His  engagements  were  such  as  would  not  admit  of  his  ab- 
sence. 2.  We  should  avoid  such  persons  as  oppose  the  truth.  3. 
The  Amazon,  which  is  the  largest  river  in  the  world,  is  in  South 
America.  4.  Martha  said  that  Mary  had  injured  her  own  friend. 
5.  The  love  of  riches,  which  is  the  root  of  all  evil,  is  a  prevailing 
sin. 

RULE  35. 

1.  The  apple  tastes  sweet.  2.  The  moon  looks  bright.  3.  The 
fields  appear  very  pleasant.     4.  The  clouds  look  dark. 

RULE  36. 

1.  Amanda  lost  a  shawl  and  a  pair  of  nexc  gloves.  2.  This  is  a 
piece  of  fine  cloth.  3.  Here  is  a  barrel  of  superfine  flour,  a  firkin 
of  sweet  butter,  and  a  hamper  of  fresh  eggs.  4.  The  last  tico  are 
a  present.  5.  Senex  is  a  crabbed  old  man.  6.  Juliana  is  an  ex- 
cellent little  girl.  7  Parse  the  first  six  lines,  and  omit  the  last  three. 
8.  Sing  the  first  four  verses.  9.  I  never  had  a  worse  pen.  10. 
Virtue  is  the  chief  good  of  man.  11.  He  is  the  most  prudent  man 
in  town.  12.  This  is  the  most  useful  book  I  ever  read.  13.  He 
is  the  chief  among  ten  thousand. 

RULE  37. 

1.  Joseph  is  six  feet  and  four  inches  high.  2.  I  sold  my  horse 
for  one  hundred  pounds  in  cash. 

RULE  38. 

1.  We  left  that  place  at  five,  and  arrived  at  New  York  about 
six  in  the  evening.  2.  We  set  out  from  thai 'place  in  the  morning 
and  are  to  go  from  this  place  in  the  evening.     3.  Edward  showed 


BOOK    SECOND, 


37 


where  the  account  was  given  at  large.     4.  He  said  how  I  had  in- 
jured him,  and  how  he  was  determined  to  have  satisfaction. 

RULE  39. 

1.  They  all  went  to  church  but  he.  2.  They  all  behaved  well 
but  he  and  she.  3.  He  gave  all  a  present  but  we.  4.  Divide  the 
money  equally  between  the  three  brothers. 

RULE  40. 

1.  "We  have  within  us  an  intelligent  principle,  distinct  from  body 
and  from  matter.  2.  A  humble  Christian.  3.  Reason  was  given 
to  a  man  for  the  control  of  his  passions. 

RULE  41. 

1.  My  father's  mother's,  and  uncle  s  advice.  2.  The  silk  was  ' 
purchased  at  Brown's  the  mercer's  and  haberdasher's.  3.  This 
measure  gained  the  king,  as  well  as  the  people's  approbation.  4. 
The  world's  government  is  not  left  to  chance.  5.  This  is  my  wife's 
brother's  partner's  house.  6.  The  extent  of  the  prerogative  of  the 
king  of  England  is  sufficiently  ascertained.  7.  This  picture  of  the 
general's  does  not  much  resemble  him.  8  These  pictures  of  Na- 
poleon were  sent  to  him  from  Italy.  9.  This  is  the  eldest  son  of 
the  king  of  England's.  10.  They  implicitly  obeyed  their  protec- 
tor's, as  they  called  him,  imperious  mandates. 

RULE  42." 

1.  Between  you  and  I,  there  is  some  disparity  of  years.  2.  If 
he  possess  common  capacity  to  learn,  and  is  a  good  reader,  he  will 
soon  acquire  a  competent  knowledge  of  grammar. 

RULE  43. 

1.  I  see  my  old  friend,  Warren,  yesterday.  2.  There  was  no 
water,  and  he  died  for  thirst.  3.  We  can  fully  confide  on  none  but 
the  truly  good.  4.  Many  have  profited  from  good  advice.  5.  I 
have  no  occasion  of  his  services.  6.  Her  sobriety  is  no  derogation 
to  her  understanding.  7.  The  error  was  occasioned  by  compli- 
ance to  earnest  entreaty.  8.  This  is  a  principle  that  is  consonant 
with  our  nature.  9.  We  should  entertain  no  prejudice  to  simple 
and  rustic  persons.  10.  I  have  written  to  my  friend  last  week 
but  have  yet  received  no  answer.  11.  He  is  a  person  whom  I  re- 
member these  many  years.  12.  I  have  been-  in  London  a  year, 
and  seen  the  king  last  summer.  13.  After  we  visited  the  city,  we 
returned,  content  and  thankful,  to  our  peaceful  habitation.  14. 
To-morrow  is  Friday.  15.  Next  week  is  the  time  for  holding  the 
annual  meeting.  16.  "  Dismiss  us  from  thy  service,  after  we  have 
again  sung  to  thy  praise."  17.  John  will  earn  his  wages,  when 
his  service  is  completed.  18.  I  purpose  to  go  to  New  York  next 
week,  and  after  I  have  finished  there,  to  proceed  to  the  southern 
states.  19.  And  he  that  was  dead  setup,  and  begun  to  speak.  20. 
His  sea-sickness  was  so  great,  that  I  often  feared  he  would  have 
died,  before  our  arrival.  21.  I  very  much  desire,  that  I  might  be 
more  watchful  in  future.  22.  Several  alterations  and  additions 
have  been  made  to  the  work.  23.  The  first  proposal  was  essen- 
tially different,  and  inferior  to  the  second.  24.  Neither  has  he, 
nor  any  other  persons,  suspected  so  much  dissimulation.  25.  The 
intentions  of  some  of  these  philosophers  ;  nay,  of  many,  might,  and 
probably  were  good.  2G.  "The  Lord  hath  given,  and  the  Lord  hath 
taken  away."  27.  If  there  be  an  honest  man  in  the  world,  Charles 
is  one.  28.  Sweet  apples  are  said  to  be  as  good,  and  even  better, 
for  swine,  than  potatoes.  29.  If  thou  sincerely  desire,  and  earn- 
estly pursuest  virtue,  she  will  assuredly  be  found  of  thee.  30.  Be 
that  as  it  will,  he  cannot  justify  his  conduct.  31.  I  know  a  man 
that  his  hair  was  gray  before  he  was  eighteen.  32.  A  pair  of 
stairs.  33.  He  is  to  blame.  34.  He  was  bred  and  born  in  Troy. 
35.  Come  above,  or  below  stairs.  36.  He  has  got  to  learn.  37. 
He  meant  to  have  gone.  38.  His  master  learns  him.  39.  He 
took  better  than  half.     40.  He  thinks  just  like  she  does.     41.  I 


me  a  letter  in  which  the  account  was  given  at  large.  4.  He  said 
that  I  had  injured  him  and  that  he  was  determined  to  have  satis- 
faction. 

RULE  39. 

1.  They  all  went  to  church  but  him.  2.  They  all  behaved  well 
but  him  and  her.  3.  He  gave  all  a  present  but  us.  4.  Divide  the 
money  equally  among  the  three  brothers. 

RULE  40. 

1.  We  have  within  us  an  intelligent  principle,  distinct  from  the 
body  and  from  matter.  2.  An  humble  Christian.  3.  Reason  was 
given  to  man  for  the  control  of  his  passions. 

RULE  41. 

1.  My  father,  mother,  and  uncle's  advice.  2.  The  silk  was  pur- 
chased at  Brown's,  the  mercer  and  haberdasher.  3.  This  measure 
gained  the  king's,  as  well  as  the  people's  approbation.  4.  The 
government  of  the  world  is  not  left  to  chance.  5.  This  house  be- 
longs to  the  partner  of  my  wife's  brother.  6.  The  extent  of  the 
king  of  England's  prerogative  is  sufficiently  ascertained.  7.  This 
picture  of  the  general  does  not  much  resemble  him.  8.  These 
pictures  of  Napoleon's  were  sent  to  him  from  Italy.  9.  This  is  the 
eldest  son  of  the  king  of  England.  10.  They  implicitly  obeyed 
the  imperious  mandates  of  their  protector,  as  they  called  him. 

RULE  42. 

1.  Between  you  and  me,  there  is  some  disparity  of  years.  2.  If 
he  possess  common  capacity  to  learn,  and  be  a  good  reader,  he  will 
soon  acquire  a  competent  knowledge  of  grammar. 

RULE  43. 

1 .  I  saw  my  old  friend,  Warren,  yesterday.  2.  There  was  no 
water,  and  he  died  of  thirst.  3.  We  can  fully  confide  in  none  but 
the  truly  good.  4.  Many  have  profited  by  good  advice.  5. 1  have 
no  occasion  for  his  services  6.  Her  sobriety  is  no  derogation/rom 
her  understanding.  7.  The  error  was  occasioned  by  compliance 
with  earnest  entreaty.  8.  This  is  a  principle  in  unison  with  our 
nature.  9.  We  should  entertain  no  prejudice  against  simple  and 
rustic  persons.  10.  I  wrote  to  my  friend  last  week,  but  have  yet 
received  no  answer.  11.  He  is  a  person  whom  I  have  remembered 
these  many  years.  12.  I  have  been  in  London  a  year,  and  I  saw 
the  king  last  summer.  13.  After  we  had  visited  the  city,  we  re- 
turned, content  and  thankful,  to  our  peaceful  habitation.  14.  To- 
morrow will  be  Friday.  15.  Next  week  will  be  the  time  for  hold- 
ing the  annual  meeting  16.  "  Dismiss  us  from  thy  service,  after 
we  shall  have  again  sung  to  thy  praise."  17.  John  will  have  earn- 
ed his  wages,  when  his  service  is  completed.  18.  I  purpose  to  go 
to  New  York  next  week,  and  after  I  shall  have  finished  there,  to 
proceed  to  the  southern  states.  19.  And  he  that  had  been  dead 
sat  up,  and  began  to  speak.  20.  His  sea-sickness  was  so  great, 
that  I  often  feared  he  would  die  before  our  arrival.  21.  I  very 
much  desire,  that  I  may  be  more  watchful  in  future.  22.  The  work 
has  received  several  alterations  and  additions.  23.  The  first  pro- 
posal was  essentially  different  from  the  second,  and  inferior  to  it. 
24  Neither  has  he,  nor  have  any  other  persons,  suspected  so  much 
dissimulation.  25.  The  intentions  of  some  of  these  philosophers  ; 
nay,  of  many,  might  have  been,  and  probably  were  good.  26.  "The 
Lord  gave,  and  the  Lord  hath  taken  away."  27.  If  there  is  an 
honest  man  in  the  world,  Charles  is  one.  28.  Sweet  apples  are 
said  to  be  as  good  for  swine  as  potatoes,  and  even  better.  29.  If 
thou  sincerely  desire,  and  earnestly  pursue  virtue,  she  will  assured- 
ly be  found  of  thee.  30.  Be  that  as  it  may,  he  cannot  justify  his 
conduct.  31.  I  know  a  man  whose  hair  was  gray  before  he  was 
eighteen.  32.  A  flight  or  set  of  stairs.  33.  He  is  blamable.  34. 
He  was  born  and  bred  in  Troy.  35.  Come  up  or  down  stairs.  36. 
He  must  or  shall  learn.  37.  He  meant  to  go.  38.  His  master 
teaches  him.     39.  He  took  more  than  half.     40.  He  thinks  just  as 


38 


BOOK     SECOND. 


am  done.  42.  You  had  as  good  go.  43.  I  will  not  go  without 
you  do.  44.  The  reason  is  because.  45.  They  went  of  an  even- 
ing. 46.  We  will  have  fair  weather.  47.  I  expect  it  was.  48. 
This  is  a  very  healthy  country.  49.  Apples  are  very  plenty  this 
year.  50.  I  am  mistaken.  51.  I  saw  a  church,  that  the  founda- 
tion is  a  solid  rock.  52.  The  broad  and  narrow  way  are  open  be- 
fore us  ;  this  leads  to  misery,  that  to  happiness.  53.  I  had  ought 
to  go.  54.  Those  are  very  cheap  goods.*  55.  These  houses,  in 
the  next  square,  are  my  brother's.  56.  You  no  need  to  do  it.  57. 
Less  go  home.  58.  In  religious  concerns,  or  what  is  considered 
to  be  such,  every  man  must  stand  or  fall  according  to  the  decision 
of  the  great  Judge. 


she  does.  41.  I  have  done.  42>  You  may  as  well  go.  43.  I  will 
not  go  unless  you  do.  44.  The  reason  is  that.  45.  They  went  on 
an  evening.  46.  We  shall  have  fair  weather.  47.  I  believe  it 
was.  48.  This  is  a  very  healthful  country.  49.  Apples  are  very 
plentiful  this  year.  50.  I  mistake,  51.  I  saw  a  church,  the  foun- 
dation of  which  is  a  solid  rock.  52.  The  broad  and  narrow  ways 
are  open  before  us  ;  that  leads  to  misery,  and  this  to  happiness. 
53.  I  ought  to  go.  54.  These  are  very  cheap  goods.  55.  Those 
houses,  in  the  next  square  are  my  brother's.  56.  You  need  not 
do  it.  57.  Let's  or  let  us  go  home.  58.  In  religious  concerns,  or 
what  are  considered  to  be  such,  every  man  must  stand  or  fall,  ac- 
cording to  the  decision  of  the  great  Judge. 


*  Holding  them  in  his  hands. 


FALSE  GKAMMAR, 

ADAPTED  TO  THE  RULES  OF  ORTHOGRAPHY. 


RULE  1. 

It  is  no  great  merit  to  spel  properly ;  but  a  great  defect  to  do  it 
incorrectly. — Jacob  worshipped  his  Creator,  leaning  on  the  top  of 
his  staf. — We  may  place  too  little  as  well  as  too  much  stres  upon 
dreams. — Our  manners  should  be  neither  gros,  nor  excessively  re- 
fined. 

RULE  2. 

A  carr  signifies  a  chariot  of  war,  or  a  small  carriage  of  burden. 
In  the  names  of  druggs  and  plants,  the  mistake  in  a  word  may  en- 
danger life. 

Nor  undelightful  is  the  ceaseless  humm 

To  him  who  muses  through  the  woods  at  noon. 

The  finn  of  a  fish  is  the  limb  by  which  he  balances  his  body, 
and  moves  in  the  water. — Many  a  trapp  is  laid  to  insnare  the  feet 
of  youth. — Many  thousand  families  are  supported  by  the  simple 
business  of  making  matts. 

RULE  3. 

We  should  subject  our  fancys  to  the  government  of  reason. — If 
thou  art  seeking  for  the  living  amongst  the  dead,  thou  wearyest 
thyself  in  vain. — If  we  have  denyed  ourselves  sinful  pleasures, 
we  shall  be  great  gainers  in  the  end. — We  shall  not  be  the  happyer 
for  possessing  talents  and  affluence,  unless  we  make  a  right  use  of 
them. — The  truly  good  mind  is  not  dismaied  by  poverty,  afflictions 
or  death.  , 

RULE  4. 

It  is  a  great  blessing  to  have  a  sound  mind,  uninfluenced  by  fan- 
cy ful  humours. — Common  calamities,  and  common  blessings,  fall 
heavyly  upon  the  envious. — The  comelyness  of  youth  are  modesty 
and  frankness ;  of  age,  condescension  and  dignity. — When  we  act 
against  conscience,  we  become  the  destroiers  of  our  own  peace. — 
We  may  be  plaiful,  and  yet  innocent ;  grave,  and  yet  corrupt. — It 
is  only  from  general  conduct,  that  our  true  character  can  be  por- 
traied. 

RULE.  5. 

When  we  bring  the  lawmaker  into  contempt,  we  have  in  effect 
annuled  his  laws. — By  defering  our  repentance,  we  accumulate  our 
sorrows. — The  pupils  of  a  certain  ancient  philosopher,  were  not, 
during  their  first  years  of  study,  permited  to  ask  any  questions. — 


We  have  all  many  faillings  and  lapses  to  lament  and  recover. — 
There  is  no  affliction  with  which  we  are  visitted,  that  may  not  be 
improved  to  our  advantage. — The  Christian  Lawgiver  has  prohib- 
itted  many  things,  which  the  heathen  philosophers  allowed. 

RULE  6. 

Restlesness  of  mind  disqualifies  us,  both  for  the  enjoyment  of 
peace,  and  the  performance  of  our  duty. — The  arrows  of  calumny 
fall  harmlesly  at  the  feet  of  virtue. — The  road  to  the  blisful  re- 
gions, is  as  open  to  the  peasant  as  the  king. — A  chillness  or  shiv- 
ering of  the  body  generally  precedes  a  fever. — To  recommend 
virtue  to  others,  our  lights  must  shine  brightly,  not  dullly. 

The  silent  stranger  stood  amaz'd  to  see. 
Contempt  of  wealth,  and  willful  poverty. 

RULE  7. 

The  warmth  of  disputation,  destroys  that  sedatness  of  mind 
which  is  necessary  to  discover  truth. 

AH  these  with  ceasless  praise  his  works  behold, 
*  Both  day  and  night. 

In  all  our  reasonings,  our  minds  should  be  sincerly  employed 
in  the  pursuit  of  truth. — Rude  behavior,  and  indecent  language, 
are  peculiarly  disgracful  to  youth  of  education. — The  true  wor- 
ship of  God  is  an  important  and  aweful  service. — Wisdom  alone  is 
truely  fair ;  folly  only  appears  so. 

RULE  8. 

The  study  of  the  English  language  is  making  daily  advancment. 
A  judicious  arrangment  of  studies  facilitates  improvment. 

To  shun  allurments  is  not  hard, 

To  minds  resolv'ed,  forewarn'd,  and  well  prepar'd. 

RULE  9. 

Every  person  and  thing  connected  with  self,  is  apt  to  appear 
good  and  desireable  in  our  eyes. — Errors  and  misconduct  are  more 
excuseable  in  ignorant,  than  in  well-instructed  persons. — The  di- 
*vine  laws  are  not  reverseible  by  those  of  men. — Gratitude  is  a  for- 
ceible  and  active  principle  in  good  and  generous  minds. — Our  nat- 
ural and  involuntary  defects  of  body,  are  chwgable  upon  us. — We 
are  made  to  be  servicable  to  others,  as  well  as  to  ourselves. 


BOOK    SECOND. 


39 


RULE  10. 

An  obligeing  and  humble  disposition,  is  totally  unconnected  with 
a  servile  and  cringeing  humour. — By  solaceing  the  sorrows  of  oth- 
ers, the  heart  is  improved  at  the  same  time  that  our  duty  is  per- 
formed.— Labour  and  expense  are  lost  upon  a  droneish  spirit. — 
The  inadvertancies  of  youth  may  be  excused,  but  knaveish  tricks 
should  meet  with  severe  reproof. 


RULE  11. 

Lov.e  worketh  no  ill  to  our  neighbor,  and  is  the  fullfilling  of  the 
law. — That  which  is  sometimes  expedient,  is  not  allways  so. — We 
may  be  hurtfull  to  others,  by  our  example,  as  well  as  by  personal 
injuries. — Where  diligence  opens  the  door  of  the  understanding 
and  impartiality,  keeps  it,  truth  finds  an  entrance  and  a  wellcome 
too. 


REMARKS. 


The  Rules  of  Syntax  have  been  constructed  so  as  to  embrace  all  the  varieties  that  generally  occur  in  parsing;  but  as  our  language 

is  acknowledged  to  be  exceedingly  anomalous,  the  "Notes,  or  Observations"  which  follow,  are  so  framed  as  to  include 

most  of  the  irregularities  that  occur  in  composition.     Hence,  in  parsing  abstruse  sentences,  it  may  be  necessary 

to  refer  to  these  note3,  with  which  all  scholars  should  eventually  become  familiar. 


NOTES,  OR    OBSERVATIONS. 


Note  1.  The  relative  is  generally  the  nominative  case,  when 
no  nominative  comes  between  it  and  the  verb ;  as,  The  trees  which 
are  planted :  otherwise,  in  the  objective,  and  governed  by  the  next 
active  verb  or  participle  that  follows  it;  (unless  governed  by  a 
preposition,)  as,  The  trees  ichich  I  planted.  N.  B.  When  there 
are  two  antecedents  of  different  persons  to  which  a  relative  pronoun 
refers,  the  relative  and  verb  following,  as  well  as  the  possessive  pro- 
noun, may  agree  in  person  with  either,  though  usage  may  some- 
times offer  a  preference  ;  as,  I  am  a  man  who  mind  my  own  busi- 
ness ;  or,  I  am  a  man  who  minds  his  own  business.  But  when  one 
of  the  antecedents  has  been  preferred,  that  agreement  must  be  ob- 
served throughout  the  sentence ;  as,  I  am  he  who  counsels  and  ad- 
vises you  well ;  not,  who  counsels  and  advise  you  well. 

Note  2.  Nouns  that  signify  the  time  when  or  how  long,  or  that 
signify  space,  are  generally  governed  by  prepositions  understood ; 
as,  He  went  home  last  week ;  that  is,  on  last  week.  He  lived 
four  years  at  college ;  that  is,  during  four  years.  Walk  a  mile  ; 
that  is,  through  the  space  of  a  mile.  All  the  days  of  my  appointed 
time  will  I  wait ;  that  is,  through  all  the  days,  or  during  all  the 
days. 

Note  3.  After  the  adjectives  worth  and  like,  there  is  an  ellip- 
sis of  of  and  to  ;  as,  The  book  is  worth  a  dollar ;  that  is,  worthy  of 
a  dollar.  She  is  like  the  lovely  Thais  ;  that  is,  like  to  the  lovely 
Thais.  Prepositions  are  frequently  understood  ;  as,  We  are  going 
home;  that  is,  to  home.  Buy  him  some  books;  that  is, for  him. 
He  was  banished  the  kingdom;  that  is  from  the  kingdom. 

Note  4.  The  letter  o  before  nouns  in  the  phrases  one  o'clock, 
ten  o'clock,  &c,  is  a  contraction  of  on  ;  the  same  as  to  say,  one  on 
the  clock.  The  article  a,  before  participles,  in  the  phrases  a  fish- 
ing, a  walking,  a  hunting,  &c,  and  before  nouns,  as,  a  bed,  a  board, 
a  shore,  &c.,  is  generally  supposed  to  be  a  contraction  of  on  or  at. 

Note  5.  Nouns  of  dimensions,  and  the  like,  stand  without  a 
governing  word  ;  as,  They  built  a  wall  ten  feet  high  and  40  inches 
thick.     He  is  ten  years  old.     N.  B.  The  verb  needs  is  sometimes 


used  without  any  nominative  expressed  or  understood ;  as,  There 
is  no  evidence  of  the  fact,  and  there  needs  none. 

Note  6.  .  *  A  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood  may  be  governed  by 
a  verb,  noun,  adjective,  or  participle  ;  as,  He  loves  to  study — has  an 
opportunity  to  study ;  is  apt  to  learn,  and  is  endeavoring  to  learn. 
N.  B.  Than  and  as,  and  other  indeclinable  words,  sometimes  ap- 
pear to  govern  the  infinitive  mood ;  as,  Nothing  makes  a  man  sus- 
pect much,  more  than  to  know  little  ;  an  object  so  high  as  to  be 
invisible. 

Note  7.  A  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood  absolute,  stands  inde- 
pendent of  the  remaining  part  of  the  sentence ;  as,  To  confess  the 
truth,  I  was  in  fault. 

Note  8.  Participles,  like  verbs,  relate  to  nouns  or  pronouns  ; 
as,  I  saw  a  man  laboring  in  the  field.  They  sometimes  agree  with 
a  sentence,  or  part  of  a  sentence  ;  as,  According  to  history,  Alex- 
ander conquered  the  Persians.  But,  frequently  they  do  not  de- 
pend upon  any  particular  word  or  sentence ;  being  referable  to 
either  of  the  persons  indefinitely ;  as,  Granting  this  to  be  true,  it 
would  help  us  but  little. 

Note  9.  ^Adverbs  qualify  verbs,  participles,  adjectives,  and 
other  adverbs  ;  as,  He  spoke  eloquently ;  Having  lived  prudently, 
he  became  rich ;  She  is  unaffectedly  polite ;  She  writes  very  cor- 
rectly. No  exact  rule  can  be  given  for  tlie  placing  of  adverbs,  on 
all  occasions — though  the  general  rule  may  be  of  considerable  use ; 
but  the  easy  flow  and  perspicuity  of  the  phrase  are  the  things 
which  ought  to  be  chiefly  regarded.  When  two  auxiliaries  are 
used,  the  adverb  is  usually  placed  after  the  second;  as,  We  have 
been  kindly  treated.  The  adverb  there  is  sometimes  used  as  an  ex- 
pletive, or  as  a  word  that  adds  nothing  to  the  sense ;  as,  There  is  a 
person  at  the  door. 

*  This  note,  although  in  accordance  with  the  best  authority,  is  deemed  of  but 
little  consequence.  Mr.  Comley's  rule  on  the  subject  (if  any  be  necessary)  is  con- 
sidered preferable,  viz:  A  verb'in  the  infinitive  mood  is  always  governed  by  the 
preposition  to. 


40 


BOOK    SECOND. 


Note  10.  Articles  and  adjectives  belong  to  nouns,  which  they 
qualify  or  define ;  as,  Wise  men;  a  King;  this  book.  Adjectives 
sometimes  belong  to  verbs  in  the  infinitive  mood,  a  sentence,  or  part 
of  a  sentence  ;  as,  To  see  is  pleasant ;  To  be  blind  is  unfortunate. 
When  nouns  are  taken  in  their  most  extensive  signification,  they 
do  not  admit  articles  before  them ;  as,  Dogs  are  faithful ;  Horses 
are  useful ;  Man  is  the  Lord  of  creation.  Proper  nouns  seldom 
admit  articles  before  them  ;  being  sufficiently  definite  of  themselves. 
Sometimes,  however,  they  are  admissible ;  as,  The  earth,  the 
French,  the  illustrious  Franklin,  a  Mr.  Blake  addressed  the  meet- 
ing- 

Note  11.  The  Relative  Pronoun  what,  frequently  has  no  an- 
tecedent, but  stands,  immediately,  for  some  noun,  or  for  some  in- 
definite idea ;  and  should  be  parsed  (except  in  name,)  the  same  as 
a  personal  pronoun.  What  is  sometimes  used  as  an  interjection ; 
as,  What !  are  you  there  ? 

Note  12.  The  pronoun  it  sometimes  stands  for  a  sentence,  or 
part  of  a  sentence ;  as,  I  shall  go  to  Boston,  if  business  require  it. 
It  may  be  applied  to  any  being  or  thing  in  the  universe.  It  often 
represents  the  condition  of  persons  or  things  ;  as,  It  is  hot — that  is, 
the  weather ;  How  is  it  with  you  ?  &c.  The  personal  pronouns 
are  often  used  as  antecedents ;  as,  He,  who  obeys  not  the  laws,  is  a 
bad  man. 

Note  13.  The  article  a  is  used  before  few,  many,  dozen,  Sic, 
indicating,  collectively,  one  whole  number ;  as,  A  few  days  ;  a  hun- 
dred years,  &c.  The  is  sometimes  used  before  adverbs,  in  order 
to  mark  the  degree  more  strongly ;  as,  The  more  I  read  the  book, 
the  better  I  like  it.  N.  B.  A  is  nearly  synonymous  with  one,  and 
the  with  this  or  that.  A  often  includes  the  meaning  of  every  and 
each  ;  as,  He  clears  six  dollars  a  day. 

Note  14.  Prepositions,  in  their  original  and  literal  sense,  de- 
noted relation  of  place  ;  as,  Christ  was  crucified  between  two  thieves. 
But  they  are  now  used  figuratively,  to  express  other  relations ;  as, 
We  serve  under  a  good  master.  When  two  prepositions  come  to- 
gether, the  first  is  used  adverbially  ;  as,  He  came  down  from  the 
mountain. 

Note  15.  In  English,  many  verbs  are  sometimes  used  in  a 
transitive,  and  sometimes  in  an  intransitive,  signification — the  con- 
struction, only,  determining  of  which  kind  they  are  ;  as,  I  wrote  a 
letter  ;  He  writes  very  fast. 

Note  16.  A  passive  verb  will  always  admit  by  or  with  after  it, 
and  make  sense. 

Note  17.  The  natural  division  of  time  or  tense  is  into  three 
parts — the  present,  past  and  future  ;  as,  Present,  I  am  writing  ; 
Past,  I  wrote,  have  written,  or  had  written  ;  Future,  I  shall  or  will 
write,  or  shall  have  written.  But,  to  mark  time  with  more  precis- 
ion, grammarians  generally  make  use  of  six. 

Note  18.  The  Potential  mood  becomes  Subjunctive,  by  means 
of  the  conjunctions  if,  unless,  except,  Sec,  prefixed ;  as,  If  I  could 
deceive  him,  I  should  abhor  it. 

Note  19.  The  distinguished  use  of  the  Conjunction  is  to  save 
the  repetition  of  words  ;  as,  Tom,  Dick,  and  Harry,  live  in  York. 
The  above  contains  three  simple  sentences — the  same  as  to  say, 
Tom  lives  in  York,  Dick  lives  in  York,  &c.  Hence  it  appears, 
that  conjunctions  often  connect  sentences,  when  they  appear  to 
connect  only  words. 

Note  20.  The  adjective  many,  when  followed  by  the  article  a, 
is  joined  to  a  singular  noun  ;  as,  Many  a  boy  has  been  ruined,  by 
keeping  bad  company. 

Note  21.  Poets  and  some  prose  Avriters,  occasionally  take  the 
license  of  using  the  plural  form  of  the  verb  be  when  it  has  a  singu- 
lar nominative ;  as,  "  Seek  not  temptation  then,  which  to  avoid 
were  better,"  i.  e.  would  be  better. 


Note  22.  In  forming  the  plural  of  complex  nouns,  usage  is 
not  uniform.  Some  good  writers  pluralize  the  name  only ;  as, 
the  Miss  Taylors;  —  others  vary  the  title  only;  as,  the  Misses 
Taylor ; — while  others  vary  both ;  as,  the  Misses  Taylors.  Of 
these  three  methods,  sometimes  one  may  be  preferable,  and  some- 
times another.     Examples, 

The  first  method  is  preferable,  when  the  numerals  two  or  three, 
Sec,  are  prefixed ;  as,  the  two  Miss  Browns  ;  the  three  Mr.  Kings, 
Also  when  it  lessens  the  difficulty  of  pronunciation ;  as,  the  Dea. 
Smiths,  the  Gen.  Scotts,  Esq.  Spragues.  [Instead  of  the  Deacons 
Smith,  the  Generals  Scott,  &c]  Also  when  the  abbreviated  title, 
Mrs.*  (having  no  corresponding  plural)  is  applied  to  more  than 
one,  we  are  compelled  to  adopt  this  method ;  as,  the  Mrs.  Pratts. 
And  when  Miss  or  Mr.  thus  applied,  is  connected  with  Mrs.  in  such 
instances,  the  same  method  is  usually  observed ;  as,  the  Mrs.  and  Miss 
Pratts ;  the  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Pratts.  This  method,  or  the  third,  is 
likewise  preferable  when  the  second  obscures  the  sense ;  as,  the 
Miss  Makes,  and  cousins,  or  the  Misses  Makes,  Sec  [To  say,  the 
"  Misses  Blake  and  cousins,"  might  imply  one  or  more  of  the 
same  name.] 

The  second  method  should  be  adopted,  when  a  singular  name  has 
the  -plural  form  ;  as,  the  Misses  Woods,  the  Misses  Jacobs,  the  Misses 
Brooks.  In  speaking  of  married  ladies,  in  such  instances,  we  say, 
the  two  Mrs.  Woods.  This  method  should  also  be  used  when  it 
lessens  the  difficulty  of  pronunciation ;  as,  the  Misses  Moses,  [in- 
stead of  the  Miss  Moseses,  or  the  Misses  Moseses.~\ 

The  third  method,  or  the  second,  is  generally  adopted  (especial- 
ly when  applied  to  Companies  or  Co-partnerships)  in  the  use  of 
the  title,  Mr.,  which  has  an  abbreviated  French  plural ;  as,  the 
Messrs.-f  Harpers,  or  the  Messrs.  Harper;  Messrs.  Phillips,  Sampson 
8?  Co.  Also  when  complex  nouns  are  common,  the  third  method 
is  generally  used  ;  as,  Messrs.  Editors. 

N.  B.  As  all  titles  partake  somewhat  of  the  nature  of  adjec- 
tives, which  are  seldom  varied  on  account  of  number,  and  as  it  ev- 
idently tends  more  to  uniformity  (some  titles  having  no  abbreviat- 
ed plurals)  the  first  method,  with  the  above  mentioned  exceptions, 
is  generally  deemed  the  most  eligible. 

Note  23.  Letters  and  figures  (used  merely  as  nouns,  without 
regard  to  their  appropriate  signification)  generally  form  the  plural 
with  an  apostrophe  and  the  letter  s  ;  as,  the  a's  and  the  b's,  the  2's 
and  the  3's,  dott  i's  and  cross  t's.  Some  good  writers  form  the  plu- 
ral of  words  also  (when  used  as  above)  in  the  same  manner:  as 
the  if's  and  the  and's,  the  of's  and  the  to's. 

Note  24.  Compound  nouns  ending  inful,  as  well  as  most  oth- 
er compounds,  have  the  regular  plural ;  as,  spoon-fids,  pail-fids, 
mouse-traps,  tea-pots,  Sec  But  when  composed  of  two  nouns  con- 
nected by  a  preposition,  the  plural  is  generally  formed  by  adding 
s  to  the  first  noun  ;  as,  sons-in-law,  mother s-in-lata.  And  when 
composed  of  an  adjective  and  noun,  some  authors  also  pluralize  the 
first,  or  principal  word ;  as,  courts-marshal,  knights-errand,  cousins- 
german,  aids-de-camp,  Sec  Though  no  good  reason  can  be  assign- 
ed, it  is  believed,  why  such  compounds  should  not  have  the  regular 
plural  as  well  as  coach-fuls,  bag-fuls,  Sec  The  same  remarks 
will  apply  to  other  similar  compounds ;  such  as  two-year-old,  three- 
year-old,  Sec ;  as,  I  own  10  two-year-olds,  and  8  three-year-olds. 

Note  25.  For  sentences  like  the  following — the  book  is  print- 
ing, the  house  is  building,  Sec,  some  good  writers  substitute  the 
passive  form ;  as,  the  book  is  being  printed,  the  house  is  being 
built.  But  the  first  form  is  considered  preferable,  [a,  the  con- 
traction of  at,  being  always  expressed  or  understood  in  such  cases : 
as,  he  has  gone  a  hunting.]  A  is  sometimes  employed  in  the 
sense  of  the  preposition  of;  as,  Thomas  a  Becket  [o/Becket]  and 
sometimes  in  the  sense  of  to  ;  as,  flour  sold  at  $4,50  a  $4,58 —  and 
occasionally  it  is  used  as  a  mere  expletive  prefix ;  as,  "  Tom's  a 
cold." 


*  Pronounced  M  h$-sh. 


t  Pronounced  MitK  wa. 


BOOK    SECOND, 


41 


Note  26.  The  same  word  is  sometimes  common  and  sometimes 
proper.  Examples^ — Alexander  conquered  the  Persians  ;  I  saw 
several  Persians.  In  the  first  sentence,  Persians  is  a  proper  noun, 
because  it  is  used  to  distinguish  a  particular  nation  from  all  other 
nations ;  but  in  the  second  sentence  it  becomes  common,  because  it 
is  a  name  common  to  all  other  individuals  of  the  same  nation. 
Proper  nouns  also  generally  become  common,  by  annexing  an  ar- 
ticle to  them  ;  as,  She  is  reading  the  lives  of  the  twelve  Geesars  ; 
he  is  a  Otcerb.  And  common  nouns  become  proper,  when  applied 
to  the  Deity  ;  as,  King,  Pother,  Lord. 

Note  27.  The  adverbs,  here,  there,  and  where,  are  now  gener- 
ally substituted  in  common  writing  and  speaking,  for  hither,  thither, 
or  whither  ;  as,  come  here  ;  where  are  you  going  ?  But  in  grave 
or  solemn  style,  the  latter  are  preferable ;  as,  "  Come  hitli&r  all  ye 
weary  souls."     "  Whitfier  shall  ye  flee  ?" 

Note  28.  The  expressions,  had  rather,  had  better,  had  as  lief, 
or  as  Uevt,  though  anomalous,  are  well  authorized  ;  as,  I  had  rather 
stay,  but  you  had  belter  go ;  because  Mary  had  as  lief  take  your 
place  as  not.  But  had  ought  is  a  gross  vulgarism,  and  should  al- 
ways be  avoided ;  as,  He  had  ought  to  do  it.  It  should  be,  He 
ought  to  do  it.  [Ought  being  a  defective  verb,  and  used  only  in 
the  present  and  perfect  tenses.]  Had  like  and  had  as  goods  are 
also  incorrect ;  as,  I  had  like  to  have  gone  ;  you  had  as  goods  do 
it.  The  word,  like  or  liked  is  sometimes  improperly  used  without 
being  joined  to  had ;  as,  I  liked  to  have  killed  the  squirrel  with  a 
stone. 

Note  29.  Most  authors,  among  whom  is  Webster,  allow  that 
some  transitive  verbs  govern  two  objective  cases,  one  expressing 
the  person  and  the  other  the  thing  ;  as,  He  asked  John  a  guinea 
for  the  cane.  Some  however  contend,  that  in  all  such  cases,  there 
is  an  ellipses  of  a  preposition,  as  in  the  following  sentence :  He 
taught  the  bogs  philosophy.  That  is,  he  taught  philosophy  to  the 
boys  ;  or  he  taught  to  the  boys  philosophy.  Many  nouns  do  cer- 
tainly carry  the  appearance  of  being  governed  by  a  verb,  when 
they  are,  in  fact,  governed  by  a  preposition  understood. 

Note  30.  Intransitive  verbs  sometimes  assume  a  transitive 
form,  and  may  be  said  to  govern,  although  the  nouns  which  follow 
them  are  not  strictly  their  objects ;  as,  Joseph  dreamed  a  dream  ; 
to  live  a  life  of  virtue  ;  to  run  a  race ;  to  sleep  the  sleep  of  death  ; 
to  die  the  death  of  the  righteous  ;  he  walked  his  horse ;  he  danced 
a  hornpipe.  Nearly  allied  to  this  idiom  is  that  of  using  after 
transitive  verbs,  certain  nouns  which  do  not  appear  to  be  strictly 
the  objects  of  the  verbs,  but  still  are  called  objective  cases,  and 
governed  by  them ;  as,  The  piece  of  gold  weighs  a  pound ;  the 
cloth  measures  ten  yards. 

Note  31.  One  or  two  authors  make  passive  verbs  govern  the 
objective  case  ;  as,  He  was  asked  a  question  ;  she  was  denied  admis- 
sion, &c. ;  but  in  all  such  examples,  according  to  our  most  approv- 
ed authors,  the  noun  which  follows  is  either  governed  by  some 
preposition  understood,  or-  stands  without  a  governing  word. 

Note  32.  There  are  several  nouns  of  multitude  which  do  not 
vary  their  forms  in  the  plural  number ;  as,  Six  Dozen  ;  Five  Hun- 
dred ;  Three  Score  and  Ten.  The  words,  cannon,  shot,  &c,  and 
horse  and  foot,  [denoting  bodies  of  soldiers]  although  singular  in 
form,  are  frequently  used  in  a  plural  sense  without  any  variation  ; 
as,  A  body  of  1000  foot  and  500  horse,  with  a  park  of  10  cannon, 
was  sent  to  reconnoiter  the  city,  and  several  shot  were  fired.  The 
wovd.  fish  has  a  plural  form,  but  is  frequently  used  in  the  plural 
sense  without  changing  its  singular  form  ;  as,  Pish  are  very  plenti- 
ful. The  names  of  all  kmd  of  fish,  when  used  in  the  plural,  are 
seldom  varied  from  the  singular  form ;  as,  shad,  mackerel,  hali- 
but, &c. 

Note  33.  Two  or  more  nouns  connected  by  and,  denoting  the 
same  person  or  thing,  require  singular  verbs  to  agree  with  them  ; 


as,  The  hero  land  patriot  has  breathed  his  last ;  Why  is  dust  and 
ashes  proud  ?  Hum  and  molasses,  well  stirred  together,  is  said  to 
be  good  for  a  cold. 

Note  34.  Proper  nouns,  generally,  do  not  admit  of  a  plural 
form,  except  the  names  of  nations,  societies,  chains  of  mountains, 
and  groups  of  islands  ;  as,  the  Russians,  the  Friends,  the  Appen- 
nines,  the  West  Indies. 

Note  35.  Adverbs  are  not  unfrequently  absolute ;  that  is, 
they  qualify  no  particular  word,  but  usually  refer  to  the  whole  pre- 
ceding sentence  ;  as,  yes,  no,  amen,  &c,  and  not  unfrequently  they 
are  expletives, — that  is,  qualify  nothing  ;  as,  "  There  came  to  the 
beach  a  poor  exile  of  Erin."  Sometimes  several  words  are  used 
together  as  an  adverb,  called  an  adverbial  phrase  ;  as,  by  and  by, 
from  whence,  &c. 

Note  36.  Adjectives  of  number,  as  two,  three,  four,  six,  &c, 
are  sometimes  called  Numeral  Adjectives.  Any  adjective  may  be 
said  to  be  used  as  a  noun,  or  as  a  substitute,  when  the  noun  to 
which  it  belongs  is  not  expressed ;  as,  Many  were  invited,  but  the 
wise  only  accepted.     [That  is,  many  people,  wise  people.] 

Note  37.  When  several  adjectives  belong  to  the  same  noun, 
the  article  should  generally  be  used  before  the  first  only ;  as,  a 
large,  sweet,  mellow  apple.  But  when  the  omission  would  occa- 
sion ambiguity,  or  when  we  wish  to  be  emphatical,  the  article  should 
be  repeated  before  each ;  as,  a  white  and  a  red  apple,  [a  white 
and  red  apple  might  imply  but  one  apple,  partly  white  and  partly 
red.~\  The  learned,  the  eloquent,  the  patriotic  Catham.  Also 
when  one  adjective  or  noun  begins  with  a  vowel  or  silent  h  and  the 
other  with  a  consonant,  the  indefinite  article,  if  used,  must  be  re- 
peated and  changed  from  a  to  an,  or  from  an  to  a,  as  the  case  may 
be ;  as,  a  wise  and  an  honest  Prince ;  an  owl  and  a  hawk  ;  a  peach 
and  an  apple,  [not  a  peach  and  apple,  or  an  apple  and  peach.]  In 
a  comparison,  limited  to  one  individual,  the  article  should  not  be 
repeated  before  the  last  noun ;  as,  He  is  a  better  farmer  than  sai- 
lor ;  but  when  two  persons  are  implied,  the  article  should  be  used 
before  the  last  as  well  as  the  first ;  as,  He  is  a  better  farmer  than 
a  sailor  would  be. 

Note  38.  The  subjunctive  mood  has  no  variation,  in  the  form 
of  the  verb,  from  the  indicative,  except  in  the  present  tense  of 
verbs  generally,  and  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses  of  the  verb 
to  be.  It  may  be  of  use  to  the  learner  to  remark,  that  though  we 
have  used  if  only,  in  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive 
mood,  yet  any  other  conjunction,  expressing  doubt,  may,  with  equal 
propriety,  occasionally  be  used  ;  as,  though,  unless,  &c 

The  form  of  the  present  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  is  fre- 
quently used  to  express  future  time,  the  auxiliary  being  suppress- 
ed ;  thus,  instead  of  saying,  If  he  should  be,  if  he  should  go,  if 
he  shoidd  learn  ;  we  frequently  say,  if  he  be,  if  he  go,  if  he  learn. 
Should  is  probably  more  used  to  form  the  future  tense  of  the  sub- 
junctive mood,  than  shall,  or  will. 

It  should  be  noticed,  that  the  sign  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  is 
not  always  expressed  ;  supposition  or  hypothesis  may  be  well  ex- 
pressed without  the  conjunctions,  if,  though,  unless,  &c.  ;  as,  Were 
it  possible,  for  if  it  were  possible. 

The  potential  mood  becomes  subjunctive,  by  means  of  the  con- 
junctions if,  though,  unless,  &c.  prefixed  to  its  tenses,  without  any 
variations  from  the  potential  inflections ;  as,  If  I  could  deceive 
him,  I  should  abhor  it. 

In  poetry  and  law  style,  the  verb  let,  in  the  imperative  mood,  is 
frequently  omitted ;  as,  "Perish  the  lore  that  deadens  young  desire ;" 
that  is,  "  let  the  lore  perish,"  &c.  "Be  ignorance  thy  choice,  where 
knowledge  leads  to  wo ;"  that  is,  •'  let  ignorance  be  thy  choice,  &c." 
"Be  it  enacted  ;"  that  is,  "  let  it  be  enacted." 

Those  tenses  are  called  simple  tenses,  which  are  formed  of  the 
principal  verb ;  as,  I  learn,  I  learned.  The  compound  tenses  are 
such  as  cannot  be  formed  without  an  auxiliary  verb ;  as,  I  have 


I -J 


HOOK      SECOND. 


learned,  I  had  learned,  I  shall  or  will  learn,  I  may  learn,  I  may  be 
learned,  I  may  have   been  learned,  &c.      These  compounds  MM, 

however,  to  be  considered  M  only  different  forms  of  the  same  \<  -rlis. 

Notk  Iii>.  The  present  tense  is  sometimes  applied  to  represent 
the  notions  of  persons  long  since  dead,  as  transacting  at  the  present, 
time;  as,  Seneca  reasons  well.  It.  is  occasionally  used  to  point  out 
l lie  relative  time  of  a  future  action,  as  .brought  into  present  view  ; 
a  .  When  the  mail  arrive*,  We  shall  hear  from  home.  In  animat- 
ed historical  narrations,  it  is  also  sometimes  substituted  for  the  im- 
perfect tenses  as,  lie  enters  the  territory,  jiyhts  and  conquers. 

NOTK  40.  The  perfect  tense,  and  the  imperfect,  tense,  both  de- 
note time  that  is  past;  but  the  former  denotes  it  in  such  a  moaner, 
that  there  is  still  actually  remaining  some  pari  of  the.  lime  lo  slide 
away,    wherein    we    declare  the  tiling   has  lieen  done  ;    whereas  the 

imperfect  denotes  the  thing  or  action  past,  in  such  a  manner,  that 
nothing  remains  of  thai  time  in  which  it,  was  done.  If  we  speak 
of  the  present  century,  we  say,  Philosophers  have  made  great 
discoveries   in  the    present    century  :    hut   if  we  speak   of  the   Ul8l 

century,  we  say,  Philosophers  made  great  discoveries  in  the  last, 
century.  He  hat  been  much  afflicted  this  year;  I  have  this 
uiik   read  the  king's  proclamation  ;    I   have  heard  great  news 

this  morning.  In  these  instances,  lie  has  been,  1  have  read,  and 
heard,  denote  tilings  that  are  past  ;  hut  they  occurred  in  this 
year,  in  this  week,  and  to-day;  and  still  there  remains  a  part  of 
this  year,  week,  and  day,  whereof  I  speak. 

In  general,  the  perfect,  tense  may  he  applied  wherever  the  action 
is  connected  with  the  present  time,  by  the  actual  existence,  either 

bf  the  author,  or  Of  the  work,  though  it,  may  have  been  performed 
many  centuries  ago;  but  if  neither  the.  aulhor  nor  the  work  now 
remains,  it  cannot  be  used.  We,  may  say,  Cicero  A  as  written  ora- 
tions ;  but  we  cannot  say,  Cicero  has  written  poems;  because 
the  orations  are  in  being,  but  the  poems  are  l*st.  Speaking  of 
priests  in  general,  we  may  say,  They  have  in  all  ages  claimed 
great  powers;  because  the  general  order  of  the  priesthood  Still 
exists:  Kul  if  we  speak  of  the  Druids,  as  any  particular  order  of 
priests,  which  does  not  now  exist,  we  cannot  use  this  tense.  We 
cannot  say,  The  Druid  priests  have  claimed  great  powers  ;  but 
must  say,  The  Druid  priests  claimed  great  powers;  because  the 
order  is  now  totally  extinct. 

NoTI  II.  U'///,  as  auxiliary  in  the  first  person,  intimates  reso- 
lution and  promising;  in  the  second  and  third  persons,  it  only  fore- 
tells; at,  We  will  remember  benefits;  "I  //•///  reward  the  good  ;" 
you  or  they  Will  have  a  pleasant  walk. — Shall,  on  the  contrary,  in 
the  firs!  person,  simply  foretells  ;  in  the  second  and  third  persons, 
jirumiscs,  commands,  or  threatens  ;  as,  We  shall  dine  at  home  ; 
M  Thou  shall  inherit  the  land  ;"  Ye  shall  do  justice. —  The  foreign- 
er who  fell  into  the  Thames  and  cried  out,  "  I  will  be  drowned — 
no  body  shall  help  me,"  made  a  sad  misapplication  of  the  auxilia- 
ries. Will  is  not  used  in  the  first  person  of  the  second  future 
tense;  it,  being  incompatible  with  the  nature  of  a  promise.  We 
cannot  say,  1  will  have  written  a  year,  on  the  first  of  October 
next ;  but,  I  shall  have  written,  is  a  common  expression. 

Notk  42.  The  auxiliary  verb  did,  should  never  be  joined  to 
any  verb  except,  the  present  form;  as,  I  did  go,  I  did  lie  abed, 
|  not  did  lay  abed.]  It  would  be  proper  to  say,  I  lay  abed  yester- 
day, but  not  to  say,  1  did  lay  <.Vc.  ;  because  lay  is  here  the  past 
tense  of  the  inlransitive  verb  lie,  [to  lie  down.]  But  it  would  be 
correct  to  say,  1  did  lay  the  book  on  the  shelf;  because  lay  is  here 
the  present  tense  of  the  transilive  verb,  lay  [to  put  or  to  place.  | 
See  "  Catalogue  of  Irregular  Verbs."  When  joined  to  a  single 
verb,  the  same  may  be  said  of  the  auxiliaries,  may,  can,  must, 
might,  could,  would,  should,  shall  and  will ;  as,  1  can  learn,  he  must 
write,  she  should  //,■  abed,  you  may  lay  I  he  book  on  the  shelf. 
But  this  does  not  apply  to  compound  verbs ;  as,  1  might,  have  spoken, 
I  shall  have  written. 

Notk.  48.      Between  the  participle  and  the  verb  there  is  such  a 


nice  gradation,  that  young  learners  often  tind  it  difficult  to  distin- 
guish the,  difference.  An  illustration,  on  the  subject,  may  be  of 
service  to  the  learner.  It  appears  that  the  same  word  is  some- 
times a  participle,  and  sometimes  a  verb.  Examples  :  John 
loved  his  book."  Here  loced  is  a  verb;  but,  in  the  following  sen- 
tence it  is  a  participle:  "John,  loved  by  all  who  knew  him,  was 
greatly  lamented."  The  Britons  daily  harrassed  the  enemy  ; 
\erl>.~  The  Britons,  daily  harrassed  by  the,  PictS,  were  obliged 
to  call  in  the  Saxons  ;  Participle.  I  admired  and  applauded 
him;  Verb.  —  Admired  and  applauded,  he  became  vain;  Par- 
ticiple, lie  is  heated  with  liquor;  Verb.  —  The  man,  heated 
with  liquor,  could  not,  brook  the  offence ;  Participle.  He  charg- 
ed the  enemy,  Vffrb*  Charged  with  rich  gifts  from  the  king, 
he  presents  himself  before  the  prophet,  &c,  Participle.  They 
are  jomed  together;  Verb.  —  Virtue  joined  to  knowledge,  and 
Wealth,  Confers  great  honors  and  respectability;  Participle.  lie 
is  ruiscil  to  greatness  ;  I'er/i.  —  liaised  to  greatness,  he  employ- 
ed his  power,  tVc  ;  Participle.  1  have  erected  i\  house;  Verb. 
Von  bouse,  erected  on  the  rising  ground,  drew  me  from  my  road; 
Participle.  He  lodged  at  the  inn;  Verb.  —  I  found  him  lodged 
in  prison  ;    Participle. 

In  forming  the  moods  and  tenses,  participles  are  often  associated 
with  verbs;  in  this  case,  they  seem  to  lose  their  character  as  parti- 
ciples, and  become  \crbs.       Hence,  it  may  be  remarked,  that,  when 

the  participle  performs  the  office  of  a  verb  through  all  the  moods 

and  tenses,  implies  the  idea  of  time,  and  governs  the  objective  rase 
of  nouns  and  pronouns,  in  \\\v  same  manner  as  verbs  do,  it  cannot 
properly  be  called  a  distinct  part  of  speech;  for  it  is  manifest,  in 
such  cases,  that  it  is  a  species  or  lorui  of  the  verb,  and  therefore 
may  be  called  a  verb  ;  as  in  the  following  examples  I  "I  am  tvritz 
ing,  or  I  had  written;  He  is  teaching  ;  llu  has  spoken  ;  We  have 
been  loved ;  They  might  have  been  taught." 

A  word  cannot  be  a  perfect  participle,  unless  it  will  admit  of 
hare  before  it,  and  make  sense. 

The  participle  often  becomes  an  adjective ;  as,  a  loving  friend  ; 
amoving  spectacle;  a  heated  imagination;  lotting  friendship.  In 
such  cases,  it  admits  of  comparison  by  more  and  most,  less  and  least; 
as,  A  more  admired  artist;  a  most  respected  magistrate.  It 
sometimes  becomes  a  noun;  as,  The  hunting  of  London  was  a 
distressing  event.  By  trusting  to  bis  honor  1  lost  my  money. 
In  this  usage,  it  takes  the  plural  form  J  as,  The  overflowings  of 
the  Nile.      He  scelh  all  his  goings. 

Sometimes  the  plural  is  used  when  an  adverb  is  attached  to  the 
participle  ;  as,  The  goings  out — the  comings  in.  But  this  use 
Of  the  participle  is  not  deemed  elegant,  nor  is  it  common  in  collo- 
quial discourse. 

Many  words,  such  as  untouched,  unvexed,  &c,  have  the  appear- 
ance of  being  part  iciph's,  which  are,  in  fact,  adjectives  ;  as,  "Can 
we,  untouched  by  gratitude,  view  the  profusion  of  good  which  the 
Almighty  hand  bestows  around." 

NOTK  44.  When  a  numeral  and  a  qualifying  adjective  both  re- 
fer to  the  same  noun,  the  numeral  should  be  placed  first  ;  as,  the 
two  young  ladies  ;  the  two  tvisest  men,  [not  the  young  two  ladies,  &c 

Notk  4.r>.  Quoth,  meaning  tosay,  is  obsolete  in  prose,  but  in  po- 
etry and  burlesque,  it  is  sometimes  used  in  the  third  person  singu- 
lar ;   as,  quoth  he. 

Wot,  meaning  to  know,  is  obsolete  in  modern  style,  but  frequent- 
ly used  in  SCripture;  as,  "I  WOt  not  who  hath  done  this  thing:" 
My  master  wottcth    not    what  is  with    mc  in  the    house.      It  is   used 

In  the  present  and.past  tenses  only. 

WiH,  meaning  to  think  or  imagine,   is  seldom    met    with,    but    m 

the  early  English  writings,  and  in  the  English bible 5  as,  -Wist  ye 
not  that   I  must  be  about  mv  Father's  business." 

In  most  languages  there  are  some  verbs  which  are  defective  with 
respect  to  persons.  They  are  used  Only  in  the  third  person,  be- 
cause they  refer  to  a  subject  peculiarly  appropriate  to  that  person  ; 
at,  U  rains,  it  smacs,  it  hails,  it  lightens,  &  c. 





- 


BOOK    SECOND. 


43 


b  4S.  Care  oust  be  taken  not  to  employ  Quotottofu,  Pa- 
rentftese*.  Brackets,  or  holies,  too  frequently  in  composition.  Lie 
good  wine,  they  should  be  used  judiciously  and  sparingly  : — other- 

hey  may  injure  the  sense  and  weaken  the  force  of  an  argu- 
ment. All  good  writers  observe  a  due  caution,  in  this  respect. 
Neither  should  foreign  words  or  phrases  be  often  quoted,  or  too 
many  gualifying  term*  be  used  in  writing  and  speaking.     [  Adjec- 

md  adverbs.]     Very  long  sentences,  between  periods,  should 
generally  be  avoided, — as  they  frequently  obscure  the  sense. 
A  few  more  Remark*  with  regard  to  (Jender,  Number  and  Case. 
The  following  nouns  and  their  compounds  form  their  plural  reg- 
ularly;— strife,  fife,  safe,  brief,  chief,  grief  handkerchief,  mischief, 
dwarf,  tearf.  tnrf,  turf,  gulf  roof;  proof  hoof,  and  such  as  end  in 

?pt  staff,  which  has  stores,  though  its  compounds  are  regu- 
lar; a&,  fag-staff,  flagstaff*.  Staff,  as  a  military  term,  has  staff*. 
The  plural  ending  often  makes  an  additional  syllable ;  as,  hone, 
hone*.  Nouns  ending  in  o,  preceded  by  a  consonant,  form  their 
plural  by  adding  e*  to  the  singular;  as,  hero,  heroes;  negro,  negroet; 
except  Junto,  memento,  canto,  tyro,  grotto,  portico.  solo,  zero,  quarto, 
and  octavo,  which  hare  *  only  added  for  the  plural ;  also  when  the 
o  is  preceded  by  another  rowel,  the  *  only  is  added;  a*,  folio,  folios. 
Some  nouns  hare  two  forms  in  the  plural,  with  different  significa- 
tions ;  as,  brother,  brothers,  [of  one  family,]  brethren,  [of  one  soci- 
ety] ;  penny,  pennies,  [distinct  species  of  coin,]  pence,  [m  compu- 
tation J  ;  pea,  pea*,  [the  seeds,  as  distinct  objects  ;  as,  five  peas'] ; 
pease,  [applied  to  a  mass — die  species;  appease  are  dear.] 

Marty  noun*  from  foreign  language*,  generally  retain  their  original 

plural*. 


AluffjLU-.  aicrririi. 
Analysis,  analyses. 


Apex; 


AjCHMSj  MBPMa 

*  automata. 


A  tfauMtan, 

Aii-.  sit-. 


Index, 


*  ajriNBMiona, 


Beau,  beaux. 

Calx,      f     . 

(ealxes. 

Crisis,  erism 

Criterion,    \***?™' 

Datum,  data. 
Desideratum,  desiderata. 

Dogma,     J*/*™* 


.Fungus,    |fun^ 

Gymnasium,     **yMina*?a' 
y  ,  _••  mnassusnsj 

Hypothesis,  hypotheses. 

I  .'■..-:■-,'. .    -."•-  "  '-■     . 

indices,   [referring   to 

algebraic  quantity.] 

indexes,  [pointers,  or 

tabJei  of  contents.] 

Larva,  larvae- 

Lyceum,   {^^ 

Medium,    - 

<  PMHUi 

Ibaonsdim,  j,"enl0,a^ 
Metamorphosis,   metamorphoses. 


M'-';,'-::!:jtH.  ■MMtfK 


WmmrTmWk,  ttnwwhL 
Ellipsis,  ellipses. 
Emphasis, 

K  III  <i  t  ;  ■ .  6  rr^  I  a. 
Focus,  foci. 

Formula,  Jf^S? 

rmuue. 


Nebula.  MUk 
Oasis,  oases. 
Phasis,  phases. 
PieSMmesMB,  pfcCMBSfW 
Radius,  radii. 

*"*•  {^ST 

Speculum,  specula. 
Stamen,    J 

Statutes,  stinhi 

Stratum,  strata. 

'I  keaiuj  feaaca,  , 

Vortex,  vortices. 


*  Abbreviated  to  Jtemrt.  and 
p.uri_  pmasusssi  Mmi 


It  »  alM  me  ptenl  of  Jfe- 
mW^smtamuta  Jam,  haafscm  oamupassmj 


Some  nouns  have  the  same  form  in  both  numbers ;  as,  sfuep. 
swine,  bellow*,  series,  specie*,  mean*,  odd*,  ethic*,  mathematics,  met- 
aphysics, pneumatic*,  optic*,  ice.  [One  sheep  is  worth  to,  two 
sheep  are  worth  $10  ;  this  bellotrs  is,  these  two  behoves  are.~] 

The  following  words,  though  sometimes  used  as  singular  nouns, 
are  more  properly  plural : — alms,  amends,  pain*,  riches,  wages. 

The  following  are  used  only  in  the  plural : — Annals,  archives, 
ashes,  assets,  billiards,  bitters,  bowels,  breeches,  calends,  clothes, 
drawers,  [an  article  of  dress,]  dregs,  embers,  entrails,  goods, 
hatches,  hose,  [stockings,]  hysterics,  ides,  lees,  letters,  [literature,] 
literati,  lungs,  manners,  minutia,  morals,  nippers,  orgies,  pantaloons, 
pJMMOg  \-..\-.-A-.  pafiris*;  mrnrnnM,  ummin\tm\  AeMBj  MBMt%  -tati- 
ties,  tidings,  tongs,  trowsers,  vespers,  victuals,  vitals. 
The  followixg  remarks  axd  examples  will  serve  to 
exemplify  the  proxomlnal  adjectives  : 

Some,  other,  any,  one,  aU,  such,  none,  are  sometimes  called  the 
indefinite  kind,  because  they  express  their  subjects  in  an  indefinite 
manner. 

One,  when  confined  to  number,  is  used  as  an  adjective  ;  as,  "Cod 
hath  made  of  one  blood  all  nations  of  men."  When  used  as  a 
pronoun,  it  has  a  general  signification,  meaning  people  at  large ; 
as,  One  is  astonished  at  the  vices  of  men.  One  is  apt  to  love 
one**  self  This  word  is  often  used,  by  good  writers,  in  the  plu- 
ral ;  as,  The  great  one*  of  the  world.  The  boy  wounded  the 
old  bird,  and  stole  the  young  one*.  My  wife  and  little  one*  are 
in  good  health. 

The  plural  other*  is  only  used  when  apart  from  the  noun  to  which 
it  refers ;  as,  When  you  have  perused  these  papers,  I  will  send 
you  the  other*.  The  singular  other,  u  used  both  when  the  noun 
is  expressed,  and  when  it  is  understood ;  as,  Give  me  the  other  ; 
or,  Give  me  the  other  book.  When  this  word  is  joined  to  nouns, 
«ther,  singular  or  plural,  it  has  no  variation ;  as,  The  other  man, 
The  ot&er  men. 

The  word  another  is  composed  of  the  indefinite  article  prefixed 
to  the  word  other. 

None  is  used  in  both  numbers  ;  as,  None  is  so  deaf  as  he  that 
will  not  hear.    None  of  them  are  equal  to  these. 

JSach,  every,  either,  are  sometime*  called  the  distributive  kind, 
because  they  denote  the  persons,  or  things,  that  make  up  a  num- 
ber, as  taken  individually. 

Each  includes  ail  the  individuals  of  a  collective  number;  as, 
Each  of  the  men  escaped  unhurt.  He  met  ten  beggars,  and 
gave  each  a  crown. 

Every  tndndes  aU  the  individuals  of  a  collective  number,  but  is 
never  separated  from  its  noun,  except  in  legal  proceedings ;  as  in 
the  phrase,  all  and  every  of  them.  It  may  be  used  in  construc- 
tion, with  a  plural  noun,  implying  a  collective  idea;  as,  every 
seven  years. 

Either  signifies  only  one  of  two  individual  persons,  or  things ;  as, 
Too  may  choose  either  of  these  two-  apples.  To  say,  eitfter  of 
the  three,  is  therefore  improper. 

Neither  imports  not  either;  that  is,  not  one  or  the  other ;  as, 
Neither  of  my  friends  was  there. 

This,  that,  these,  those,  are  sometimes  called  the  definitive  or  de- 
monstrative kind,  because  they  precisely  point  out  the  nouns  to 
which  they  relate. 

Of  Gestder.    Nouns  of  the  masculine  or  feminine  gender  are 
frequently  used  in  a  general  sense,  including  both  sexes  ;  as,  "And 
with  thee  will  I  break  in  pieces  the  horse  and  his  rider."    ■  I 
the  ant  thou  sluggard,  consider  her  ways  and  be  wise." 

When  we  speak  of  males  and  females  of  our  own  species,  with- 
out regard  to  sex,  we  generally  employ  a  term  in  the  masculine 
gender;  as,  Man  is  mortal;  the  authors  and  poets  of  the  age. 

In  speaking  of  young  children,  and  of  animate  objects  whose 
sex  is  unknown,  we  often  employ  the  neuter  pronoun,  it;  as,  the 
child  was  well,  when  I  saw  it;  he  caught  the  bird,  but  it  soon  es- 
i  taped  from  him. 


II 


BOOK    SECOND. 


Some  words  arc  used  only  in  the  feminine  gender;  as,  Amazon, 
hrunette,  dowayer,  shrew,  syren,  virago. 

Of  ('ask.  In  forming  the  possessive  case  of  singular  n  uns,  the 
regular  method  is  always  preferable  when  the  additional  s  dues  not 
occasion  too  much  of  a  hissing  sound  ;*  hut  as  this 8  frequently  adds 
another  By  llahlc  to  the  word,  ports  generally  take  the  lieense  of  re- 
taining it  or  not,  as  their  measure  may  require. 

Vulgarisms.  The  following  vulgarisms,  with  many  others  of 
the  same  class,  should  he  carefully  avoided.  1  sot,  1  axed fate, 
this  is  /risen,  this  is  yonrn,  handsome  hoitsen,  .1  seed  him,  I  kuowed 
him,  many  e/ii/nlei/s,  the  littlest  apple,  he  aint  acquainted  with  her,  a 
qiMrteff  Of  ire<d,  she  is  going  a  irisitiuy,  good  port  riite,  «\  c. 

Agreement  is  the  correspondence  of  one  word  with  another, 
in  gender,  number,  person,  or  form. 

Government  is  the  power  which  one  word  has  over  another, 
in  causing  it  to  he  in  some  particular  case,  &c. 

A  Si  Mii.i,  Sentence  contains  one  nominative  case  and  one  fi- 
nite verb, |  expressed,  or  understood;  as,  Exercise  promotes  health. 

A  CoMi'OUND  Sentence  contains  more  than  one  nominative 
case  and  one  finite  verb,  expressed  or  implied;  as.  Virtue  refines 
the  affections,  but  vice  debases  them. 

A  Phrase  or  Clause  is  a  sentence,  or  part  of  a  sentence, — 
tv  short  expression  or  mode  of  speech. 

An  Imiikiict  I'iirase,  (frequently  called  an  Adjunct,)  is 
n  short  expression  or  mode  of  speech,  embracing  till  the  words  of 
a  simple  sentence  except  the  principal  parts,  but  not  amounting  to 
an  assertion  or  a  proposition;  as.  Therefore,  desirous  of  praise, — 
»«  the  pursuit  of  riches,— by  and  by, — hand  in  hand, — not  at  all, — 
Printing  was  invented  in  the  fifteenth  century. 

An  Idiom  is  a  form  of  expression  peculiar  to  a  language;  as, 
I  tear  with  me  ;  They  came  forward,  to  a  man. 

Pausing  or  Analyzing  is  the  resolving  of  a  sentence  into  the 
elements  or  parts  of  speech,  and  showing  their  connection,  govern- 
ment and  agreement. 

Tu.vNsrosi tion  is  when  words  are  placed  out  of  their  natural 
order  ;  as,  "  She,  with  extended  arms,  his  aid  implores,"  [implores 
his  aid.] 

DIRECTIONS  RESPECTING  THE  USE  OF  CAPITAL 
LETTERS. 

(\\rrr.\i  s  are  used  in  the  following  situations: 

1.  At  the  beginning  of  every  principal  word  in  the  titles  of 
books,  chapters,  Ac.  ;  as,  Johnson's  Dictionary  of  the  English 
Language  ;    Uollin's  Ancient  History. 

2.  The  first  word  of  every  book,  chapter,  letter,  note,  or  any 
other  piece  of  writing. 

,'i.  'The  beginning  of  the  first  word  after  a  period  ;  and  if  the 
two  sentences  are  totally  independent,  alter  a  note  ot'  interrogation 
or  exclamation.  Hut,  if  a  number  of  interrogative  or  exclamatory 
sentences  arc  thrown  into  one  general  group  ;  or,  if  the  construc- 
tion of  the  latter  sentence  depends  on  the  former,  all  of  them  ex- 
cept thcjlirst,  may  begin  with  small  letters  ;  as,  "How  long,  ye  sim- 
ple ones,  will  \e  love  simplicity  :  and  the  scorners  delight  in  their 
scorning?  and  fools  hate  knowledge?**  "Alas!  how  different! 
yet  how  like  the  same  !" 

I.  The  first  word  ot'  a  quotation,  introduced  after  a  colon  or 
semicolon,  or  when  it  is  in  a  direct  form;  as,  "  Always  remember 
this  maxim;  '  Know  thyself.'"      Hut  when  a  quotation  is  brought 


•  It  will  l>o  ol>»iM-v«vl,  Unit  thr  npoMronhio  .«  nvunontk  ineivnsps  the  uiftionltv  of 
pronunciation: — thu»,  in  prononotaf  tat  word,  .V<w*'#,  this  sound  of  «  occurs 

tluv<-  thnos  In  imnn-.li:ito  Miivcuioii.  Ofhor  singular  possosiw*.  it'  forniod  with 
nn  i  mid  nn  <y>o»<ny>Ar,  would  nlso  t>o  ,-\n.  uu-lv  hard  to  pronounce;  as,  A,MIU$'$ 
•hi«ld  {  for  rtgkttmmtu'M  take. 

t  A  verb  not  in  the  infinitive  mood. 


in  obliquely  after  a  comma,  a  capital  is  unnecessary ;  as,  Solo- 
mon observes,  that  "pride  goes  before  destruction."  The  first 
word  of  an  example  may  also  very  properly  begin  with  a  capital; 
as,  u  Temptation  proves  our  virtu*-." 

6.  The  pronoun  /,  and  the  interjection  0,  must  always  be  capi- 
tals ;   as,   "I  write;    Hear,  O-  earth." 

6.  At  the  beginning  of  every  line  of  poetry. 

7.  All  names,  epithets,  or  qualities  of  our  Creator,  are  always 
begun,  if  not  wholly  written,  with  capitals;  as,  God,  Loni>,  Su- 
preme Being,  Almighty,  Most  High,  Divine  Providence.  The 
word  hearen  must  always  begin  with  a  capital,  when  used  as  the 
name  of  the  King  of  heaven  ;  as,  ••  May  Heaven  prosper  you," 
Hut  when  it  is  used  as  the  name  of  the  abode  of  the  blessed,  it 
may  begin  with  a  small  letter,  except  at  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence ;  as,  u  The  angels  of  heaven."  "The  Lord  of  heaven  and 
earth." 

8.  All  proper  names,  of  whatever  description,  must  begin  with 
capitals;  of  persons,  heathen  gods  and  goddesses,  brutes,  the  plan- 
ets,* the  fixed  stars  and  constellations,  countries,  kingdom.-,  states, 
cities,  towns,  streets,  islands,  mountains,  rivers,  ships,  seas,  oceans, 
&c. ;  as.  Benjamin  Franklin;  Sir  Isaac  Newton  ;  the  Alleghany 
Mountains;   the  Ohio   Kiver;    Lake   Superior;  the  Red  Sea;  the 

Frigate  Queniere.  Also  all  adjectives  rffiriTod  from  proper  nemo  j 

as,  the  Newtonian  system  ;  Grecian,  Human,  American,  French, 
Italian,  \  c. 

1).  All  titles  of  honor,  professions,  and  callings  of  men,  particu- 
larly when  an  address  is  made,  ought  to  begin  with  capitals ;  as, 
President,  Governor,  General,  Judge,  Esquire.  Mr.,  <fcc.  Also 
all   qualities   used  as  titles  of  men ;  as,  Honorable,    Reverend.  iVc. 

10.  Capitals  are  always  used  to  begin  the  names  of  all  courts, 
societies,  and  public  bodies  of  men  :  as.  Congress,  the  General  As- 
sembly, the  Supreme  Judicial  Court,  the  Court  of  Common  l'leas, 
the  Humane  Society,  the  Corporation.  Arc 

11.  The  names  of  all  religious  sects  and  denominations,  are  be- 
gun with  capitals  ;  as,  Hpiseopalians,  Haptists,  Friends,  &c. 

12.  Capitals  are  always  used  to  begin  the  names  of  months,  and 
the  days  of  the  week  ;  as.  January,  February.  &c,  Monday,  Tues- 
day, iS.  e.  Also  all  public  days;  as,  a  Public  Thanksgiving,  a  Sol- 
emn Fast,  &c 

13.  The  names  of  all  articles  of  commerce,  when  entered  in 
merchant's  books,  advertisements.  \ c.  should  begin  with  capitals; 
as,  Linen.  Cotton,  Silk,  Rum,  Sugar,  Tea.  \  e.  Also  all  sums  of 
money  specified  in  notes,  bonds.  Are. ;  as.  Ten  Dollars  and  Seventy- 
five  Cents. 

14.  Verj  empbatical  words  are  frequently  begun,  and  sometimes 
wholly  written,  in  capitals. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  ELLIPSIS. 

Ellipsis,  when  applied  to  grammar,  is  the  elegant  omission  of 
some  one  part,  or  parts  ot   speech,  in  a  sentence. 

The  part  of  speech  that  is  omitted,  must  be  added  in  idea,  eith- 
er to  complete  the  sense,  or  to  parse  the  sentence  grammatically. 

To  shun  the  unpleasant  repetition  ot  words,  and  to  render  the 
mode  of  expression  as  elegant  as  possible,  is  the  main  design  ot 
the  ellipsis. 

That  this  figure  may  be  used  with  elegance,  the  speaker,  or  wri- 
ter, should  be  careful  to  .-bun  all  ambiguity  of  expression.  When- 
ever the  meaning  is  obscured,  the  figure  is  improperly  used. 

Simple  sentences  are  seldom  elliptical:  but  compound  sentences 
are  very  often  affected   with  this  figure. 

To  produce  some  examples  of  elliptical  sentences,  is  the  best 
method  to  impress  the  understanding  with  the  propriety,  or  impro- 
priety, of  using  the  ellipsis. 

1  1  1  U'MS    OT     THE    ARTICLE. 

The  men.  women,  and  children  :  together  with  the  cattle,  houses, 
barns,  and  fields,  were  all  destroyed. 

•  The  earth  «cepted. 


BOOK    SECOND. 


45 


The  repetition  of  the  article  He,  before  each  Mam,  in  this  sea- 

:   v    -    >  "•  -  •"■--.  *- 

then  the  lepetitiun  af  the  article,  am  ■  both  ■gcenmr/Vnd  elegant 
■  Bat  of  that  day.  and  that  hoar,  knoweth  no  man :  no.  not  fht 
angels,  which  are  in  heaven,  at  mm  i  the  Son,  bat  the  Father." 


rn:r?:5  of  inr   h    \ > 


A  mast  &••■-.. 


A  mool   ImmmtHL 


r,  and  faithful 

are  ▼erf  tmphariril.  will  not  admit  the 
Christ,  the  power  of  God.  and  the  wisdom  of  God."    «Chrot 

far  power  mW  wisdom  •/  6oaV  is  not  so  lanjihatinl 

He  went  to  St  Stephen's.    He  is  dean  of  St.  Paul's.     Whose 

book  is  tins?    It  is  Peter's.    This  is  good 

elegant,  than  if  the  noons,  omitted  by  the 

And.  jet,  in  parsing,  we  most  say,  St.  Stephen's  Chapel;  St 

Pauls'  Church ;  It  is  Peter's  book. 

ELLIPSIS    OF   THE   ABJECTIVE. 

In  sentences  of  this  kind,  care  should  be  taken,  that  the  adjec- 
tives omitted,  be  as  proper  to  qualify  the  latter,  as  the  former  noun. 
The  ellipsis  of  adjectives  should  never  be  applied  to  nouns  of 

mmBKvnf  ■■in 

ELLIPSIS   OF  THE  PEOXOOL 


-  to 
height,  nar  depth,  nar  any  uthtr  creature,  shall  be  able  ta  sep- 
ns  from  the  love  of  God." 
Corresponding  conjunctions  should  never  be  omitted:  A  few  ex- 

cVuammmi  ■  Ml  ■  ..-.rr-r  ■  mmtom     nusFhlnuui  ■ 
.-j-   <    I    -:  v 
He  is  as  learned  a  man  as  you.    He  is  to  learned  a 
you. 

Wnetner  it  were  yon,  or  they,  that  played. 
Whether  h  were  you,  nor  they,  Ant  played. 

her    nor.     Xeither  this  man,  nor  his  father.     Xeither  this 

ffirihjr     or      Choose  emWr  this,  or  that.    Choose  either  tins, and* 
thaL 

Tkmnyh    yet      Thomyh  he  m  not  polite,  oat  he  is 
virtuous.     To  ■apt  he  is  not  pohte,  he  is  learned  and 

So— mot    Itismphun.motyoomostknow.it    It  ism 
yon  moat  know  it 

1 :  :  ::>:«      ■    :v.-.    ::.:■:     >:t:    > 


My  house  and  frnfmcntw  to  Ned.  ily  book,  pen,  ink,  and  pa- 
per.     My  father  and  mother,  sisters  and  brothers. 

If  the  expressions  demand  a  particular  rmphnrin.  we  must  dis- 
pense with  the  figure.  "O,  send  out  my  fight  and  my  truth."  "The 
Lord  is  my  fight  and  my  salvation." 

ELLIPSIS   OF   THE   VEBB. 

"Andknowest  not  that  moo  art  wretched,  and  miserable,  and 
poor,  and  blind,  and  naked." 

To  omit  verbs,  in  similar  instances,  is  very  proper.  In  the  pre- 
ceding jw  minus,  the  conjunction  mot,  the  pronoun  maw,  and  the 
verb  art,  are  omitted  in  four  different  place  it ;  and  yet  there  is  no 
obscurity  of  sense. 

When  several  verbs,  m  succession,  are  used  in  the 
mood,  elegance  requires  that  m,  the  sign  of  the 
should  be  omitted  before  all  but  the  first 

To  love  and  fear  God,  is  man's  duty. 


ELLIPSIS   OF  THE  JLDVEEB. 


He  walks,  speaks,  and  behaves,  very 
tospefl,  read,  and  write,  tonetny. 


Ho  ntw  aw, 


ELLIPSIS   OF   THE    COXJTXCTIOX. 

God  is  to  be  loved  for  las  truth,  goodness,  mercy,  aW  grace. 
In  all  emphatical  expressions,  the  conjunction  ought  to  be  used. 
«  For  I  am  persuaded,  that  neither  death,  nor  ~ 


To  finmhhm  education,,  he  nmde  a  tooTm^nat  England,  France. 
Italy,  Germany,  and  Holland." 

The  repetition  of  the  mepotition  mriwja,  before  all  these  noons, 
would  be  mefegant  And  where  neither  sense  nor  perspicuity  de- 
mands the  use  of  a  preposition,  it  ■hoold  be  avoided. 

The  following  quotations  are  very  elliptical.  ■  Let  us  swallow 
them  up  alive  as  the  grave,  and  whole  as  those  mat  go  down  into 
the  ph."  Supplied :  Let  moo  as  swallow  them  op  alive  as  the 
grave  snmnonom  them  an  afire,  ami  In*  men  as  maolmt  mem  up 
whole,  as  those  ore  iwnlWis*  00  mfolr,  that  go  down  into  the  pit 

That  the  above  verse  cannot  be  parsed  without  supplying,  in 
idea,  the  words  that  are  omitted  by  the  ellipsis,  is  evident  to  all  ac- 
with  the  rales  of  Syntax. 
That  we  may  enjoy  ourselves,  let  us  be  temperate, 
erate ;  that  we  may  enjoy  one  another,  let  us  be 
mane,  charitable ;  that  we  may  enjoy  God,  let  us  be  pious,  devout 
and  holy;  detesting  the  vices,  and  despising  the  vanities  of  this 
worn. 

That  we  may  enjoy  ourselves,  let  us  be 
enjoy  omrtelre*.  let  as  at  chaste,  ono*  mac  we 
let  as  he  moderate;  that  we  may  enjoy  one  another,  let  us  be  benev- 

may  enjoy  one  another,  let  m  be  charitable ;  and  that  we  may  enjoy 
God  ;  let  us  be  pious,  mot  we  may  enjoy  God.  let  «  le  devout  end 
mot  me  may  enjoy  God.  let  «%*e  holy;  deoMtmg  the  vices,  and  des- 
pising the  vanities  of  this  world. 
That  the  use  of  the  grammatic 
stances,  is  necessary  as  well  as  Elegant,  appears  by  this 
The  repetition  of  the  words  in  mnVri,  obscures,  m  a  measure,  the 
sense;  lessens  the  majesty  of  expression ;  and  greatly  fatigues  the 
■nhaV 


PUNCTUATION. 

PrxcTrxTiox  treats  of  the  points  or  marks  used  in  written  j      A  Colon £] denotes  a  pauseof  three  syllables. 


composition,  for  the  purpose  of 
tended  to  be  conveyed,  and  the 


clearly  the  sense  in- 
in  reading  and 


A  Comma  [J  denotes  a  pause  of  one  syllable. 
A  Semicolon  [;}  denotes  a  pause  of  two  syllables. 


A  Period  [.3  denotes  a  pause  of  four  syllables.* 
An  Interrogation point  f?]  shows  where  a  question  is  asked:  as. 
Whom  do  you  see? 


♦  Le.  WkoayoBan 


a.  on 


46 


BOOK    SECOND. 


An  Exclamation  point  [!]  is  a  mark  of  wonder  or  surprise ;  as, 
0  the  folly  of  sinners  1 

N.  B.  The  pause  of  these  two  last  points  is  the  same  as  a 
period. 

The  Dash  [ — ]  marks  a  break  in  the  sentence,  or  an  abrupt 
turn  ;  as,  "  If  thou  art  he — but  Oh  !  how  fallen." 

"  Here  lies  the  great — false  marble  where  ? 
Nothing  but  sordid  dust  lies  here!" 

It  is  also  used  when  a  person  is  waiting  for  an  answer ;  as,  "Hold 
up  thy  hand,  make  signal  of  thy  hope — He  dies  and  makes  no 
sign."  N.  B.  Modern  writers  often  employ  dashes  in  the  place  of 
the  parenthesis.  # 

A  Parenthesis  [()]  includes  words,  not  necessary  to  make  sense, 
and  should  be  read  quicker,  and  in  a  weaker  tone  of  voice ;  as, 

"  Know,  then,  this  truth,  (enough  for  man  to  know,) 
Virtue  alone,  is  happiness  below." 

Brackets  or  Books  [  ]  include  words  that  serve  to  explain  a 
foregoing  word  or  sentence  ;  as,  This  event  [the  burning  of  Rome] 
occurred  during  the  reign  of  Nero.  He  [John]  lives  in  Boston. 
They  [the  Americans]  &c. 

The  Caret  [A  ]denotes  an  interlineation,  and  shows  where  to 
bring  in  what  was  omitted  (through  mistake,  or  otherwise,)  in  the 

a  but 

first  writing ;  as,  "  Without  friend,  the  world  is  a  wilderness." 
A  A 

The  Byphen  [-]  is  chiefly  used  to  join  the  parts  of  a  word  to- 
gether, that  are  written  partly  in  one  line,  and  partly  in  another ;  as, 
We  are  commanded  to  love  and  do  good  to  those  that  are  our  ene- 
mies. It  is  also  used  to  connect  compound  words ;  as,  lap-dog,  tea- 
pot. Note.  In  dividing  a  word  at  the  end  of  a  line,  the  break 
should  always  be  made  between  two  syllables,  and  not  between  dif- 
ferent letters  of  the  same  syllable. 

An  Apostrophe  [']  is  the  sign  of  the  possessive  case ;  as,  Peter's 
cane.     It  also  contracts  words  ;  as,  lov'd  for  loved,  tho'  for  though. 

The  Quotation  or  Double  Comma  ["  "]  includes  a  passage,  taken 
from  some  other  author,  in  his  own  words  ;  as,  Remember  this  prov- 
erb, "  Pride  goes  before  destruction."  "  In  my  first  parliament," 
said  the  King,  "  I  was  a  novice."  Note.  When  a  quotation  oc- 
curs within  a  quotation,  it  is  distinguished  by  single  commas ;  as, 
the  priest  said,  "  forget  not  this  law,  '  Love  one  another,'  and  ye 
shall  be  blessed."  If  both  quotations  end  together,  it  is  indicated 
by  three  commas,  thus — the  priest  said,  "  forget  not  this  law,  'Love 
one  another.'  "  If  both  begin  together,  it  is  indicated  thus — the 
priest  said,  " '  Love  one  another,'  and  ye  shall  be  blessed."  If  both 
begin  and  end  together,  it  is  indicated  thus — the  priest  said,  "  'Love 
one  another.'  " 

An  Ellipses  or  the  long  Dash,  [ ]is  used  when  some  letters  in 

a  word,  or  some  words  in  a  sentence,' are  omitted;  as,  K g  for 

King. 

The  Brace  [~- — ,]  sometimes  unites  three  poetical  lines  which 
have  the  same  rhyme,  or  connects  a  number  of  words  in  prose  with 
one  common  application  ;  as, 

(  mowed      Cleave,  to  stick,  \  Cleaved,  cleaved. 
(  mown,  or  adhere,  j 

(  "  I  wonder  why  the  saints  don't  sing, 
<  And  make  the  heavenly  arches  ring, 
(  With  loud  hosannas  to* their  King; 
Who  brought  their  souls  to  union !" 

The  Section  [§]  is  sometimes  used  to  distinguish  the  parts  into 
which  a  Book,  Chapter,  or  Article  is  divided. 

The  Paragraph  [^[]  is  chiefly  used  in  the  Bible,  and  denotes  the 
beginning  of  a  new  subject.  In  other  books,  paragraphs  are  dis- 
tinguished by  commencing  a  new  line  farther  from  the  margin  than 
the  beginning  of  other  lines.     This  is  called  indenting* 

*  Paragraphs  were  formerly  much  larger  than  at  the  present  day, — frequently 
containing  a  number  of  modern  ones.  [See  Book  of  "Kings."]  Hut  the  tign 
or  mark  of  the  paragraph  and  section  are  now  nearly  obsolete;  and  as  Articles 


Mow,  mowed, 


A  small  Dash  [--]  when  placed  over  a  vowel,  denotes  that  it  is 
long ;  as,  noble. 

A  Breeve  J_«]  placed  over  a  vowel,  shows  that  it  is  short  \  as, 
folly. 

A  mark  of  Accent  [']  placed  over  a  syllable,  denotes  that  it  re- 
quires particular  stress  in  pronunciation ;  as,  fancy. 

A  Diaresis  [  ••  ]  placed  over  the  latter  of  two  successive  vowels, 
indicates  that  they  do  not  form  a  diphthong  ;  as,  aerial. 

The  Cedilla  [  y]  is  a  mark  which  is  sometimes  placed  under  the 
letter  c,  to  show  that  it  has  the  sound  of  s  ;  as  in  chaise,  facade. 

The  Asterisk  or  Star,  [*],  Dagger  [f],  Double  Dagger  [j],  Par- 
allel Lines  [||],  Letters  of  the  Alphabet,  Figures,  &c,  are  used  as 
references,  directing  the  reader  to  some  words  or  notes  in  the  mar- 
gin, or  at  the  bottom  of  the  page.  Two  or  more  stars  denote  that 
something  is  wanting,  defective,  or  immodest  in  the  passage. 

The  Index  or  Band  [<gST]  points  out  some  remarkable  passage, 
or  something  that  requires  particular  attention. 

Note.  When  a  writer  wishes  to  distinguish  any  particular 
word  or  phrase,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  or  for  any  other  purpose, 
he  generally  causes  it  to  be  printed  in  Italics,  by  underlining  it. 
A  word  used  merely  as  a  icord,  or  as  an  example,  should  generally 
be  italicised  ;  as,  The  word  who  is  applied  to  persons,  and  which  to 
brutes  and  things  ;  The  possessive  case  is  formed  by  adding  s  to  a 
noun,  with  an  apostrophe,  thus — John's  book.  Words  and  phrases 
introduced  into  English  writings  from  foreign  languages,  are  gen- 
erally expressed  in  Italics ;  as,  "  White  Pine  is  par  excellence  a 
New  England  tree."  Sentences  of  special  importance  are  some- 
times written  entirely  in  Italics.*  When  a  person  wishes  to  have 
a  word  or  phrase  printed  in  small  capitals  (still  more  emphatic  and 
conspicuous  than  Italics),  he  draws  two  line's  under  it.  If  it  is  to  be 
printed  in  large  capitals,  [for  heads  of  Articles,  title  of  Books,  &c], 
the  word  or  phrase  is  designated  by  three  parallel  lines. 


RULES    OF    PUNCTUATION. 

In  order  to  determine  the  proper  application  of  the  points,  it  is 
necessary  to  understand  what  is  meant  by  an  adjunct  or  imperfect 
phrase,  a  simple  sentence,  and  a  compound  sentence.     See  page  44. 

The  subject  and  verb  may  both  be  attended  with  adjuncts,  ex- 
pressing the  object,  cause,  end,  time,  place,  manner,  and  the  like. 

A  sentence  is  rendered  compound,  not  only  by  means  of  a  plu- 
rality of  subjects  and  verbs,  but  also  of  adjuncts. 

If  two  or  more  adjuncts  are  connected  with  the  verb  in  the  same 
manner,  by  the  same  preposition,  conjunction,  &c.,  the  sentence  is 
compound,  and  may  be  resolved  into  two  or  more  simple  ones. 
But  if  the  adjuncts  are  connected  with  the  verb  in  a  different  man- 
ner, the  sentence  is  simple;  as,  They  have  sacrificed  their  health 
and  fortune  at  the  shrine  of  vanity,  pride,  and  extravagance  ;  El- 
egance of  taste  has  a  connexion  with  many  virtues  of  the  most  am- 
iable kind. 

In  the  former  example,  several  of  the  adjuncts  being  connected 
with  the  verb  in  the  same  manner,  the  sentence  is  compound ;  in 
the  latter,  all  the  adjuncts  being  connected  with  the  verb  in  a  dif- 
ferent manner,  the  sentence  is  simple. 

RULE  1. 

The  members  of  a  simple  sentence  must  not  be  separated  by  a 
comma ;  as,  "  Adversity  borrows  its  sharpest  sting  from  our  impa- 
tience." 


and  Sections  are  now  principally  confined  to  law-books,  and  other  legal  writings, 
modern  composition  is  generally  divided  only  into  Chapters  and  Paragraphs.  And 
frequently,  (unless  very  long)  it  is  distinguished  by  indented  Paragraphs  only, 
f  Sometimes  called  Verses.  | 

*When  a  word  or  phrase,  embraced  in  an  Italic  sentence,  is  t<>  be  distinguished 
from  the  rest,  it  is  generally  printed  in  Roman  letters,  or  SMALL  CAPS  :  as,  "  To 
err  it  human; — tofort/ive.  Divink,"  [ot  divine.] 


BOOK    SECOND. 


47 


EXCEPTIONS. 

1.  All  parenthetical  sentences,  or  parenthetical  adjuncts,  should 
be  separated  by  commas ;  as,  The  city  of  New  York,  within  the  last 
fifteen  years,  has  increased  rapidly  in  population :  Within  the  last 
fifteen  years,  the  city  of  New  York  has  increased  rapidly  in  popu- 
lation. 

2.  The  nominative  case  independent,  nouns  in  apposition,  and 
the  infinitive  mood  absolute,  with  their  adjuncts,  must  be  separat- 
ed by  commas  ;  as,  Colonel,  your  most  obedient ;  It  must  be  so, 
Plato,  thou  reasonest  well ;  Dear  Sir,  your  letter  was  received ; 
Your  letter,  my  dear  Sir,  was  duly  received.  His  father  dying, 
he  succeeded  to  the  estate :  John,  the  Baptist,  Was  beheaded :  To 
be  candid,  I  think  she  was  blamable. 

3.  When  a  verb  of  a  sentence  is  understood,  a  comma  should 
generally  be  inserted ;  as,  From  law  arises  security — from  securi- 
ty, curiosity, — and  from  curiosity,  knowledge. 

RULE  2. 

A  compound  sentence  must  be  resolved  into  simple  ones,  and 
separated  by  commas ;  as,  Virtue  refines  the  affections,  but  vice  de- 
bases them. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1.  Two  words  of  the  same  kind,  immediately  connected  by  a 
conjunction,  though  they  may  render  the  sentence  a  compound  one, 
must  not  be  separated  by  a  comma ;  as,  Some  men  sin  deliberately 
and.  presumptuously.  But  if  there  be  more  than  two,  they  must  all 
be  separated  unless  connected  in  pairs,  in  which  case  thepairs  only 
must  be  separated ;  as,  Deaths  of  parents,  friends,  and  compan- 
ions, are  doubtless  intended  for  our  improvement:  There  is  a  nat- 
ural difference  between  merit  and  demerit,  virtue  and  vice,  wisdom 
and  folly. 

2.  In  comparative  sentences,  where  the  members  are  short,  the 
comma  is  better  omitted ;  as,  Wisdom  is  better  than  riches,  [than 
riches  are.~\ 

3.  Sentences  connected  by  what  cannot  be  separated;  as,  Eat 
what  is  set  before  you.  And  where  the  relative  is  understood,  the 
comma  is  generally  omitted ;  as,  Value  duly  the  opportunities  you 
enjoy,    [which  you  enjoy.] 

4.  When  a  simple  sentence  stands  as  the  object  of  a  preceding 
verb,  and  its  verb  may  be  changed  into  the  infinitive  mood,  the 
comma  may  be  omitted ;  as,  When  I  supposed  he  was  at  rest : 
changed,  when  I  supposed  him  to  be  at  rest. 


RULE  3. 

When  a  longer  pause  than  a  comma  is  required,  and  yet  the 
sense  is  incomplete,  a  semicolon  may  be  used  ;  as,  The  wise  man 
is  happy,  when  he  gains  his  own  approbation ;  the  fool,  when  he 
gains  the  applause  of  those  about  him. 

RULE  4. 

The  colon  is  used  when  the  sense  of  the  division  of  a  period  is 
complete,  so  as  to  admit  of  a  full  point,  but  something  is  added  by 
way  of  illustration ;  as,  A  brute  arrives  at  a  point  of  perfection 
that  he  can  never  pass  :  in  a  few  years  he  has  all  the  endowments 
he  is  capable  of ;  and  were  he  to  live  ten  thousand  more,  would  be 
the  same  thing  he  is  at  present. 

Note.  This  point  is  of  little  use ;  the  difference  between  the 
colon  and  semicolon  is  so  small,  that  the  two  pauses  are  frequently 
confounded,  as  may  be  seen  by  the  present  version  of  the  Prov- 
erbs.    We  conceive  the  colon  might  be  rejected  without  injury  to 


the  perspicuity  of  sentences ;  and  punctuation  very 
plified. 

RULE  5. 


much  sim- 


A  sentence  making  in  itself  complete  sense,  requires  a  period 
after  it ;  as,  "  Fear  God."     "  Honor  the  King." 

The  period  is  used  also  after  initials  when  used  alone ;  as  after 
A.  D.,  for  Anno  Domini ;  Q.  for  question  ;  and  after  abbreviations ; 
as,  Col.  for  Colonel ;  Mr.  for  Mister ;  Esq.  for  Esquire ;  &c.  for 
and  so  forth  or  et  cetera. 

RULE  6. 

Interrogative  sentences  require  a  mark  of  interrogation ;  and 
sentences  expressing  wonder  or  surprise,  a  mark  of  admiration  af- 
ter them  ;  as,  Whom  do  you  see  ?     How  wonderful  is  man  ! 

EXERCISES    IN    PUNCTUATION. 

COMMA. 

The  tutor  by  instruction  and  discipline  lays  the  foundation  of  the 
pupil's  future  honor. 

Self-conceit  presumption  and  obstinacy  blast  the  prospects  of 
many  a  youth. 

Deliberate  slowly  execute  promptly. 

To  live  soberly  righteously  and  piously  comprehends  the  whole 
of  our  duty. 

The  path  of  piety  and  virtue  pursued  with  a  firm  and  constant 
spirit  will  assuredly  lead  to  happiness. 

Continue  my  dear  child  to  make  virtue  thy  principal  study. 

Peace  of  mind  being  secured  we  may  smile  at  misfortunes. 

He  who  is  a  stranger  to  industry  may  possess  but  he  cannot 
enjoy. 

Beware  of  those  rash  and  dangerous  connexions  which  may  af- 
terwards load  thee  with  dishonor. 

SEMICOLON. 

» 

The  path  of  truth  is  a  plain  and  a  safe  path  that  of  falsehood  is 
a  perplexing  maze. 

Modesty  is  one  of  the  chief  ornaments  of  youth  and  has  ever 
been  esteemed  a  presage  of  rising  merit. 

Heaven  is  the  region  of  gentleness  and  friendship  hell  of  fierce- 
ness and  animosity. 

*  •      COLON. 

Often  is  the  smile  of  gayety  assumed  whilst  the  heart  aches 
within  though  folly  may  laugh  guilt  will  sting. 

There  is  no  mortal  truly  wise  and  restless  at  the  same  time  wis- 
dom is  the  repose  of  minds. 

PERIOD. 

We  ruin  the  happiness  of  life  when  we  attempt  to  raise  it  too 
high  a  tolerable  and  comfortable  state  is  all  that  we  can  propose  to 
ourselves  on  earth  peace  and  contentment  not  bliss  nor  transport 
are  the  full  portion  of  man  perfect  joy  is  reserved  for  heaven. 

INTERROGATION  AND  EXCLAMATION. 

To  lie  down  on  the  pillow  after  a  day  spent  in  temperance  in  be- 
neficence and  in  piety  how  sweet  it  is. 

We  wait  till  to-morrow  to  be  happy  alas  why  not  to-day  shall  we 
be  younger  are  we  sure  we  shall  be  healthier  will  our  passions  be- 
come feebler  and  our  love  of  the  world  less. 


48 


BOOK     SECOND, 


SPELLING. 


Good  spelling,  good  punctuation,  and  good  syntax,  with  a  proper 
use  of  the  capitals,  should  go  hand  in  hand.  But  as  the  Rules  of 
orthography  are  extremely  vague,  they  are  not  wholly  to  be  de- 
pended upon.  Those,  however,  who  may  study  this  book,  are 
most  earnestly  entreated  not  to  neglect  their  spelling  ;  and  although 
the  rules  may  be  of  considerable  use,  yet  the  only  way  to  become 
a  good  speller,  is  by  observation  and  a  dictionary.  The  following 
example,  (a  note  from  a  woman,  whose  husband  had  just  gone  to 
sea,  to  her  clergyman),  will  show  how  great  a  perversion  of  sense 
may  be  occasioned  by  the  mis-spelling  of  a  single  word,  and  the 
mis-placing  of  a  single  point.  "  Captain  Toby,  having  gone  to  see 
his  wife,  desires  the  prayers  of  this  church  and  congregation,"  &c. 
It  should  have  been,  "  Captain  Toby,  having  gone  to  sea,  his  wife 
desires  the  prayers,"  &c.  Even  the  mis-placing  of  a  single  com- 
ma, only,  will  sometimes  entirely  alter  the  meaning  of  a  sentence. 
Example  1st. — "  To  war  shalt  thou  go  and  thou  shalt  return,  never 
in  war  shalt  thou  perish."  Now  by  moving  the  comma  one  word 
farther  forward,  the  meaning  of  the  sentence  is  completely  revers- 
ed. "  To  war  shalt  thou  go,  and  thou  shalt  return  never,  in  war 
shalt  thou  perish."     Example  2d. — An  ingenious  expedient  was 


once  devised  to  save  a  prisoner  charged  with  robbery,  in  the  Crim- 
inal Court  at  Dublin.  The  principal  thing  that  appeared  in  evi- 
dence against  him,  was  a  confession  alledged  to  have  been  made 
by  him  at  the  police  office,  and  taken  down  by  a  police  officer,  in 
writing,  and  the  following  passage  was  read  from  it : 

"  Magnam  said  he  never  robbed  but  twice  said  it  was  Crawford." 
This,  it  will  be  observed,  has  no  mark  of  the  writer's  having  any 
notion  of  punctuation,  but  the  meaning  he  attached  to  it,  was  this : 
"  Magnam  said  he  never  robbed  but  twice  :  said  it  was    Craw- 
ford." 

Mr.  O'Gorman,  the  counsel  for  the  prisoner,  begged  to  look  at 
the  paper.  He  perused  it,  and  rather  astonished  the  police  officer 
by  asserting  that  so  far  from  proving  the  guilt  of  the  prisoner,  it 
clearly  proved  his  innocence. 

"  This,"  said  the  legal  gentleman,  "  is  the  fair  and  obvious  read- 
ing of  the  sentence :" 

"  Magnam  said  he  never  robbed,  but  twice  said  it  was  Crawford." 
This  interpretation  had  its  effect  upon  the  jury ;  and  the  man 
was  acquitted. 


PROSODY. 


Prosody  consists  of  two  parts ;  the  former  teaches  the  true 
pronunciation  of  words,  comprising  Accent,  Quantity,  Emphasis, 
Pause,  and  Tone  ;  and  the  latter,  the  laws  of   Versification. 

Accent. — Accent  is  the  laying  of  a  peculiar  stress  of  the  voice 
on  a  certain  letter  or  syllable  in  a  word,  that  it  may  be  better 
heard  than  the  rest,  or  distinguished  from  them ;  as,  in  the  word 
presume,  the  stress  of  the  voice  must  be  on  the  letter  u,  and  the 
second  syllable,  swne,  which  takes  the  accent. 

Quantity. — The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  that  time  which  is  oc- 
cupied in  pronouncing  it.     It  is  considered  as  long  or  short. 

A  vowel  or  syllable  is  long,  when  the  accent  is  on  the  vowel ; 
which  occasions  it  to  be  slowly  joined,  in  pronunciation,  to  the  fol- 
lowing letter ;  as,  Fall,  bale,  mood,  house,  feature. 

A  syllable  is  short,  when  the  accent  is  on  the  consonant ;  which 
occasions  the  vowel  to  be  quickly  joined  to  the  succeeding  letter ; 
as,  ant,  bSnnet,  hunger. 

A  long  syllable  requires  double  the  time  of  a  short  one  in  pro- 
nouncing it :  Thus,  Mate  and  Note  should  be  pronounced  as  slowly 
again,  as  Mat  and  Not. 

Emphasis. — By  emphasis  is  meant  a  stronger  and  fuller  sound  of 
voice,  by  which  we  distinguish  some  word  or  words  on  which  we 
design  to  lay  particular  stress,  and  to  show  how  they  affect  the  rest 
of  the  sentence.  Sometimes  the  emphatic  words  must  be  distin- 
guished by  a  particular  tone  of  voice,  as  well  as  by  a  greater  stress. 

Pauses. — Pauses  or  rests,  in  speaking  and  reading,  are  a  total 
cessation  of  the  voice,  during  a  perceptible,  and,  in  many  cases,  a 
measurable  space  of  time. 


Tones. — Tones  are  different  both  from  emphasis  and  pauses; 
consisting  in  the  modulation  of  the  voice,  and  in  the  notes  or  vari- 
ations of  sound  which  we  employ  in  the  expression  of  our  senti- 
ments. 

VERSIFICATION. 

Versification,  or  Poetry,  is  a  species  of  composition,  made 
according  to  certain  harmonious  measures,  or  proportions  of  sound. 

Rhyme  is  that  kind  of  poetry  in  which  the  terminating  sound  of 
one  line,  agrees  with  that  of  another ;  as, 

Go  tell  my  son,  said  he, 
All  thou  hast  heard  of  me. 

A  verse,  in  poetry,  is  one  line ;  in  prose,  a  short  division  of  a 
compositon. 

A  couplet  or  distich  consists  of  two  poetic  lines,  making  complete 
sense ;  as, 

Indulge  the  true  ambition  to  excel 

In  the  best  art — the  art  of  thinking  well. 

A  triplet  consists  of  three  lines  which  rhyme  together ;  as, 

Of  many  things,  some  few  I  shall  explain, 
Teach  thee  to  shun  the  dangers  of  the  main, 
And  how  at  length  the  promis'd  land  to  gain. 

A  stanza  is  a  combination  of  several  lines,  [generally  but  four,] 
constituting  a  regular  division  of  a  poem.     In  popular  language, 


BOOK    SECOND. 


49 


stanzas  are  frequently  called  verses  ;  as,  Sing  the  first  four  verses. 

N.  B.   The  word  verse  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  poetry  or 

rhyme  ;  as, 

The  tale,  which  I  will  now  rehearse, 
Was  told  by  Jack,  though  not  in  verse. 
Blank  verse,  like  other  poetry,  is  measured,  but  does  not  rhyme ; 

as, 

All  on  earth  is  shadow  ;  all  beyond 

Is  substance :  the  reverse  is  folly's  creed. 

OF   POETICAL    FEET. 

Afoot  is  a  rhythmical  division  of  a  verse ;  as, 

When  all  |  thy  mer  |  cies,  O  |  my  God ! 
My  ri  |  sing  s<5ul  |  surveys. 
A  certain  number  of  syllables,  connected,  form  a  foot.  They 
are  called  feet,  because  it  is  by  their  aid  that  the  voice,  as  it  were, 
steps  along  through  the  verse  in  a  measured  pace :  and  it  is  neces- 
sary that  the  syllables,  which  mark  this  regular  movement  of  the 
voice,  should,  in  some  way,  be  distinguished  from  the  others. 

Feet  are  all  reducible  to  eight  kinds  ;  four  of  two  syllables,  and 
four  of  three  syllables ;  viz. 

A  Trochee  •  *  A  Dactyl  -  w  w 

An  Iambus  *  -  An  Amphibrach  <•>  -  ^ 

A  Spondee An  Anapaest  «  v  - 

A  Pyrrhic  «  V  A  Tribrach  «  v  « 

A  Trochee  has  the  first  syllable  accented,  and  the  last  unaccent- 
ed ;  as,  hateful,  pettish. 

Restless  mortals  toil  for  nought ; 
Bliss  in  vain  from  earth  Is  sought. 
An  Iambus  has  the  first  syllable  unaccented,  and  the  last  accent- 
ed ;  as,  delay,  behold. 

And  may  at  last  my  weary  age, 
Find  out  the  peaceful  hermitage. 
A  Spondee  has  both  the  words  or  syllables  accented  ;  as,  a  high 
tree,  the  pale  moon. 

See  the  bold  youth  strain  up  the  threatnlng  steep. 
Old  time  brings  man  t<5  his  long  home. 
A  Pyrrhic  has  both  the  words  or  syllables  unaccented ;  as,  Sn 
the  tall  tree. 

In  a  small  stream,  by  the"  side  oT  a  mountain, 
We  bath'd  with  delight. 
A  Dactyl  has  the  first  syllable  accented,  and  the  last  two  unac- 
cented ;  as,  conqueror,  horrible. 

From  the  low  pleasures  of  this  fallen  nature, 
Rise  we  to  higher,  &c. 
An  Amphibrach  has  the  first  and  last  syllable  unaccented,  and 
the  middle  one  accented ;  as,  delightful,  amazing. 

The  piece  you  say  is  incorrect,  why  take  It, 
I'm  all  submission,  what  you'd  have  it,  make  it 
An  Anapaest  has  the  first  two  syllables  unaccented,  and  the  last 
accented  ;  as,  Incomm5de,  contravene. 

May  I  govern  my  passions  with  absolute  sway, 
And  grow  wiser  and  better  as  life  fades  away. 
A  Tribrach  has  all  its  syllables  unaccented  ;  as,  unpardonable, 
innumerable. 

And  rolls  impetuous  to  the  plain. 
Some  of  these  feet  may  be  denominated  principal  feet ;  as  pieces 
of  poetry  may  be  wholly,  or  chiefly  formed  of  any  of  them.  Such 
are  the  Trochee,  Iambus,  Dactyl,  and  Anapaest.  They  are  capa- 
ble also  of  numerous  variations,  by  mixing  them  with  each  other, 
and  by  the  admission  of  the  secondary  feet.  The  Spondee,  Pyr- 
rhic, Amphibrach,  and  Tribrach,  are  secondary  feet. 

Measure,  in  poetry,  is  the  number  of  syllables  or  feet  contained 
in  a  line.     The  measures  that  are  most  in  use,  are  those  of  ten, 


eight,  and  seven  syllables :   but  the  Iambic,  Trochaic,  and  Ana- 
paestic verse,  is  sometimes  very  short,  and  sometimes  long  measure. 
Scanning  is  the  resolving  of  verses  into  the  several  feet  of 
which  they  are  composed. 

OF  PAUSES. 
There  are  two  kinds  of  poetical  pauses — one  for  the  sense,  call- 
ed the  sentential  pause,  and  known  to  us  by  the  names  of  comma, 
semicolon,  &c. — the  other  for  the  melody,  called    the  harmonic 
pause.     These  are  perfectly  distinct  from  each  other. 

The  harmonic  pause  may  be  subdivided  into  the  final  pause 
and  the  ccesural  pause.  These  sometimes  coincide  with  the  sen- 
tential pause,  and  sometimes  have  an  independent  state ;  that  is, 
exist  where  there  is  no  stop  in  the  sense. 

The  final  pause  takes  place  at  the  end  of  the  line,  closes  the 
verse,  marks  the  measure,  preserves  the  melody,  without  interfer- 
ing with  the  sense,  and  alone,  on  many  occasions,  marks  the  differ- 
ence between  prose  and  verse ;  which  will  be  evident  from  the  fol- 
lowing arrangement  of  a  few  poetical  lines: 

"Of  man's  first  disobedience,  and  the  fruit  of  that  forbidden  tree, 
whose  mortal  taste  brought  death  into  the  world,  and  all  our  woe, 
with  loss  of  Eden,  till  one  greater  Man  restore  us,  and  regain  the 
blissful  seat,  sing,  heavenly  muse !" 

A  stranger  to  the  poem  would  not  easily  discover  that  this  was 
verse  ;  but  would  take  it  for  poetical  prose.  By  properly  adjust- 
ing the  final  pause,  we  shall  restore  the  passage  to  its  true  state  of 
verse. 

Of  man's  first  disobedience,  and  the  fruit 
Of  that  forbidden  tree,  whose  mortal  taste 
Brought  death  into  the  world,  and  all  our  wo, 
With  loss  of  Eden,  till  one  greater  Man 
Restore  us,  and  regain  the  blissful  seat, 
Sing,  heavenly  muse ! 
These  examples  show  the  necessity  of  reading  verse,  in  such  a 
manner,  as  to  make  every  line  sensible  to  the  ear ;  for,  what  is  the 
use  of  melody,  or  for  what  end  has  the  poet  composed  in  verse,  if, 
in  reading  his  lines,  we  suppress  his  numbers,  by  omitting  the  final 
pause  ;  and  degrade  them,  by  our  pronunciation,  into  mere  prose? 
As  this  pause  is  made  only  by  the  suspension  of  the  voice,  not  by 
a  change,  it  prevents  that  monotony,  that  sameness  of  note  at  the 
end  of  lines,  which,  however  pleasing  to  a  rude,  is  disgusting  to  a 
delicate  ear. 

The  ca^sural  pause  divides  the  line  into  equal,  or  unequal  parts, 
falling  generally  on  the  4th,  5th,  or  6th  syllable,  in  heroic  verse. 

Exemplification  of  the   Ceesural  Pauses :  ["] 

The  silver  eel,"  in  shining  volumes  roll'd, 

The  yellow  carp,"  in  scales  bedropp'd  with  gold. 

Round  broken  columns,"  clasping  ivy  twin'd, 
O'er  heaps  of  ruins/  stalk'd  the  stately  hind. 

Oh,  say,  what  stranger  cause,"  yet  unexplor'd, 
Could  make  a  gentle  belle"  reject  a  lord. 

The  line  is  sometimes  divided  into  four  parts,  by  the  introduction 
of  what  is  called  a  demi-casura ;  thus  : 

Warms'  in  the  sun,"  refreshes'  in  the  breeze, 
Glows'  in  the  stars,"  and  blossoms'  in  the  trees  ; 
Lives'  through  all  life,"  extends'  through  all  extent, 
Spreads,'  undivided,"  operates',  unspent. 

RHETORIC  AND  ORATORY. 

Rhetoric,  or  oratory,  is  the  art  of  speaking  justly,  method- 
ically, and  elegantly,  upon  any  subject ;  so  as  to  instruct,  persuade, 
and  please.  A  speech  made  according  to  the  rules  of  this  art,  is 
called  an  Oration,  and  the  speaker  an  Orator.  The  word  rhetoric 
is  derived  from  a  Greek  word  of  the  same  signification. 

A  good  orator  must  be  eminent  for  invention,  disposition,  memo- 
ry, gesture,  and  elocution. 


50 


BOOK     SECOND. 


Invention  is  the  talent  of  forming,  or  selecting,  such  arguments, 
for  the  proving  or  illustrating  of  a  subject,  as  will  move  the  pas- 
sions, and  conciliate  or  instruct  the  minds  of  the  hearers. 

Disposition  is  the  arrangement  of  the  arguments,  in  the  most 
orderly  and  advantageous  manner. 

Gesture  is  the  natural  or  the  artificial,  accommodation  of  the  atti- 
tude to  the  several  parts  of  a  discourse ; — the  "suiting  of  the  action 
to  the  word."  . 

Elocution  is  the  art  of  expressing  our  ideas  in  a  clear  -and  dis- 
tinct manner,  and  in  harmonious,  appropriate  language.  Elocution 
comprises, 

1st.  Composition;  or  the  grammatical  arrangement,  plainness, 
and  propriety  of  language. 

2d.  Elegance;  which  consists  in  the  purity,  perspicuity,  and  po- 
liteness of  language,  and  is  gained  chiefly  by  studying  the  most  cor- 
rect writers,  conversing  with  polite,  well-informed  people,  and  mak- 
ing frequent  and  careful  essays  in  composition. 

3d.  Dignity;  which  adorns  language  with  sublime  thoughts, 
rhetorical  figures,  &c. 

An  oration  has  five  parts ;  the  exordium,  narration,  confirma- 
tion, refutation,  and  peroration. 

The  exordium,  or  preamble,  is  the  beginning  of  the  discourse ; 
serving  to  gain  the  good  opinion  of  the  hearers  ;  to  secure  their  at- 
tention, and  to  give  them  a  general  notion  of  the  subject.  It  ought 
to  be  clear,  modest,  and  not  too  prolix. 

The  narration  is  the  recital  of  the  facts  as  they  happened ;  or, 
as  they  are  supposed  to  have  happened.  It  ought  to  be  perspicu- 
ous, probable,  concise,  and  (on  most  subjects)  entertaining. 

The  confirmation  is  the  proving  by  argument,  example,  or  au- 
thority, the  truth  of  the  propositions  advanced  in  the  narration.* 

The  refutation,  or  confutation,  is  the  destroying  of  the  arguments 
of  the  antagonists ;  by  denying  what  is  apparently  false,  detecting 
some  flaw  in  the  reasoning,  or  showing  the  invalidity  of  the  proof. 
It  should  be  sharp  and  lively. 

The  peroration,  or  conclusion,  is  a  recapitulation  of  the  principal 
arguments,  concisely  summed  up  with  new  force  and  weight;  in 
order  to  excite  the  feeling  of  hatred  or  pity. 

TROPES,  OR  FIGURES  OF  SPEECH. 

Tropes,  or  figures  of  speech,  always  denote  some  departure 
from  simplicity  of  expression ;  as,  "A  good  man  enjoys  comfort  in 
the  midst  of  adversity."  This  is  simple  language :  but  when  I 
say — "  To  the  upright  there  ariseth  light  in  darkness,"  I  express 
the  same  sentiment  in  a  figurative,  and  in  a  more  impressive  and 
vivid  manner.  Figures,  or  tropes,  greatly  enliven  and  enrich  lan- 
guage. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  principal  figures — personification, 
apostrophe,  hyperbole,  'simile,  metaphor,  allegory,  irony,  climax,  me- 
tonymy, and  synecdoche. 

Personification  bestows  life  and  action  upon  things  inanimate  ; 
as,  The  earth  thirsts  for  rain. 

Cheer'd  with  the  grateful  smell,  old  ocean  smiles. 
Behold,  the  morn,  in  russet  mantle  clad, 
Walks  o'er  the  dew  of  yon  high  eastern  hills. 

Apostrophe  is  a  figure  nearly  allied  to  personification.  It  con- 
sists in  bestowing  an  ideal  presence  upon  real,  either  dead  or  ab- 
sent. We  address  them  as  if  they  stood  before  us,  listening  to  the 
overflow  of  our  passions ;  as, 

"  Retire  ;  for  it  is  night  my  love,  and  the  dark  winds  sigh  in  your 
hair.  Retire  to  the  hall  of.  my  feast,  and  think  of  the  times  that 
are  past;  for  I  will  not  return  till  the  storm  of  war  is  gone." — Os- 

SIAN. 

"  Weep  on  the  rocks  of  the  roaring  winds,  O  maid  of  Inistore ; 
bend  thy  fair  head  over  the  waves,  thou  fairer  than  the  ghost  of 
the  hills,  when  it  moves  in  a  sun-beam  at  noon,  over  the  silence  of 

♦Rhetoricians  advise  us  to  place  our  strongest  arguments  in  the  front,  the  weak- 
est in  the  middle,  and  to  reserve  some  of  the  best  till  the  close. 


Morven.     He  is  fallen  ;  thy  youth  is  low  ;  pale  beneath  the  sword 
of  Cuchullim" — Ossiax. 

The  Hyperbole  consists  in  magnifying  or  diminishing  an  object 
beyond  reality. 

Hyperbole  soars  high,  or  creeps  too  slow ; 
Exceeds  the  truth,  things  wonderful  to  show. 
He  touched  the  skies.     A  snail  don't  crawl  so  slow. 

• 1  found  her  on  the  floor, 

In  all  the  storm  of  grief;  yet  beautiful ; 

Pouring  forth  tears,  at  such  a  lavish  rate, 

That  were  the  world  on  fire,  they  might  have  drown'd 

The  wrath  of  Heaven,  and  quench'd  the  mighty  ruin. — Lee. 

"  He  was  owner  of  a  piece  of  ground  not  larger  than  a  Lacede- 
monian letter." 

A  simile  is  a  compai-ison,  by  which  any  thing  is  illustrated. 
This  figure,  equally  familiar  and  beautiful,  discovers  resemblances, 
real  or  imaginary,  between  actions,  which,  in  their  general  nature, 
are  dissimilar ;  as, 

"  The  music  of  Caryl  was  like  the  memory  of  joys  that  are 
past,  pleasant  and  mournful  to  the  soul." — Ossian. 

She  never  told  her  love  ; 

But  let  concealment,  like  a  worm  i'  the  bud, 

Feed  on  her  damask  cheek  :  She  pined  in  thought : 

And,  with  a  green  and  yellow  melancholy, 

She  sat,  like  Patience  on  a  monument,  smiling  at  grief. — Shak. 

A  metaphor*  is  the  putting  of  the  name  of  one  thing  for  that  of 
another ;  so  as  to  comprise  a  simile  in  a  single  word  ;  or,  it  is  the 
application  of  a  word  to  a  use,  to  which,  in  its  original  import,  it 
cannot  be  put ;  as, 

Wallace  was  a  thunderbolt  of  war ; 
Fingal,  the  gale  of  spring. 

A  hero  resembles  a  lion,  and  is  often  compared  to  one.  Such  a 
comparison  is  a  simile ,  but  imagine  a  hero  to  be  a  lion,  instead  of 
only  resembling  one,  and  you  have  a  metaphor. 

"  Like  a  mighty  pillar,  doth  this  one  man  uphold  the  State." 
[This  is  a  simile.]  "  He  is  the  sole  pillar  of  this  ponderous  State." 
A  metaphor.] 

An  Allegory  is  a  continued  metaphor ; — or,  it  is  the  representa- 
tion of  one  thing  by  another,  that  resembles  it,  and  that  is  made  to 
stand  for  it. 

An  allegory  is  a  chain  of  tropes ; — 

I've  passed  the  shoals  ;  fair  gales  now  swell  my  hopes. 

"  Venus  grows  cold  without  Ceres  and  Bacchus."  i.  e. — love 
grows  cold  without  bread  and  wine. 

There  cannot  be  a  more  beautiful  and  correct  allegory  than  the 
following;  in  which  the  people  are  represented  under  the  image  of 
a  vine. 

"  Thou  hast  brought  a  vine  out  of  Egypt ;  thou  hast  cast  out  the 
heathen,  and  planted  it :  thou  preparedst  room  before  it,  and  didst 
cause  it  to  take  deep  root,  and  it  filled  the  land.  The  hills  were 
covered  with  the  shadow  of  it,  and  the  boughs  thereof  were  like 
the  goodly  cedars.  She  sent  out  her  boughs  unto  the  seas,  and  her 
branches  unto  the  river.  Why  hast  thou,  then,  broken  down  her 
hedges,  so  that  all  they  who  pass  by  the  way  do  pluck  her  ?  The 
boar  out  of  the  wood  doth  waste  it ;  and  the  wild  beast  of  the  field 
doth  devour  it.  Return,  we  beseech  thee,  0  God  of  hosts ;  look 
down  from  heaven,  and  behold,  and  visit  this  vine." — 80th  Psalm. 

Irony  is  a  mode  of  speech  in  which  the  meaning  is  contrary  to 
the  words. 

Irony,  dissembling,  with  an  air, 
Means  otherwise  than  words  declare. 

"  Cry  aloud ;  for  he  is  a  god :  either  he  is  talking,  or  he  is  pur- 

*  A  metaphor  differs  from  a  simile  in  form  only,  not  in  substance:  comparison 
is  the  foundation  of  both. 


BOOK    SECOND. 


51 


suing  a  journey,  or  peradventure  he  sleepeth,  and  must  be  awaked." 
1  Kings,  xviii.  27. 

A  Climax  is  a  figure  by  which  the  sentence  gradually  rises. 
A  climax,  'tis  said,  by  gradation  ascends. 
They  were  my  countrymen,  my  neighbors,  my  friends. 
"  France,  amidst  the  ferocity  of  successive  factions  ;  unaided  by 
a  single  friend  ;  assailed,  on  all  sides,  by  the  strongest  energies  of 
surrounding  kingdoms,  preserved  her  territory  uninjured." 

Metonymy  puts  the  cause  for  the  effect;  the  effect  for  the  cause;  the 
contains  for  the  contained;  or  the  sign  for  the  thing  signified;  as, 
We  are  reading  Virgil, — i.  e.  Virgil's  works  :  Gray  hairs, 
[i.  e.  old  age]  should  be  respected ;  The  kettle  boils," — i.  e.  the 
water  in  the  kettle ;  He  addressed  the  chair, — i.  e.  the  person  in 
the  chair ;  She  assumed  the  sceptre,  i.  e.  the  royal  authority. 

A  Synecdoche  puts  a  part  for  the  whole,  or  the  whole  for  a 
part;  as, 

While  o'er  the  roof,  [house]  loud  thunders  break. 
By  the  sweat  of  his  brow,  earns  he  his  bread,  [food,  clothing, 
&c.] 

COMPOSITION. 

Composition  is  the  forming  of  words  together  in  grammatical 
order. 

Perspicuity  is  a  fundamental  quality  in  every  piece  of  correct 
composition  :  a  quality  so  essential  that  nothing  can  atone  for  the 
want  of  it.  We  are  pleased  with  an  author,  just  in  proportion  as 
he  frees  us  from  all  fatigue  in  searching  for  his  meaning,  and  car- 
ries us,  as  upon  the  swell  of  a  sweet  flowing  style,  without  embar- 
rassment or  confusion,  through. his  subject. 

Perspicuity  and  accuracy  of  expression,  require  attention  to  the 
purity,  propriety  and  precision  of  language. 

Purity  of  language  consists  in  the  use  of  such  words  and  con- 
structions as  belong  to  the  idiom  of  the  language  we  speak,  in  op- 
position to  words  and  phrases  taken  from  other  languages,*  or  that 
are  ungrammatical,  obsolete,  new-coined,  or  used  without  proper 
authority ;  as,  incumberment,  quoth  he,  delicatesse,  &c. 

Propriety  of  language  consists  in  the  selection  of  such  words  and 
phrases  as  are  best  suited  to  express  the  ideas  we  mean  to  convey 
by  them. 

In  order  to  preserve  propriety  in  our  language,  we  must  be 
careful, 

1.  To  avoid  the  injudicious  use  of  technical  terms. 

2.  To  avoid  low  expressions  ;  as,  Topsy-turvy,  hurly-burly,  pell- 
mell,  &c. 

■  3.  To  supply  words  that  are  wanting. 

4.  Not  to  use  the  same  word  too  frequently,  nor  in  different 
senses  in  the  same  sentence. 

5.  To  avoid  equivocal  or  ambiguous  words. 

6.  To  use  no  unintelligible  or  inconsistent  words  or  phrases. 

*  Foreign  and  learned  words,  unless  where  necessity  requires  them,  should  nev- 
er be  admitted  into  our  composition.  On  some  occasions,  they  give  an  appear- 
ance of  elevation  and  dignity  of  style  :  but  they  often  render  it  stiff  and  appar- 
ently forced. 


7.  To  employ  only  such  words  and  phrases  as  are  best  adapted 
to  the  ideas  we  wish  to  communicate,  and  most  expressive  of  them. 

Precision  requires  the  retrenching  of  all  superfluities;  or  the 
pruning  of  our  language,  so  as  to  exhibit  neither  more  nor  less  than 
the  exact  copy  of  the  idea  we  mean  to  communicate. 

The  words  we  use  to  express  our  ideas  may  be  faulty  in  three 
respects ;  viz : 

1.  They  may  not  express  the  idea  which  we  intend,  but  some 
other  that  resembles  it. 

2.  They  may  express  that  idea,  but  not  fully  and  completely. 

3.  They  may  express  that  idea,  together  with  something  more 
than  is  intended. 

Note.  The  great  source  of  a  loose  style,  in  opposition  to  pre- 
cision, is  the  injudicious  use  of  words  termed  synonymous.  They 
are  called  synonymous,  because  they  agree  in  expressing  one  prin- 
cipal idea ;  but  for  the  most  part,  if  not  always,  they  express  it  with 
some  diversity  of  circumstance. 

SENTENCES. 

Remark  1.  Sentences,  in  general,  should  neither  be  very  long 
nor  very  short.  Long  sentences  require  a  labored  attention  in  or- 
der to  our  clearly  perceiving  the  connexion  and  sense :  while  very 
short  ones,  on  the  contrary,  break  the  connexion  of  thought,  and  in- 
jure the  sense.  Yet,  occasionally,  both  may  be  introduced  with  ad- 
vantage. 

2.  A  long  train  of  sentences  constructed  in  the  same  manner, 
and  with  the  same  number  of  members,  tires  the  ear,  and  therefore 
should  never  be  allowed  in  any  composition.  But  a  judicious  mix- 
ture of  periods,  longer  and  shorter,  and  variously  constructed,  grat- 
ifies the  ear,  and  gives  force  and  animation  to  the  style. 

3.  In  the  arrangement  of  a  sentence,  the  words  or  members, 
most  clearly  related,  should  be  placed  as  near  to  each  other  as  pos- 
sible, and  so  as  to  make  their  mutual  relation  manifest. 

4.  Several  circumstances  should  not  be  crowded  together,  but 
interspersed  in  different  parts  of  the  sentence,  connected  with  the 
principal  words  on  which  they  depend. 

5.  Never  press  into  one  sentence,  things  which  have  so  little 
connexion  as  to  admit  of  being  divided  into  two  or  three.  Long, 
involved,  intricate  sentences,  are  great  blemishes  in  composition. 

6.  During  Ihe  course  of  the  sentence,  change  the  scene  as  often 
as  possible ;  and  keep  clear  of  all  unnecessary  parentheses. 

7.  The  several  words  and  members  of  which  a  sentence  is  com- 
posed, should  be  so  arranged  as  that  each  may  have  its  due  weight 
and  force,  and  the  whole  sense  be  brought  out  to  the  best  advan- 
tage. 

8.  A  weaker  assertion  or  proposition  should  never  come  after  a 
stronger  one ;  and,  when  a  sentence  consists  of  two,  or  more  mem- 
bers, the  longest  should  generally  come  last ;  as,  "  When  our  pas- 
sions have  forsaken  us,  we  flatter  ourselves  with  the  belief  that  we 
have  forsaken  them. 

9.  Pleasing  ideas  and  forcible  reasoning  can  hardly  be  transmit- 
ted to  the  mind  by  means  of  harsh  and  disagreeable  sounds :  par- 
ticular attention  ought  therefore  to  be  paid  to  the  harmony  and 
easy  flow  of  the  language. 


ERRATA. 


Note  47.  When  the  verb  ought  is  used  in  the  present  tense,  the  present  of  the 
infinitive  mood  should  always  follow;  as,  I  ought  to  un-ite  to-day.  But  when  used 
in  the  imperfect,  the  ■^perfect  of  the  infinitive  should  follow  it;  as,  I  ought  to  have 
written  yesterday. 

When  dare  and  need  are  transitive,  they  retain  their  personal  terminations,  and 


are  both  exceptions  to  the  9th  rule;  as,  he  dares  me  to  enter  the  list;  he  needs  me 
to  assist  him.  But  when  intransitive  the  9th  rule  applies,  and  in  popular  practice, 
the  personal  termination  in  the  third  person  is  frequently  omitted;  as,  he  dare  not 
do  it;  nobody  need  be  afraid.    [Instead  of  d-ares  and  needs-] 


■HMnMMaMMNfcMMHMM 


mm* 


mm 


